tour 4 day

Expedia Rewards is now One Key™

• 4 Day Getaways
• Things to do

I only need accommodations for part of my trip

Better together

Save up to $580 when you book a flight and hotel together*

Find the right fit

With over 300,000 hotels worldwide, it's easy to create a perfect package

Plan, book, and manage your trip all in one place

Everyone needs to getaway sometimes

Where can i go for a quick vacation.

Expedia has stacks of 4 day vacation ideas, ready to go. Just think, from the East Coast, you can be in Bermuda in a couple of hours, soaking up the sunshine and local rum. Maybe you prefer something rich in festivals, circuses, and with a distinct European flavor— Montreal is super easy to get to from many US cities, making it a great 4 day getaway. You could head to Nashville for some Southern charm with a shot of Dolly or Billy Ray and that amazing hot chicken.

How do I find the best 4 day getaways?

Pop in your starting location, destination, and travel dates then hit search to see all the exciting 4 day vacation packages. Or you can design your own 4 day getaway by clicking on hotels, car rental, things to do, or flights. With Expedia, it’s easy to find the best 4 day vacations for you then just click to book.

What are the best 4 day vacations for couples?

Picture yourself walking hand in hand through New Orleans to the sound of jazz before retreating to your romantic hotel in the French Quarter —an area rich in historic architecture. Imagine watching the sunset with your special one from the balcony of your oceanfront vacation rental in Myrtle Beach . Treat your loved one to candlelit dinners and wine tastings in Napa Valley where a 4 day getaway is the perfect couple’s retreat.

How do I get great 4 day vacation deals?

With incredible 4 day getaway deals on a brilliant selection of packages, accommodation, and flights, you can craft your ideal four day vacation. Simply enter your location, destination, and travel dates and hit search. Use the filters to refine your results by price, so if you want for cheap 4 day vacations, you see the budget options first. You can also use the filters to choose your neighborhood, favorite amenities, and more.

Why should I book a 4 day getaway with Expedia?

At Expedia, we help you save money on booking your dream 4 day getaway. With many flights and properties offering free cancellation, you have the freedom to book now and change or cancel if you need to. It’s easy to compare prices and simply click to book your favorite. So, book your 4 day getaway today.

• Vacation packages currently trending

Save with our bundle deals!

Car, Stay, Flight... book everything you need for your perfect weekend getaway with Expedia and save!

Vacation rental

Apartments, Villas, Cabins... we have everything you need!

Car Rentals

Hit the road with one of our car rental deals

Explore other types of vacation packages

All Inclusive Vacations

Beach Vacations

Kid Friendly Vacations

Golf Vacations

Luxury Vacations

Romantic Vacations

Ski Vacations

Adventure Vacations

Gay & Lesbian Vacations 

Where to go when

• More Vacation Ideas
• Getaway Ideas
• Vacation Deals & Tips
• Top Vacation Destinations
• Best Travel Destinations by Month
• New Year's vacation deals
• Christmas vacation deals
• Spring travel deals
• Spring break vacation deals
• National Park Vacation Deals
• Northern Lights Vacations
• Memorial Day Weekend Getaways
• Fourth of July Weekend Getaways
• Labor Day Weekend Getaways
• MLK Day Weekend Getaways
• Thanksgiving Getaways
• Weekend Getaways
• 1 Day Getaways
• 2 Day Getaways
• 3 Day Getaways
• 5 Day Getaways
• 6 Day Getaways
• One Week Getaways
• 8 Day Getaways
• Las Vegas Getaway
• Vacation Rental Deals
• Vacations under $1000
• Vacations under $500
• Last Minute Vacation Deals
• Last Minute Hotel Deals
• Travel Deals + Vacation Ideas
• Plan a vacation
• Deposit and Vacation Payment Plans
• London Vacations
• Paris Vacations
• Cabo San Lucas Vacations
• Playa Del Carmen Vacations
• New York Vacations
• New Orleans Vacations
• Punta Cana Vacations
• Montego Bay Vacations
• Puerto Vallarta Vacations
• Honolulu Vacations
• Orlando Vacations
• Miami Vacations
• Cancun Vacations
• Los Angeles Vacations
• Fort Lauderdale Vacations
• January Vacations
• February Vacations
• March Vacations
• April Vacations
• May Vacations
• June Vacations
• July Vacations
• August Vacations
• September Vacations
• October Vacations
• November Vacations
• December Vacations

Yellowstone Itinerary 4 Days: The Ultimate First Time Visitor Guide

by Mark and Kristen Morgan

Published: June 18, 2020

Yellowstone National Park is an extraordinary and unique landscape. After visiting the park in both April and October, we know how challenging but rewarding planning the best Yellowstone National Park itinerary can be. We’re going to share all of our knowledge about Yellowstone National Park here, including an amazing 4 days itinerary example.

Above ground, Yellowstone can be described by every synonym of the word breathtaking. But lurking just below the surface is a super-volcano known as Yellowstone Caldera.

As hot magma rises from Earth’s Mantle toward the Crust, pressurized heat escapes in the form of thermal geysers, creating a spectacle worthy of millions of tourists each year.

This ultimate Yellowstone National Park Itinerary explains how to get to Yellowstone, all the best things to do, where to stay and of course walks you step-by-step through 4 amazing days ticking off everything that makes this place so special.

Let’s get stuck into planning your Yellowstone itinerary!

Why Visit The World’s Original National Park?

What is the fist thing you think of when you consider Yellowstone National Park? Probably super heated geysers blowing steam high into the sky, right?

We’d seen geysers before high up in the Chilean Altiplano and they were the one thing we knew for sure we would see here at Yellowstone.

However, the billowing plumes of pressurized steam had stiff competition for our favorite aspect at the park.

Spotting wildlife immediately becomes more exhilarating than looking at steam, the Grand Canyon of Yellowstone is immeasurably more awe-inspiring than steam, and the sheer scale of the world’s very first National Park blows the mind more than steam.

Now, that’s not to say we weren’t impressed by the gigantic geothermal caldera and all of its features, trust us, we were. It’s to let you know Yellowstone is far more than simply clouds of hot, sulfuric acid smelling steam.

Yellowstone is one of the most immense USA national parks and it covers a total of 2.2 million acres of land. Yes, it’s a little bigger than your back yard!

So in a nutshell, why should you visit Yellowstone National Park?

• Beautiful scenery throughout the entire park, plenty of wow-factor moments
• Some of the best wildlife spotting in America – including Grizzly Bears
• Fantastic hiking opportunities surrounded by nature at its finest
• Majestic waterfalls with multiple viewpoints cascading into deep canyons
• And of course Geysers, Hot Springs, Steaming Rivers & Bubbling Mud-Pots

Why 4 Days Itinerary For Yellowstone National Park?

For us personally, Yellowstone National Park had been sky high on our travel bucket list since – well, forever! Who hasn’t always wanted to visit one of Earth’s most unique and natural marvels?!

But we made one mistake the first time we visited. We only gave ourselves 3 days to explore this vast volcanic landscape. We needed 4.

Needless to say we never made the same mistake again second time we visited Yellowstone and planned a full 4 days itinerary.

If you’ve already been to the park before and this is a second or third visit, you might not need as many days. However, if you are planning for a first visit to Yellowstone, plan for 4 days.

Here’s why:

• With 3 days in Yellowstone you aren’t going to have enough time to see and do everything. You’ll spend a lot of time driving, and you’ll rush some of the most popular attractions. Plus, you will have to compromise on some things.
• With 5 days in Yellowstone you are going to find you have already seen and done everything. You will spend a lot of money on accommodation and you should instead drive down to Grand Teton if you do have this spare time.

You will strike the perfect balance between costs, attractions, drive time and being efficient if you plan a 4 days in Yellowstone National Park itinerary.

Grand Teton : Combine Yellowstone with the  stunning  Tetons for the ultimate 6 or 7 day vacation. Our extensive Grand Teton National Park  travel guide covers the 7 best things to do and an ultra scenic 2 day itinerary.

Park Statistics And Factfile

Address : PO Box 168, Yellowstone National Park, WY 82190 Website : nps.gov/yell Phone : (307) 344-7381

Park Hours : All day, every day Entrance Fee : US$ 35 Vehicle (free with America the Beautiful Annual Pass )

Backcountry camping : Permitted, you will need a backcountry permit Accommodation : Hotels, Lodges, Cabins and Campgrounds

Annual Visitors : 4 million Peak Season : July-August

Size: 2.2 million acres Yellowstone Caldera : 45 by 30 miles Last Eruption : 640,000 years ago Geothermal Features : 10,000 Geysers : 300

How To Get To Yellowstone National Park

Okay, we’re talking about Yellowstone and 3,500 square miles of wilderness here! The park has several entrance and exit points, so getting to Yellowstone will depend entirely on where you begin your journey.

There are no fancy names for the entry points, simply the direction they bring you into the park from. But we have included the nearest town to each entrance for reference:

• North – Gardiner, MT
• Northeast – Cooke City, MT
• East – Cody, WY
• South – Jackson, WY
• West – West Yellowstone, MT

Once inside the park, getting around is easy thanks to a well maintained 142-mile figure of 8 road network known as ‘Grand Loop Road’.

Be aware this road will be almost unbearably busy if you visit in Summer, we even experienced some traffic flow issues in snowy October!

Here’s a factor to consider that will impact your 4 days in Yellowstone National Park itinerary:

• Are you visiting only Yellowstone, from point A with a plan to return to point A afterwards in a loop?
• Or is Yellowstone part of a wider road trip?

For example, on our first visit we drove West from South Dakota to Yellowstone, before heading South.

We visited Badlands , Custer State Park and Mount Rushmore , and stopped at Devils Tower National Monument on the way across Wyoming. We then took the South exit out of Yellowstone to Grand Teton National Park.

Therefore, we entered and exited Yellowstone at different entrances. That meant we had to work out how to efficiently see the park on both loops of the figure 8 road without driving back on ourselves.

Consider which entrance you plan to use on the way in and out when planning your visit.

Important Note : When we visited Yellowstone in October after a heavy snowfall, many of the roads in / out of the park were closed. Please be sure to check current road conditions  before setting off.

Popular Yellowstone National Park Road Trips

Salt lake city to yellowstone.

• Option 1 : Take I-15 North to Idaho Falls, then 20 to Yellowstone West entrance (320 miles / 4h 45m).
• Option 2 : Take I-80, 16 and 89 to Jackson, WY and Grand Teton before entering Yellowstone South entrance (330 miles / 6 hours).

The route via Jackson is far more scenic but takes much longer once you factor in driving through Grand Teton.

Read our amazing 7 day  Salt Lake City to Yellowstone and Grand Teton  road trip itinerary for more information.

Denver to Yellowstone

• Option 1 : Take I-80, 287 and 26 to 191 which is the link road between Grand Teton and Yellowstone South entrance (500 miles / 8h 30m).
• Option 2 : Take I-25, 26, 20 to Cody, WY and 14 into Yellowstone East entrance (545 miles / 8h 30m).

South Dakota to Yellowstone

• From Mt Rushmore, drive through Spearfish Canyon and take I-90W towards Buffalo, WY.
• Scenic Byway US-16 from Buffalo to Ten Sleep (Cloud Peak Skyway) is awesome.
• Take 31, 20 and 14 to Cody, WY and then on to Yellowstone East entrance (440 miles / 8 hours).

Read our popular 10 days road trip itinerary from Mount Rushmore to Yellowstone for a day by day break down of best things to do.

North Dakota / Billings to Yellowstone

• Take I-94 to Billings, I-90 briefly and US-212 (known as Bear Tooth Highway).
• This is the route we eventually took first time as we were forced to enter Yellowstone via its Northeast entrance due to road closures.
• Bear Tooth Highway is one heck of a scenic drive – particularly when covered in snow (150 miles / 3 hours).

Jackson, WY / Grand Teton to Yellowstone

Take US-191 scenic road (John D Rockefeller Jr Road) all the way to Yellowstone South entrance (80 miles / 1h 45m).

Need help organizing your visit to Yellowstone? Our popular 60+ page Yellowstone Guidebook can help you with planning every aspect of your trip.

Best Airports To Use For Yellowstone

Yellowstone is enormous and if you’re traveling from further afield in the US or internationally, you will of course need to fly.

Our in depth guide to the 6 best airports near Yellowstone will help you plan exactly which airports to arrive into and depart from near the park.

Pro-tip : Remember, you can fly into one airport and leave from another.

There are a dozen or so airports ranging in size close to the park, here’s  a summary of the best airport options along with which entrance you would enter Yellowstone:

• Bozeman, MT (North entrance)
• Cody, WY (East entrance)
• Jackson, WY (South entrance)
• Yellowstone airport, MT (West entrance – seasonal)
• Salt Lake City, UT (South entrance)
• Denver, CO (East entrance)

International travelers can fly directly into SLC or Denver and either drive or take a connecting flight to on of the smaller regional airports listed above.

For US based travelers, check prices for all airports from your closest origin airport. The smaller and closer airports are far more expensive than SLC or Denver. You will pay for convenience!

• When it comes to booking flights, we always use and recommend  Skyscanner flights search engine  for finding the best value in air tickets.
• Similarly, when we need to pick a car up at the airport, we always use  Rental Cars hire car search engine  to find most options and best value for vehicles.

What Are The Best Things To Do At Yellowstone National Park?

Yellowstone is blessed with having an endless amount of amazing things to do for visitors to include on a 4 days itinerary. You could spend a month here and still not see or do everything this incredible place has on offer.

The only way to plan effectively is by structuring the park into regions. Therefore, in this guide we will break down each region of the park and explain some of the best things to do in each.

Read our ultimate list of the 30 Best Things To See And Do In Yellowstone National Park next for a detailed overview of the most popular geysers, waterfalls, hikes and wildlife spotting areas.

There’s a lot of information coming your way but we will organize it and clearly display everything on a map!

First up, let’s take a look into what makes Yellowstone National Park one of the most sought after landscapes in the world, before we break the park down into 6 distinct regions.

Yellowstone National Park Wildlife Spotting

Wildlife spotting is one of the biggest drivers of tourism to Yellowstone National Park and it has to be a major part of your 4 days itinerary.

This is one of the best places in America to observe a wide range of wild animals in their natural environments.

You have the opportunity to see Grizzly Bears – seldom seem in the lower 48 US States – if that is of interest to you. Personally, we didn’t mind NOT seeing a grizzly!

However, Grizzlies are just the beginning. If you are lucky you might also see Black Bears, Wolves, Elk, Pronghorn, Bighorn Sheep, Moose, Antelope, Mule Deer, Coyotes, Lynx, Mountain Goats, Cougars and Bald Eagles.

It is extremely difficult to predict exactly where these animals are going to be at any given time. But you can give yourself the best shot at seeing wildlife by visiting the right places at the right times of day.

That being said, if these particular areas become busy with humans, animals are likely to move to quieter areas. In truth, we saw more wildlife when we didn’t go looking for it, instead we waited for them to come to us.

Top-tip : If you see small gatherings of people with professional looking photography / telescopic equipment, there’s a good chance of spotting wildlife. However, be polite, don’t make a lot of noise. You might even get a chance to look through their equipment .

Wildlife Respect & Safety

Something vitally important to remember is respect for wildlife. Keep your distance, don’t try to feed them and don’t intimidate the wildlife.

Our number one disappointment with Yellowstone was other tourists. Yes, it can be exciting to see an animal, but that doesn’t mean slamming on your brakes and abandoning your car in the middle of the road so you can take a picture.

More than once, we witnessed altercations between tourists who wanted the best angle from their car window. Be civil toward each other, as well as animals and the environment .

We use the word safety and that’s not for the animals, its for you.

Each year, Yellowstone National Park has to deal with injured tourists who thought they could get close to animals, but they were wrong. Bear in mind (pun intended!) that some of these animals can become dangerous if threatened.

Yellowstone Geyser Basins & Hot Springs

There are over 10,000 geysers and hot springs within the 2.2 million acres of Yellowstone National Park, making this the largest geyser field on the planet.

Almost all geysers and hot springs throughout the park can be viewed from safe distances along wooden boardwalks. It is important to stay on designated board walks, otherwise you may lose a toe or two!

We will cover Yellowstone’s most famous geysers and hot springs within each region of the park below.

You will either have to visit the lesser known basins or plan your visit outside of high season (more on seasons later) if you’re looking for a less crowded experience

Remember there are also bubbling mud pools, smaller colorful geysers and lesser known hot springs. If Old Faithful and Grand Prismatic Spring are too busy, try again early or late in the day.

Yellowstone Hiking

Hiking is less synonymous with Yellowstone than geysers and wildlife, however, you should not overlook this aspect of visiting the park.

Did you know there are over 900 miles of hiking trails here? The problem is, how do you choose which trails to hike?!

To begin with, err on the side of caution by checking Yellowstone’s backcountry situation report   – particularly if you intend to hike away from major trails.

This live updated report will inform you of bear activity, trail closures, rising water levels and depth of snow among other important aspects.

Hiking is the best way to escape crowds and see Yellowstone’s best sites from different (and quieter) perspectives. Plus, you drastically increase your chances of spotting wildlife away from roads and hordes of tourists.

The downside to hiking at Yellowstone National Park is how much time you will lose from an already tightly packed itinerary. Can you really afford to lose a day hiking a 10 mile trail?

That depends on what your goals are and how you like to explore new places.

There are a number of shorter hikes well worth your time, but the longer hikes / backcountry hiking should be reserved only for those who are more interested in hiking than sightseeing.

Is this your second or third vacation to Yellowstone? Try hiking more on this visit if you’ve visited the famous geysers on previous trips.

Grand Canyon of Yellowstone / Yellowstone Upper and Lower Falls

The Grand Canyon of Yellowstone has allured avid photographers to the park for decades. Upper Falls is an impressive spectacle but Lower Falls is the major draw and has to be included on your 4 days in Yellowstone itinerary.

The Yellowstone River crashes into a stunning canyon from 308 ft (twice the height of Niagara Falls), making Lower Falls a paradise for lovers of dramatic scenery.

The best part?

There are various viewing platforms along both the North and South Rim drives running adjacent to the river. Each observation point offers its own perspective of the mighty falls, plus the chance to escape big crowds.

Our top recommendation is to visit the falls on more than one occasion and preferably at sunrise (for more special sunrises see our guides to Sunrise in the Grand Canyon and  Mesa Arch in Utah ).

Although temperatures were below zero in mid-October, we witnessed a gorgeous sunrise over Lower Falls with just a handful of others.

Let’s Break The Park Down Into Regions

As we mentioned earlier, it’s hard to apply a typical list of ‘best things to do’ list for a place like Yellowstone, then expect to turn up and tick them off easily. It is simply too vast a landscape.

Many of the ‘must visit’ sites are spread out across the National Park, meaning planning your visit can become a little overwhelming (one of the reasons we recommend your Yellowstone itinerary to be 4 days and not 3 days).

Therefore, we will break down the park into regions. Take a look at the image below depicting the 6 major regions of Yellowstone:

• Mammoth Hot Springs (North)
• Tower-Roosevelt (Northeast)
• Canyon / Grand Canyon of Yellowstone (Central / East)
• Norris Geyser Basin (Central / West)
• Old Faithful / Upper Geyser Basin (Southwest)
• Yellowstone Lake / West Thumb (Southeast)

Within each region, we will discuss the following where appropriate:

• Most prominent Geysers / Hot Springs
• Best hiking trails
• Wildlife spotting opportunities
• Must visit miscellaneous attractions
• Lodging / Camping

Note : At the end of this section, study the interactive map showing all accommodation and sites of interest. The map will give you an idea about which regions will be top of your wishlist.

1. Mammoth Hot Springs (North)

Mammoth is one of the more built up areas inside Yellowstone National Park and is located just 5 miles from the North entrance.

You will find a hotel, cabins, a grand dining hall, post office, gas, campground, shopping and Albright Visitor Center. Nearby attractions are all within a stones throw of Mammoth village.

Mammoth Geysers and Hot Springs

A spectacular complex of terraces formed by calcium carbonate (travertine) dominates a hillside just minutes from Mammoth village.

By far the busiest attraction in Mammoth, these terraces are best seen at sunrise to avoid crowds and enjoy the first light of day burn through hazy steam in the morning.

Mammoth Hiking Trails

Mammoth isn’t known for epic hikes and we would recommend not using up any time on your 4 days in Yellowstone itinerary with a hike here.

That being said, if you have extra time in the area, there are 2 shorter trails worth looking into:

• Boiling River  – a popular short hike (1 mile roundtrip) and don’t forget your swimwear!
• Lava Creek  – mid-distance (7 miles round-trip) passing by Undine Falls – 60 ft waterfall.

Mammoth Wildlife

Although this area is not usually regarded as prime wildlife spotting territory, we saw our fair share around Mammoth. There were around 30 or 40 bison walking through Mammoth village during our second visit in April, which was really cool to see.

You will more than likely see mule deer wandering the hotel and dining hall car park when you arrive. We also saw pronghorn and elk but bison are well known to be regular visitors to the area.

Black bears can be found around Mammoth. If you want to find one, look in forested areas around less busy areas away from the travertine terraces.

But if you want to avoid bears (particularly if you head up to the terraces for sunrise) is to make noise, talk and clap intermittently.

Mammoth Accommodation

Campgrounds – Mammoth campground is the only campground open all year at Yellowstone. This is a first come first served site and costs US$ 20 per night. More information .

Hotel and Cabins – Mammoth offers a Frontier Cabin, Hot Tub Cabin, Suite, Premium Hotel Room and Cabin without bath. We stayed in a Frontier Cabin and it was perfect with a wonderful hot shower. More information .

2. Tower-Roosevelt (Northeast)

Tower-Roosevelt is located to the Northeast of Yellowstone and is one of the lesser built up areas of the park. You can find gas, primitive lodging and camping here.

This region is best used as a gateway for wildlife spotting in Lamar Valley and hiking Mt Washburn before continuing on to another region for accommodation.

Unfortunately, the section of road between Tower and Canyon has been completely closed for the entirety of both our visits.

Therefore we are yet to hike Mount Washburn or see Tower Fall. There’s always the third time, right?!

Tower Hiking

Mount Washburn is one of the most popular hikes in Yellowstone National Park and one of the most iconic hikes in the US thanks to its panoramic sweeping views stretching as far as Grand Teton on a clear day.

At 10,243ft (3,107m) and with just a 2.5 mile one-way hike from Chittenden or 3 mile on-way hike from Dunraven Pass, the rewards are more than worth your efforts!

Specimen Ridge is a long point to point hike beginning just after turning onto the road into Lamar Valley. It is the perfect trail for those searching for wildlife who want to get away from the main road filled with tourists.

You can hike for 10 minutes or an hour before turning around but you can expect to see wildlife, particularly early in the morning.

Tower Wildlife

Tower Junction is where Yellowstone’s top rated wildlife viewing area ends, as US-212 reaches grand loop road from the Northeast entrance.

This area is known as Lamar Valley and it is the place to be if you are visiting Yellowstone for wildlife observation.

We strongly recommend you visit early or late if you want a real chance of seeing abundant wildlife. You’re all but guaranteed to spot Bison roaming but you can see much more if you time it right.

We entered Yellowstone via the Northeast entrance and drove the entire way through Lamar Valley but it was right before midday (and snowy!) so we didn’t see many animals.

Note : If you are visiting Yellowstone primarily for wildlife spotting, Tower Fall campground is the closest accommodation to Lamar Valley.

Tower Attractions

Yellowstone River Overlook  and Tower Falls are the two major attractions around Tower-Roosevelt region.

Tower Falls is a 132 ft narrow needle-like waterfall. A 4 mile roundtrip trail allows you to see the Yellowstone River flowing powerfully through a gorge.

The trail is family friendly but there are steep cliffs for children to be aware of.

3. Canyon (Central / East)

Canyon is one of the most popular places to set up base in Yellowstone thanks to its central location and volume of accommodation, with over 500 rooms available.

You will also find a good selection of food at Canyon Lodge Eatery, which is more like a canteen than restaurant.

Canyon is your best choice if you prefer to stay at just one place for your entire Yellowstone visit. Right around the corner is Yellowstone Falls.

Grand Canyon of Yellowstone and Yellowstone Falls

Prepare to be blown away!

This is one sight you will not forget from your Yellowstone National Park itinerary. We encourage you to visit each and every viewpoint along both North and South rim drive – and do that more than once.

For the best photographs, arrive before sunrise to Artist Point . We couldn’t get enough of these dramatic views as the Yellowstone River pounds its way through the breathtaking canyon.

Canyon Hiking

There are no hikes worth mentioning around Canyon for a Yellowstone itinerary only lasting 4 days. With more time, maybe!

We don’t consider each of the small trails along North and South Rim roads to Yellowstone falls viewing platforms as hikes.

Canyon Wildlife

Just South of Canyon Village and Yellowstone Falls, you will find Hayden Valley , regarded as the second best part of the park for wildlife spotting.

This is the place we saw by far the most wildlife including coyotes, mule deer, bison and our first ever bald eagle . We saw bald eagles here again the second time we visited so you do stand a good chance of seeing one soaring around this area.

Again, it is best to arrive early or late to increase chances of spotting animals but be warned – Grizzlies roam alongside Yellowstone River. We never saw a grizzly, but we did see a lone Grey Wolf from afar, which was awesome .

Canyon Accommodation

Campgrounds – Canyon campground is open late May to Mid Sept. There are 273 reservable sites at a cost of US$ 32 per night. More information .

Hotel and Cabins – Canyon offers the most accommodation by far at Yellowstone. It is open from the beginning of June until early October.

You can choose between a Western Cabin, Standard Lodge Room, Superior Lodge Room, Premium Lodge Room and Suite.

We snagged a free upgrade to Premium Lodge Room (from Western Cabin) which was a welcome escape from the cold nights! More information .

4. Norris Geyser Basin (Central / West)

Norris is the oldest and hottest of Yellowstone’s thermal regions, with the highest recorded temperature measuring a whopping 459 f (237 C) just over 300m below the surface.

This region is where your Yellowstone geyser hunting experience springs to life and you can witness the tallest active geyser in the world.

Norris Geysers and Hot Springs

At Norris geyser basin you will find several thermal geysers in very close proximity. The area is easy to explore via boardwalk and has to rank as one of the must visit regions on your 4 days in Yellowstone National Park itinerary.

Waters around Norris basin are acidic, rather than alkaline, which means bacteria creates those colorful patterns you associate with Yellowstone.

Steamboat geyser – the world’s tallest at 300ft – went years with barely any activity but in 2019 there were 48 eruptions.

But there’s no guarantee boiling hot water will erupt the day you visit and you could be standing around a long time waiting. We saw it blow a few times but not to it’s maximum height.

Norris Hiking

Artist’s Paint Pot – This 1 mile hike beginning just South of Norris Geyser Basin is definitely worth a quick stop off.

After a short walk through a forest you will come across a small open area featuring thick grey mud bubbling pools and blue/grey/brown colored holes in the ground.

Highly recommended easy hike.

Norris Region Campgrounds

Norris campground – Open late May to late September and just to the North of Norris Geyser Basin. There are 111 first come first served sites at a cost of US$ 20 per night. More information .

Maddison Campground – Located 14 miles Southwest of Norris and open late April to mid October. Longer opening times and central location make this one of the most popular campgrounds at Yellowstone. There are 278 reservable sites for tents and RV’s at US$ 27 per night. More information .

5. Old Faithful (Southwest)

Old Faithful is the iconic Yellowstone geyser everyone knows about before visiting the park.

But the Old Faithful region has much more on offer, including perhaps the most eye catching feature of all: Grand Prismatic Spring.

This region contains Lower, Midway and Upper Geyser Basins – which means a lot of geyser hunting. You can find almost all amenities here, except a campground.

Old Faithful Region Geysers and Hot Springs

Lower Geyser Basin – Fewest geothermal features in the region but one of the most sought after spots for sunset in Great Fountain Geyser along Firehole Lake Drive (closed in Winter).

Midway Geyser Basin – Smaller in area but possibly the most rewarding in terms of natural beauty.

The vibrant colors of Grand Prismatic Spring are difficult to appreciate from its boardwalk, so you will need to climb Fairy Falls Trail for that postcard perfect view.

Excelsior Geyser can not be overlooked as it’s on the same boardwalk and produces an enormous amount of hot steam, often shrouding the Firehole River.

Upper Geyser Basin – The crown Jewel, Old Faithful is located here along with the highest density of geothermal activity in the park.

Old Faithful erupts once every 35-120 minutes for anywhere between 1-5 minutes. This isn’t the most spectacular of geysers, it’s just the most regular and predictable.

Don’t miss Morning Glory Pool at Upper Basin.

Old Faithful Hiking

Fairy Falls – Begin at Fairy Falls Trailhead for an easy 5 mile roundtrip to one of Yellowstone’s most spectacular falls. This trail also offers postcard-perfect views over Grand Prismatic Spring.

Observation Point – If you want to escape the crowds (knows as ‘the bleachers’) sitting in a half circle around Old Faithful, take this moderate 1.5 mile roundtrip hike.

You will be rewarded with a much more tranquil viewing platform.

Old Faithful Accommodation

Old Faithful Lodge – Simple Frontier Cabins are more affordable and offer views over Old Faithful. More information .

Old Faithful Inn – 327 rooms and open from early May to mid October, but get in early as this is the most requested lodge in Yellowstone. More information .

Old Faithful Snow Lodge – Open mid December to end of February, only accessible by over snow vehicles. Wide range of rooms available at various prices. More information .

6. Yellowstone Lake / West Thumb (Southeast)

One thing you probably don’t know about – and certainly won’t appreciate until you see it – is the sheer scale of Yellowstone Lake. It is enormous!

We’ve combined West Thumb Geyser Basin and Grant Village with Fishing Bridge and Lake Village into the one region here.

They all hug the lake edge in Yellowstone’s Southeast corner. All amenities can be found at both locations on the lake.

Yellowstone Lake Geysers & Hot Springs

At the Southern end of Yellowstone Lake you will enter West Thumb Geyser Basin. What makes this place unique is stunning views of Yellowstone Lake and snow capped mountains behind geothermal features.

A boardwalk loops around West Thumb Basin allowing you to see the most impressive features while enjoying some of the best views in the park.

Look out for Fishing Cone and Big Cone Geyser in the lake.

Yellowstone Lake Hiking

Yellowstone Lake isn’t the place to visit if you’re looking for serious hiking trails on your 4 days itinerary. However, there are two easy going walks ending with excellent views over the lake and West Thumb.

Lake overlook – Easy to moderate 1.5 mile roundtrip hike from West Thumb parking lot for elevated views over West Thumb Basin.

Storm Point – Easy 2.5 mile roundtrip beginning close to Fishing Bridge for close up views over Yellowstone Lake.

Yellowstone Lake Wildlife

The Northern part of Yellowstone Lake is where Yellowstone’s East entrance (from Cody) arrives into the park.

Areas surrounding East entrance road are known to be a favorite of the Grizzly Bear, but you can also expect to see a wider variety of wildlife in this region.

We saw coyotes and mule deer (pictured above) around Lake Lodge during our visit.

Yellowstone Lake Accommodation

Campgrounds.

Bridge Bay has 432 reservable sites at US$ 27 per night. It is open late May to early September ( more information ).

Grant Village has 430 reservable sites at US$ 32 per night. However, this one is only open mid June to mid September ( more information ).

Fishing Bridge RV Park has 310 RV only electrical hookup sites at US$ 79 per night. The RV park is open early May to mid September ( more information ).

Hotel and Cabins

• Lake Yellowstone hotel offers a wide variety of rooms from basic to extremely expensive ( more information ).
• Lake Lodge Cabins – Consisting of 186 Frontier and Western cabins at much more budget friendly prices ( more information ).

Example Of A Perfect 4 Days Yellowstone National Park Itinerary

You can begin to construct your plans now you have an idea about each region inside the park.

The following example itinerary is 4 days long, which means you can relax and take things slowly but still see and do the best of Yellowstone National Park.

Our biggest frustration when first visiting with 3 days was only having enough time to visit each attraction once and having to rush through. If a geyser or waterfall viewing area was crowded, or if the weather wasn’t playing nicely – well, that was just tough luck.

But with that extra fourth day, it means you can re-visit any place you missed, was too busy or you enjoyed the most.

Best Entrance To Begin 4 Days in Yellowstone Itinerary?

You can start your itinerary at any entrance. The figure 8 road inside the park makes it easy to adapt this itinerary to suit beginning from any direction.

The most popular entrance into the park is West Entrance / West Yellowstone and the second most popular in North Entrance / Gardiner / Mammoth.

However, we will begin this itinerary as though you are entering from Northeast Entrance / Cooke City and exit on Day 4 via South entrance to Jackson and Grand Teton.

This is the most efficient way to visit because you can drive through Lamar Valley early on your first morning for the best chance of seeing abundant wildlife, see the park and leave without driving back on yourself too much.

If you are staying in West Yellowstone or Gardiner for the duration of your visit, or are entering via any other entrance, simply move around the days as we list below. The same things to do still apply, you can just adjust the itinerary to fit.

Driving Distances Between Major Yellowstone And Grand Teton Regions

One final thing to touch on before we get into an example Yellowstone itinerary is driving distances between major areas in the park.

We have mentioned it’s a big park and there can be a lot of driving, but we thought it would be more helpful to show you in numbers.

Use the distances to gauge how far you might travel on any given day during your Yellowstone itinerary.

This is a Yellowstone guide but many visitors will also want to see Grand Teton either before or after, so we included Jackson and Jenny Lake for reference.

We have also included West Yellowstone because a lot of people stay here for their entire visit to Yellowstone and it helps to see how far it is to each major region.

OK, let’s finally get stuck into our 4 days in Yellowstone itinerary example!

Yellowstone Itinerary Day 1 – Lamar Valley, Tower-Roosevelt and Mammoth Hot Springs

Lamar Valley

Entering via Northeast entrance isn’t always reliable in Spring or Fall, but North entrance is always open. If you can’t enter via Cooke City, it’s easy enough to enter at Gardiner and drive straight to Lamar Valley early in the morning.

Approaching from Northeast / Cooke City – As you draw closer to Grand Loop Road you will pass through Lamar Valley , widely regarded as the best wildlife spotting in Yellowstone.

Try to arrive early morning for the best shot as seeing Bison and other animals. Spend an hour or two stopping at various pull-offs. Remember, if you spot any serious gear, that’s where you need to pull out your binoculars .

Just before Grand Loop Road you will find Specimen Ridge Trail , hike this trail if you didn’t see a lot of wildlife in Lamar Valley, you want to see even more wildlife or you just love hiking.

Tip : By getting away from the road you give yourself a much better chance at seeing animals in the wild.

When you arrive at Tower Junction turn left and drive a few miles to see  Tower Fall  and if time allows, hike to Yellowstone River Overlook.

Turn around and head back the same way but pass US-212 and continue on Grand Loop Road towards Mammoth.

Your next stop is Yellowstone’s  Petrified Tree . Now, this gated tree stump isn’t the most wow-factor attraction you will see on this 4 days Yellowstone itinerary.

But it is around 50 million years old, which means it is in fact, mightily impressive.

Mammoth Hot Springs

There’s not much else between Tower and Mammoth with the exception of Lava Creek hiking trail. If it’s earlier than you expected, hike this trail past Undine Falls, but if it’s already getting on, it’s time to check in at your Mammoth accommodation.

You’re likely to see mule deer and / or bison wandering around the car park so drive carefully .

You need to check in inside the hotel whether you’re staying in the hotel or a cabin. Mammoth dining hall is directly across the car park ready for once you’re all settled in to your room.

Alternatively, Gardiner is the best place to stay outside of the park boundaries on this first night.

After dinner (depending on light and time of year), drive a couple minutes up to Mammoth Hot Springs for a quick look around the area.

Don’t forget your camera because these terraces are extremely photogenic. It’s a shame the sunset is directly behind a huge hill but you’ll be back here at first light.

Yellowstone Itinerary Day 2 – Mammoth Hot Springs, Norris Geyser Basin, Mount Washburn and Yellowstone Falls

Norris Geyser Basin

Wake up early. If you’re animal mad, head back out to Lamar Valley at sunrise, otherwise make your way over to see the vibrant colors of Mammoth Lower and Upper Terraces and dense steam penetrated by soft rays of morning light.

We’ve seen Mammoth at sunrise and in midday. Sunrise in October was in the snow and stunning but we didn’t last long. Midday is busy but allows you spend more time walking the boardwalks comfortably and better chance to see the radiant springs.

Return to your cabin or the dining hall for breakfast, check out and get on the road heading South towards Norris Geyser Basin . Scenery along the way is gorgeous, stop if you see anything you like the look of but not for too long .

There’s a lot to see today!

Park up at Norris, be sure to look around the educational Visitor Center before spending the next few hours wandering the Geyser Basin boardwalks.

You have plenty of geysers to take in throughout two loops of boardwalks . D on’t miss Steamboat geyser – it was extremely active when we visited.

There are dozens of springs and geysers in all colors and varieties here, just keep following the boardwalks and the crowds.

Echinus geyser is a popular stop, however, this once prolific steam sprayer has become far less inclined to blow its top in recent years.

A few minutes drive South you will find Artist’s Paintpots trail . We highly recommend this quick 1 mile roundtrip hike where you can see deep earthy colors surrounding small hot springs.

In addition, you have an opportunity to get up close and personal with boiling mud bubbling in grey molten clay-like pools. Don’t miss this hidden gem.

Grand Canyon of the Yellowstone

Take Norris Canyon road due East towards Canyon without stopping before checking in at your Canyon accommodation. If you’re not staying inside the park tonight, book a hotel room in West Yellowstone.

Drive a few miles North from Canyon and park up at Dunraven Pass, before setting off on the most popular hike in Yellowstone National Park – Mount Washburn . Panoramic views from the summit will be worth the time and effort.

Closure : This is the hike we unfortunately couldn’t access and unfortunately it is still scheduled to be closed in 2022 as the road between Canyon and Tower is under works.

• If the road and hike are open, it will be late afternoon / early evening by the time you finish your hike.
• If not, head straight down to Grand Canyon of the Yellowstone.

Drive back past Canyon and turn onto one-way North Rim Drive.

Your first time seeing the powerful  Yellowstone Lower Falls is from Lookout point, which is awesome, but less awesome than some of the other viewpoints coming up.

Continue driving round to Grand View, before either driving or hiking (if time allows and you’re not too tired) to Inspiration point – the best observation area along North Rim Drive. It shouldn’t be long until the sun sets directly behind Lower Falls.

At dusk, on the way back to Canyon, drive slowly and look out for wildlife. We saw Bison and a lot of Mule Deer on this stretch with a stunning deep purple sky sunset and moonrise over the plains.

Yellowstone Itinerary Day 3 – Yellowstone Falls, Hayden Valley & Yellowstone Lake

Hayden Valley

Another early start and this one is non-negotiable!

Check out and leave at least 30 minutes before sunrise ( check times here ) so you can get parked, walk the very short trail to Artist Point .

Get your camera set up before the sun rises and illuminates the Grand Canyon of Yellowstone . It’s worth waking up for this iconic Yellowstone sunrise.

On the way back out of South Rim, stop off at Upper Falls View and hike down Uncle Tom’s Trail for an amazing close up vantage point of Lower Falls.

The steep staircase trail descent was not open when we visited so be sure to check trail closures and current conditions before you visit.

Once the sun has risen and you’ve marveled enough at the wonderful canyon, jump back in the car and drive South towards Hayden Valley .

This is Yellowstone’s second major area for seeing animals and if you’re early enough, you’ll have a high probability of spotting wildlife.

The key is not to go looking for the animals, but to park up where nobody else is parked along the Yellowstone River and wait for them to come to you.

You might see a multitude of amazing wildlife, or you might not see any animals at all, it all comes down to chance. Be prepared for both eventualities.

Next up as you head South is Mud Volcano. There’s a short circular boardwalk here covering a number of caldrons and springs, most notably Dragon’s mouth spring .

No need to spend long here and you’ll be hungry by now. Grab lunch at Fishing Bridge / Lake Yellowstone. 

Yellowstone Lake and West Thumb Geyser Basin

Remember that just because an area isn’t recognized as a wildlife ‘hotspot’ it doesn’t mean you won’t see any animals.

We spotted a gang of Elk and more coyotes right on the lake edge around Lake Yellowstone lodge. Explore the area before following the Lake South to West Thumb Geyser Basin.

Spend the remainder of the afternoon walking around West Thumb Basin , taking in the likes of Abyss Pool, Black Pool, Big Cone Geyser and Fishing Cone.

Don’t forget you can take the short Lake Overlook hike right from West Thumb parking lot.

Drive West to Old Faithful and check in to your final accommodation. Again, if you’re not staying inside the park on night 3, book a hotel room in West Yellowstone.

Depending on the time, you can either stick around Old Faithful for sunset or drive 11 miles North to Great Fountain Geyser , which has a magnificent sunset.

Yellowstone Itinerary Day 4 – Lower, Midway and Upper Geyser Basins

Grand Prismatic Spring

You get to sleep in a little (finally!) on your last day. No rush this morning, you’ll be driving up to Lower Geyser Basin and working your way back down to Old Faithful. Slowly does it today.

It is important to note here – if you want to get photographs of one particular area such as Grand Prismatic Spring, it might be worth beelining straight there first thing in the morning.

Start the day by entering one-way Firehole Lake drive – where you can now visit Great Fountain Geyser if you didn’t the night before.

Opposite the one-way exit from Firehole Lake road, park up at Fountain Paint Pot trailhead and walk the very short trail.

If you missed swimming in Boiling River at Mammoth due to closure, you could drive a few miles North to Firehole swimming area .

Otherwise, heading South once more, your next stop is one of Yellowstone’s finest geothermal features: Grand Prismatic Spring .

Firehole River will likely be engulfed in a cloud of steam as you walk towards Grand Prismatic, giving off an eerie effect. This huge heated cloud is produced by Excelsior Geyser , which was once the tallest geyser at Yellowstone.

Without question, the place will be packed with tourists, so try to be courteous as you walk the relatively narrow boardwalks.

Stop off as much as possible on the looped boardwalk to soak up Yellowstone’s largest hot spring and one of its most iconic features.

If you would like to see Grand Prismatic Spring’s colors in all their glory from above, you will need to drive a few minutes to Fairy Falls Trail and hike a 1 mile round trip trail to GPS overview.

Old Faithful

Finish your 4 days in Yellowstone itinerary back where you started this morning at Old Faithful .

What better place to sign off an incredible experience than its most iconic feature. Check times of eruptions, noted all around Old Faithful area including the dining halls. Plan to arrive 10-15 minutes before the predicted eruption.

The bleachers will be busy so be sure to walk around and behind Old Faithful, before taking the Observation Point trailhead to a much better vantage point.

The crowds will cheer once Old Faithful begins to erupt and you will have finally seen the most famous geyser in the world spurt its hot steam into the deep blue sky above!

Don’t forget that you are in Upper Geyser basin, the most active of all geothermal areas within Yellowstone and more than a one trick pony.

Behind Old Faithful – past the trailhead for observation point – you can follow a path leading to multiple hot springs and geysers.

Geysers : We highly recommend you do spend time walking behind Old Faithful as far as incredibly vibrant Morning Glory Pool, one of our favorites in the entire park.

Exit Yellowstone via the South entrance towards Grand Teton National Park. If you like to kayak, Lewis Lake on the way out of Yellowstone is the best place in the park to paddle .

There’s plenty of time left on Day 4 to make it down to Jackson, WY with a few detours along the way in Grand Teton.

It’s almost like you planned it that way!

Best Time to Visit Yellowstone National Park

Animals are very active as they come out of hibernation, grizzlies are very grizzly so care must be taken. Snow melting causes waterfall volumes to increase and the weather begins to warm slightly. May and June are excellent months to visit Yellowstone before it gets too crowded.

April in Yellowstone is interesting, you will have attractions almost to yourself but road access is limited and no park lodging is open.

Summer in Yellowstone is jam packed with tourists, which personally isn’t our cup of tea. However, you get more daylight and warmer temperatures which means perfect conditions for crushing hikes, sightseeing and comfortable camping.

Of 4 million annual visitors to the park, over half visit in July and August. Not only will every attraction be busy but getting a camping spot or hotel room would be tough going.

When we visited Yellowstone in October it had snowed heavily just a few days before our arrival. The scenery was staggeringly attractive, with glittering ice and snow dancing under sunlight.

It was the first big snowfall of the year so we just missed those beautiful rustic fall colors. September would be a fantastic alternative if you prefer to avoid crowds and enjoy cooler temperatures.

Yellowstone in Winter

Although we didn’t technically visit in Winter, both April and October had a ton of snow and cold temperatures. Most of the park shuts down in Winter and access can only be achieved by snowmobiles.

Our photographs will give you an idea of what Yellowstone would look like if you were to visit in Winter. We were blown away by the ‘Winter Wonderland’ scenery and felt fortunate to have visited when we did.

Following a huge snowfall, the temperature stayed below zero for 3 days but the sun was shining brightly from a deep blue clear sky every day.

On our second morning in October we woke up to a thick mist and fog which left Yellowstone feeling positively spooky!

Yellowstone Accommodation

Certain US National Parks can be notoriously difficult to secure accommodation. Yellowstone is one of those parks.

There are options inside the park (as we listed in each region earlier) but they are in high demand and can be out of many visitors’ budget range. You can instead stay at hotels near the park boundary.

Either way, you need to be as organized as possible when it comes to booking your Yellowstone lodging. Start booking as soon as you have dates to avoid missing out on rooms inside the park or at good value near the park.

We think booking hotels, lodges or cabins is the most difficult and important part of planning this vacation. Once rooms are secured, you can begin to plan your Yellowstone itinerary.

Resources and Tips

• Lodging – We have written an extremely popular where to stay in Yellowstone guide to help you figure out the best places to stay for your visit. It has helped thousands of visitors to find lodging around the park.
• Hotel tips – If you decide to stay outside the park in hotels, you have control over budget. Read our ultimate guide to booking cheap hotels  to learn about ways you can save money.
• Booking platform – We always use and recommend booking hotels with  Booking.com for best value and most options to suit your budget.
• Camping – Take advantage of our exclusive  30 day free trial of The Dyrt PRO  to get reservations at sold out Yellowstone campgrounds with no extra booking fees, and gain access to free dispersed camping locations around Yellowstone National Park. You can try The Dyrt PRO for free, no strings attached!
• The earlier you book, the more chance you have of securing the exact locations you prefer. Be flexible and adaptable if planning your vacation last minute.

Suggested Lodging for this 4 Day Itinerary

• First Night – Mammoth Hot Springs or Gardiner MT
• Second Night – Canyon
• Third Night – Old Faithful or West Yellowstone
• Fourth Night – Jackson WY

Note this is a North to South route. If your entrance and exit points will be different, plan your accommodation accordingly.

If you want to take a much closer look at the top rated hotels around Yellowstone, head over to our sister site Best Hotels Anywhere to see the best hotels in West Yellowstone, Gardiner, Cody and Jackson.

You can only book accommodation inside the park using  Yellowstone National Park lodges  service, which means set prices and limited availability.

Expect to pay handsomely for hotel rooms if you stay inside the park, it is Yellowstone after all!

Read More About Yellowstone and Grand Teton …

• Things To Do: 30 Most Popular Things To See And Do In Yellowstone National Park
• Airports: 6 Best Airports Near Yellowstone for Domestic and International Travelers
• Hotels: Where to Stay Inside and Near Yellowstone – Best Hotels and Locations
• Spring: 10 Key Things To Know About Visiting Yellowstone In April
• Fall: 10 Important Things To Know About Visiting Yellowstone In October
• Grand Teton: 7 Amazing Things to do and Perfect 2 Day Itinerary
• Mormon Row: Sunrise and Sunset Photography Guide to Mormon Row Grand Teton
• Schwabacher Landing: Complete Photography Guide to Stunning Schwabacher Landing

Yellowstone Road Trips:

• SLC – Salt Lake City to Yellowstone 7 Day Road Trip Itinerary
• Rushmore – Mt Rushmore to Yellowstone 10 Day Road Trip Itinerary

More Incredible US National Parks …

• Death Valley: Perfect One Day Death Valley Road Trip Itinerary (Las Vegas and Yosemite)
• Zion & Bryce Canyon: Epic 3 Day Road Trip Zion and Bryce Canyon Best Bits
• Yosemite: The Ultimate Guide to Yosemite For First Time Visitors
• Grand Canyon: Perfect One Day Itinerary Grand Canyon South Rim

We hope this guide helped with planning your 4 Days Yellowstone National Park Itinerary!

Yellowstone is one of the very best places to visit in the USA and we sincerely hope you have the most amazing vacation to this special part of the world.

Please let us know if you have any questions or you need any help planning your Yellowstone trip, we’ll be happy to help.

Happy Travels ,

Mark and Kristen

Was This Post Helpful? Pin It For Your Yellowstone National Park Itinerary!

Note : This article contains affiliate links. When you make a purchase using one of these affiliate links, we may earn a small commission at no extra cost to you.

All Rights Reserved © Where Are Those Morgans, LLC. Republishing this article and/or any of its contents (text, photography, maps, graphics, etc.) in whole or in part is strictly prohibited.

Mark and Kristen Morgan are travel, hiking and photography experts. Over the last 6 years traveling full time, they have explored more than 40 countries and 30 US states.

Where Are Those Morgans has been featured in USA Today, Gestalten, Get Your Guide, CityPASS and Condé Nast Traveler along with various other publications. Read more about us .

22 thoughts on “Yellowstone Itinerary 4 Days: The Ultimate First Time Visitor Guide”

How long does it take to get a guidebook to Yellowstone? Is it downloadable?

Hi Melissa, yes our Yellowstone guidebook is a digital download so you can get it instantly to your phone and computer. Thank you and have a fantastic trip!

Looking to also go in through Cooke City. Any recommendations on where to stay in Cooke City that night before entering the park? Thanks!

Hi Bret, glad to hear you will be visiting Yellowstone soon. Take a look through our where to stay in Yellowstone guide to see our hotel recommendations for Cooke City. It is a great place to start because you get instant access to Lamar Valley for wildlife at dawn. Have a great trip!

is there an actual print out of just the 4 day yellowstone itinerary? point to point to see?

Hi Tricia, At the moment we do not have a printable version of this itinerary, but we hope to have one soon. You are more than welcome to print out the travel guide and if you have any specific questions about Yellowstone, feel free to ask any time. Have a great trip!

Yikes! We are planning a trip this summer starting in South Dakota and heading into Yellowstone for 4 day. Unfortunately we have to go in the summer since I work at a high school. Yellowstone is so overwhelming and it looks like we will be entering Yellowstone the week of July 4th. Planning is so overwhelming 🤪 We will be pulling our RV as well. There are no campsites available in Yellowstone so hoping to find something not too far away. Since we will be driving in each day which entrance makes themost sense or should we split time between a couple of. Entrances?

Hi Holly, we are glad to hear you have a trip planned to Yellowstone but “yikes” is definitely a great word to describe your situation! If it were us, we would try staying at a campground in or around Gardiner the first and maybe second night, then staying at a campground in West Yellowstone for the next 2 nights. We have driven from South Dakota to Yellowstone twice, entering once into northeast entrance and once into north entrance at Gardiner. Your drive over on I-90 won’t be very exciting but for you it will be about efficiency and getting to Gardiner as quickly as possible is your best bet. Then you can see the “top half” of Yellowstone in the next 2 days, before pulling your RV to a campground in West Yellowstone so you have easier access to the “bottom half” of Yellowstone. Hope that helps and best of luck getting booked up. Have a great trip!

I’m so grateful to have found this site. It’s amazing! You are so thorough and organized – I am in awe. Without this guide I would have just booked a full week in West Yellowstone and then spent most of my days driving and being stressed about being in the park after dark. Now I think I’ll book 4 nights at YGI and 3 nights in Jackson. I have dogs, so I can’t stay in the park or move around too often. We primarily want to see wildlife – I hope we see a wolf!!!

Thank you Noelle, we’re glad our guide has helped you plan your trip to Yellowstone! Last time we visited we saw a wolf near Grand Prismatic Spring, just look for a group of people with expensive cameras / binoculars / telescopes and it’s either a wolf or a bear. Have a great time!

Hi, how does one find out the driving time or distance to different areas within the parks – Yellowstone and GTNP?

Hi ALice, thanks for getting in touch with a great point – we have updated our Yellowstone itinerary with a driving distance chart to show how far it is between the major regions in Yellowstone and Grand Teton. We didn’t include times because that will change heavily depending on season but it should give you a better idea of how much driving will be involved during your visit.

Wow thanks for taking the time and sharing all that info! With that said, it is a bit overwhelming 🙂 appreciate your help in planning my trip with my teenage daughter in early July 2022. We’re flying in from San Francisco for 4 days. Is there any way to contact you directly? Thanks

Hi Meytal, yes planning a trip to Yellowstone can be overwhelming! Head over to our contact page and send us a message with any questions you have for your trip 🙂

Great article, thank you for the detailed information. We are headed for 4 days with a stay booked at the West entrance for all nights. All things considered, would you advise that I keep that spot or split it up between other entrances? All of the lodging INSIDE the park is booked up…so our only options would be to head out of the park for overnights. Looking at your itinerary for the 4 days it looks like staying where we are may just be the best option vs moving each night out to the North and then the East entrances…what do you think having been?

Hi Mel, yes getting booked inside the park is going to be a challenge this year. Stick with what you have booked in West Yellowstone for the 4 days. It’s the most central location with easier access to each of the areas inside the park. We were in Yellowstone again a few weeks ago and stayed in West Yellowstone both nights. It is a bit of a pain driving in and especially out each day as you drive directly into the sunset, but it’s by far the best option for keeping drive time down. That being said, if you are really keen to see wildlife, Lamar Valley at sunrise is your best bet and staying one night in either Gardiner (North entrance) near Mammoth or even Cooke City (Northeast entrance) would cut your driving time down significantly early in the morning. You will see wildlife without doing that but it would likely be a better experience. The drives East to Cody and South to Jackson are too long. Let us know if you have any more questions and have a great trip!

planning a trip for the summer, reading through piles of pins about Yellowstone and this is the most helpful yet! thank you so much!

Thank you Chelsea, we’re glad you were able to find the info you needed for Yellowstone. Please let us know if you have any questions about your plans but if not have a great trip!

This is such a helpful and informative review! With limited time in Yellowstone, we will be following your suggestions, but in reverse, coming up from Tetons.

Thank you Sarah, we’re glad you found it helpful – doing both Grand Teton and Yellowstone is such an amazing trip. Please do let us know if you have any questions about either park and have a great time!

Wow this has to be the best national park yet, something for everyone there, it must of been amazing.

Yes this was one of the most diverse US National Parks we visited, you’re spot on with something for everyone. We had a love / hate relationship with the snow, it was freezing cold and we might have missed out on some wildlife spotting opportunities, plus the Mt Washburn hike was closed and we couldn’t see much at Grand Prismatic Spring – but the Winter Wonderland scenery was unique and spectacular. Hope you are able to visit Yellowstone one day Graham!

Leave a Comment Cancel reply

Subscribe to our newsletter

Get the latest in travel straight to your inbox

Click here to subscribe

The Perfect 4 Day Itinerary for New York City

What to do in nyc in 4 days.

It can be overwhelming trying to create a 4-day itinerary in NYC. If you’re wondering if and how you can do New York in 4 days, you’ll find the answer here! I’ll show you how to spend 4 perfect days in New York City with my experience of more than 20 visits to my favorite city. And that without stress, with restaurant tips and the most important sights and most interesting neighborhoods.

You'll also love this:

• 3 Day Itinerary for NYC
• 7 Day Itinerary for NYC
• 1 Week NYC Itinerary For Free

So, I have created the following 4 Day Itinerary NYC to make it easier for you. Feel free to use it as is or customize as you’d like – either way, we hope it helps!

This is the best 4 day itinerary for New York City:

Table of Contents

4 Day Itinerary NYC  Day 1 : Theatre District & Midtown

New York City’s Theatre District is the neighborhood where most Broadway theatres are found in Midtown West. West 54th Street bounds this area to the north, West 40th Street to the south, Eighth Ave to the west, and Sixth Avenue to the east.

Here you’ll find many theaters, hotels, restaurants, and other entertainment venues, as well as Times Square. There’s really no better part of the city to begin your 4- day trip , so let’s take a look a look at what to do in NYC’s Theatre District and Midtown on your first day:

Times Square

As we mentioned, this is the New York City neighborhood where Times Square is located. And even if you’ve never been to NYC, you should already know this is a bustling place. The best part is that there are plenty of things to see and do regardless of whether you go to Times Square during the day or night.  

If you’re looking for activities to do in Times Square, check out Madame Tussauds and National Geographic’s Ocean Odyssey. Or you can simply people-watch or meet someone dressed up as your favorite character – just don’t forget that if you take photos of these characters or interact with them, they’ll expect to be paid.  

When it comes time to eat in Times Square, try the best tacos in America at Los Tacos No. 1. , a slice of authentic NY pizza at Patzeria’s, or choose from hundreds of options at the 24-hour Times Square Diner. If you want something more upscale, head on over to Aureole , Carmine’s, or the Hunt & Fish Club .  

BIG BUS: Get a quick overview of Manhattan

NYC is home to many hop-on, hop-off bus tours offered by Big Bus. So, once it’s time to leave Times Square and move on, get on one of these buses and ride to the next location. Thanks to onboard commentary, this is a great way to see and get to know the area. Not to mention, it’s a nice reprieve if you’re not used to walking so many miles per day.  

Bryant Park

For the next stop on day 1, we have Bryant Park. It’s a charming little gem found right behind the New York Public Library. Bryant Park makes you think you’ve left NYC and entered Paris, and it makes a wonderful place to read a book, enjoy a picnic, or just rest your feet for a few minutes.  

Grand Central Terminal

Grand Central Terminal is just as beautiful and busy as you would expect. Sure, you’ve probably seen it featured in countless shows and movies over the years, but seeing it is believing, as the television does not capture the stunning beauty of the building’s turquoise ceiling or the sheer number of people who travel through here daily.  

Anytime you’re near Grand Central, be sure to stop at Sarge’s Delicatessen & Diner for an authentic, inexpensive breakfast or brunch. If you’re in a hurry, grab a quick bite at Bagel Express; their food is simple, tasty, and affordable.  

One Vanderbilt The Summit

Summit One Vanderbilt is NYC’s newest attraction that recently opened in October 2021. The building altered the look of the city’s skyline, which provides guests with a whole new experience.  

Summit One features a deck, mirrored rooms, and the world’s tallest rack-and-pinion elevator system that features cars that are 90 square feet each, which makes them the world’s largest glass floor elevators!

There are several different packages to choose from, and the one you choose decides how much of the experience you get to enjoy. For example, the Summit Experience allows you access to all 4 floors, and you can step into glass skyboxes that sit 1,000 feet over Midtown below.  

Alternatively, you can choose the Summit Ascent package, which includes access to the entire experience and the glass elevators at their highest point. This is a must-see attraction for anyone looking for the best views of NYC and should definitely be a part of your first day.  

This is perhaps the most famous and expensive street in all of New York City – 5th Avenue or as it’s commonly called “Millionaire’s Row.” This road stretches the entire length of Manhattan both north and south.  

Regardless of whether you buy anything or not, 5th Avenue should be on your itinerary. There’s something about marveling at the most expensive retail space in the world, and it almost makes you feel as if you’re on Ginza in Tokyo or Champs-Elysees in Paris.  

The best shopping areas are found closest to Central Park, where you’ll find stores such as Cartier and Armani. You’ll also find the famous NYC Apple store, where they offer laptops and free internet access.  

Another great thing about exploring 5th Avenue is that you’ll find the Empire State Building, St. Patrick’s Cathedral, and many museums.  

Empire State Building

Speaking of the Empire State Building, this is the next stop on your first-ever trip to NYC. Completed in 1931 as the world’s tallest building, this 102-story skyscraper symbolizes the resilience and hope of NYC and its people. Today, the building is used primarily for office space, but it is also home to two observation decks and many unique exhibits.  

You have a few options for how you can enjoy this iconic building. First, you can travel to the main observation deck at the 86th Floor Observatory. This is the city’s most famed open-air observatory, where you’ll enjoy 360-degree views of the city.  

For those who want to see even better breathtaking views, check out the 102nd Floor Observatory, where you’ll find floor-to-ceiling views that can extend up to 80 miles on clear days. Regardless of whether you go inside, it’s still a legendary building to see in person.  

The Perfect Itinerary For Your New York Trip

This itinerary contains over 50 spots and highlights of the city, including a map that shows you the best way to travel each day, taking you to or past the many big attractions. In addition, we‘ve added our favorite places, from great breakfast spots to start your day right to small bars and restaurants and hidden insider spots.

What awaits you here now is the perfect New York week, because this is what my itinerary would look like if I were visiting the Big Apple for the first or second time right now!

4 Day Itinerary NYC  Day 2 : Hudson Yards, Chelsea, Meatpacking District

On day 2 of this 4 Day Itinerary NYC, you’ll explore the Meatpacking District, Chelsea, and Hudson Yards, which are all located in Midtown Manhattan . At one time, this was Manhattan’s hub of industry, but in recent times it has become one of the most cultivated cultural neighborhoods in NYC.  

Chelsea is on downtown Manhattan’s west side and is an expensive area with many things to do, such as historical sights, off-Broadway theatre, dining, and more. This area also encompasses the ultra-chic Meatpacking District , where you’ll find posh nightlife, fine dining, and luxury shopping.  

Chelsea is adored by art fans and is well-known for its concentration of galleries. Tourists love these neighborhoods because it’s very walkable and still an up-and-coming section of New York City. Now, let’s take a look at what your second day in NYC has in store for you!

Circle Line - Best of NYC Cruise

The best way to start your second day in New York City is by hopping aboard the Best of NYC Cruise offered by Circle Line. This is the only sightseeing cruise that goes completely around Manhattan, which means you get to see all of NYC’s most iconic landmarks from the comfort of a boat in under three hours!

Landmarks you can expect to see along this cruise are the Statue of Liberty, High Line, Ellis Island, Chrysler Building, Empire State Building, Gracie Mansion, Yankee Stadium, and much more. And the best part is that award-winning tour guides narrate each Best of NYC Cruises, so you’ll learn every significant detail during the trip.  

Explore Hudson Yards

Hudson Yards is one of the most exciting places to visit in New York City, especially if you only have 4 days on the itinerary. It’s home to two of the most photographable places in NYC, so you’ll want to buy tickets for both the Vessel and Edge .  

The Vessel is a honeycomb-shaped building that features 154 floors and sits in the center of Hudson Yards. Climb to the top and take in the views of the Hudson River, or take advantage of all the photo opportunities on the ground. You should know that if you plan to climb this structure, you have to buy tickets, and it’s definitely worth buying them online. Also, they only allow groups of two up at a time (one additional information: right now the Vessel is closed).

Bonus Tip: If you visit NYC around the holidays, Hudson Yards puts on a fantastic light display that you shouldn’t miss!

The Edge Observation Deck

As you’re walking north in Hudson Yards, you’ll notice an eye-catching building that’s made of glass and has a triangular-shaped platform coming from the top. If you take our advice and buy tickets to this attraction, you’ll be standing on that triangle very soon.  

As you walk inside of Hudson Yards’ central shopping mall, it may remind you of Singapore or Dubai with the upmarket feel and pristine finish. Keep moving to the fourth floor, as this is where you’ll find the entrance for Edge. Outside of the attraction, many neat exhibits teach visitors about renewable energy and how waste and air filtration work inside the building.  

The elevator ride that carries you from the fourth floor to the 100th is really exhilarating and a favorite of many people, as it’s like no other experience. Upon reaching the top of Edge, you are met with breathtaking views that are even better during sunset.  

After you finish here, be sure to walk up to 34th Street, past Penn Station, and see the famous NYC Macy’s store! At this point of day two, you may be ready for a meal. If so, check out places such as the Backyard Cafe at Hudson Yards, Wild Ink, Whitmans, The Tavern, or one of many eateries at the Chelsea Market.  

After you’ve had a bite to eat, head on over to the High Line, this is a fan favorite and offers some of the most beautiful views of the local area. Essentially, the High Line is an abandoned railroad track that’s been turned into an urban walkway and park. There are few other places in the world where you can experience such a mixed and improbable use of space – who builds a garden in the sky?

The High Line is an excellent place to take a stroll and see nature. The entire hike is about a mile and a half, but you don’t have to walk the entire way; just be sure to spend time enjoying the art and views.  

Meatpacking District

NYC’s Meatpacking District is a trendy commercial area located on the far west side between the West Village and Chelsea . In this section of NYC, you’ll find luxury designer clothing stores, a portion of the High Line, the Whitney Museum of American Art, and more!  

The cobblestone streets are lined with hip clubs and restaurants that have recently taken over the enormous spaces that once used to be home to none other than meat packaging facilities. So, take advantage of places such as Plunge Rooftop Bar and Lounge , Brass Monkey NYC , and the Famous Sky Bridge .  

Pier 54 - Little Island

Little Island is one of NYC’s newest attractions and is very special, as it’s a park built in the Hudson River atop 132 gorgeous tulip-shaped concrete stilts. It’s located at Pier 54 in Hudson River Park and is easily accessible via the High Line.  

This is a great stop for your second day in New York City because it’s designed with walking paths, gentle trees, and over 35 different species of trees, so it’s a true oasis in the middle of a concrete jungle. The highlight of Little Island Park is the amphitheater built next to the water, and there are also art exhibits and event spaces.  

Visit a Broadway Shows

As your second day comes to an end, grab some dinner at Dos Caminos , Catch NYC, RH Rooftop Restaurant, or Serafina Meatpacking and then make your way to take in a Broadway show. Even if this isn’t usually your scene, you are in New York City and the home of Broadway, so don’t miss out.  

It is worth mentioning that Broadway Shows can be expensive, but the experience is unforgettable. So, plan for this and try to book tickets in advance as they may be cheaper. Some popular shows right now include Hamilton , Wicked , Lion King , and more.

Recommended: These are the best broadway shows in NYC

4 Day Itinerary NYC  Day 3 : Financial District, DUMBO in Brooklyn

Welcome to your third day in NYC! Today you’ll experience New York City’s Financial District and DUMBO/Brooklyn. The city’s bustling financial heart is home to many glittering skyscrapers and Wall Street. During the workweek and evenings, the sidewalks are busy with young professionals working and filling the bars and restaurants of Stone Street and South Street Seaport.  

Once you get into DUMBO/Brooklyn, you’ll be surrounded by warehouses that have been converted into high-end restaurants, independent boutiques, and trendy cafes. On the north end, you’ll find Jane’s Carousel and on the waterfront is a former tobacco factory converted into a gallery and performance scene.  

Days 1 and 2 were busy, but day 3 has even more in store for you; be sure to drink lots of coffee in the morning and get started early! It’s probably best to grab a quick bite to eat, such as a bagel or donuts. So, let’s look at day 3 of our 4 Day Itinerary NYC:  

Battery Park

Many people know this park at the southernmost tip of Manhattan as a landing and/or departure point of the Staten Island Ferry (a free crossing enables a sensational view to the skyline). Battery Park is one of the oldest public parks in New York and is of historical importance for New York: the first Dutch settlers are said to have arrived here when they founded New Amsterdam.

Statue of Liberty & Ellis Island (Ferry & Stop)

No trip to NYC is complete without stopping at the Statue of Liberty and Ellis Island, and this is especially true if it’s your first time visiting the city. However, as you would imagine, this is a top-rated destination, so it can take a good chunk of your day if you don’t plan properly. For this reason, we strongly recommend that you take the first ferry over to the island in the morning. Not only will this shorten the time it takes to visit Lady Liberty, but you’ll be on Liberty Island with just one group of people. Also, keep in mind that buying a ticket to the attraction is the only way you’re allowed to set foot on Liberty Island.  

After you’ve seen everything there is to see on Liberty Island, hop back on the ferry. It stops on Ellis Island before making its way back to Manhattan. To get the most from this experience, be sure to get off the ferry and check out the National Museum of Immigration on Ellis Island. Yet, only do this if you are a quick explorer or very interested because there is a lot of ground to cover today!

One World Observatory

NYC has a million things to experience, but there’s only one way to see all of them at once. Your journey begins as you hop aboard a SkyPod in One World Trade Center, which travels 102 floors in just 47 seconds until you are transported to the top of the Western Hemisphere’s tallest building.  

After arriving 102 stories high, you find yourself face-to-face with one of the world’s most iconic skylines. Even if you’ve seen the city millions of times, you’ve never seen it quite like this! The Observatory consists of three massive levels where you’ll discover lots of surprises along the way.  

If you are hungry, be sure to stop by the cafe for a delicious bite to eat. Then step onto the Sky Portal and wander high above the crowds below. Finally, go on an interactive tour of NYC with the assistance of a Skyline Concierge who can answer questions and inform you about the city’s long and storied history. Before you leave, don’t forget to stop by One Mix Bar for a glass of Prosecco and one last look at the Earth’s bend before setting off to your next attraction.  

9/11 Memorial and Museum

Though most of our 4 Day Itinerary NYC focuses on the fun and lively side of the city, the 9/11 Memorial & Museum remind us that some of the city’s most crucial parts of history are very dark.  

The Twin Towers used to stand in NYC’s Financial District on Manhattan’s southern tip, but today you’ll find the 9/11 Memorial in their place. The memorial is evocative and free to see, but if you feel up to it (as this is a very powerful and emotional experience), you should consider visiting the museum as well. Yet, regardless of whether you go into the museum or not, the 9/11 Memorial should be part of your 4 day NYC trip.  

Wall Street

Wall Street covers eight city blocks in the Financial District of Lower Manhattan. It runs between the East River in the east to Broadway in the west over to South Street and is the second most famous street besides Broadway.  

Exploring this area can be tricky, but it is a lot of fun. Begin by finding the New York Stock Exchange at the corner of Broadway and Wall Street. Though you can no longer go inside, seeing the building is something special itself. Also, be sure to take advantage of the photo op with the famed charging bull statue!  

Other activities to partake in this area include Battery Park, Trinity Church, Federal Hall, and Stone Street. If you’re hungry when on Wall Street, try out places such as Neapolitan Express, SkyCafe, or one of the many food trucks you’ll find in the area.  

South Street Seaport

As you move south along Wall Street, keep an eye out for South Street Seaport. This section of the neighborhood is located right on the edge of the Financial District and is a lively part of town that’s spent the last several years rebuilding after Hurricane Sandy.  

When you visit the seaport, you can enjoy live music, learn the local history, or grab some food at the Fulton farmer’s market. This area is only a short, 15-minute walk from the stock exchange and makes for the best excuse to rest your feet near the water.  

Brooklyn Bridge

After you’ve seen everything in the Financial District, it’s time to head over the famed Brooklyn Bridge. Of course, you can take a taxi or rideshare across the bridge to make the trip shorter, but if you feel up to it, you can also walk across. The bridge is just over one mile long, and you can even take a guided tour!

DUMBO & Brooklyn Heights

After crossing the Brooklyn Bridge, you’ll find that Brooklyn is home to some of NYC’s most exciting neighborhoods and sites. One that’s gained a lot of attention and adoration is DUMBO, which could also be partly due to its catchy name.  

This waterfront neighborhood has a fascinating and rich history and many activities for visitors to enjoy. Not only is DUMBO a premier art district, but there are also lots of great places to eat, such as Grimaldi’s Pizza , The River Cafe, Jacques Torres chocolate factory, Butler Bakery , and more. Are you looking for shopping? Be sure to check out the newly renovated Empire Stores on Water Street.

Circle Line - Harbor Lights Night Cruise

Finish out your third day in New York City with the Harbor Lights Cruise. Hop aboard one of Circle Line’s state-of-the-art boats and take in the views of NYC twinkling at night. This unforgettable experience lasts about two hours, and you’ll see landmarks such as the Statue of Liberty, the Empire State Building, Brooklyn Bridge, and more.  

Just make sure your camera is ready because you’ll be mere yards away from some of the best photos of your life. And don’t worry; you won’t miss a thing because there will be an award-winning tour guide narrating the City’s story. So, sit back, relax, and take some amazing photos while creating memories that will last forever.  

4 Day Itinerary NYC  Day 4 : Upper West Side, Midtown, SoHo, Little Italy

Finally, for day 4 of our 4 Day Itinerary NYC, you’ll spend the last day of your trip touring the Upper West Side , Midtown, SoHo, and Little Italy. And just when you thought your vacation wouldn’t get any better, we’re rounding the trip off with some laid-back activities that will help you wind down from the past several exciting days.  

Let’s see what these areas of NYC have in store for you on day number four:  

Central Park

You probably thought we forgot about Central Park, but you know the saying – saving the best for last! Central Park is a masterpiece that Frederick Law Olmsted and Calvert Vaux created. Though the park has gone through extensive restorations over time, the initial purpose of acting as an open-air oasis amid a large, metropolitan city has always stayed the same.  

This national landmark is a must-visit attraction regardless of what season you visit or why you’re visiting. This park has something for folks of all ages, from horse and carriage rides and bike rentals to the Central Park Zoo and activities such as ice skating and Strawberry Fields.  

American Museum of Natural History

After finishing up at Central Park, you may want to stop at one of the many local restaurants such as the Loeb Boathouse, Tavern On The Green, or Maoz Vegetarian and make your way to the American Museum of Natural History.  

This museum is the world’s largest natural history museum, as it spans 4 city blocks and encompasses 25 interconnected buildings. Even if you’re not a fan of museums, this one is a must! It’s home to over 34 million specimens of animals, plants, fossils, human remains, rocks, minerals, meteorites, and human cultural artifacts. Though keep in mind that only a fraction of the museum’s artifacts are on show at any given time.  

Visit the Museum of Modern Art (MoMA) ...

The next stop on our list is the MoMA, or Museum of Modern Art. This art museum is located in Midtown Manhattan on 53rd between Fifth and Sixth Avenues. MoMA plays a significant role in the development and collection of modern art. It’s often referred to as the world’s largest and most influential museum for modern art. And there’s no wonder considering that the MoMA features five floors of art. So, take as much time as you’d like to explore the exhibits and collections before moving on.  

... or the Metropolitan Museum of Art (The Met), or both!

We hope you’re not tired of seeing beautiful art because your next stop is the Met. New York City’s Metropolitan Museum of Art is the United States’ largest art museum that controls a permanent collection of over two million works divided into 17 different departments.  

Seeing over two million pieces of art could take days by itself. So, it’s highly recommended that you plan for this part of your trip and already know what you want to see. At the very least, be sure to find Van Gogh, Hatshepsut Seated, the Temple of Dendur, and the Greek and Roman Statue Court.  

Discover the neighborhoods of SoHo, The Village and Little Italy

SoHo is an upscale residential and high-end shopping area where you’ll enjoy some of NYC’s best people-watching. Stroll up and down the area’s cobblestoned streets , admiring the rows of shops and houses. If you’re in the mood for a sweet treat, be sure to stop by the Dominique Ansel Bakery and order one of the legendary Cronuts.  

If you’re in the mood to keep walking, you can continue on to West Village or Greenwich Village . If not, find a posh SoHo restaurant and enjoy some food. Some of the best places to eat in Soho include Antique Garage, Blue Ribbon Brasserie, and Dig.  

On day 4 of our 4 Day Itinerary NYC, your final stop is Little Italy. The best part is that if you’re not in the mood for trendy SoHo food, Little Italy is the quintessential dining spot ! You’ll find local favorites such as Lombardi’s Pizza, Onieal’s, and Angelo’s of Mulberry Street .  

Yet, Little Italy is so much more than just an excellent place to eat. This area is also home to many historic landmarks, street art, gorgeous architecture, mafia locations, TV and movie locations, and the perfect place to find upscale consignment shops!

4 Days NYC Itinerary

Planning for your first trip to Manhattan can be overwhelming yet exciting. Relieve some of your stress and refer to our 4 Day Itinerary NYC and create the trip of a lifetime!

Just don’t forget to invest in the New York Pass for 4 Days and pack comfortable shoes!

Helpful Tips for Visiting NYC in 4 Days

If it’s your first time visiting NYC, then you may not know some insider secrets that will save you time and money! So, we thought we’d share a few of our own:

Invest in the New York Pass for 4 Days

And just as you’d expect, most of the popular tourist attractions in NYC charge an entry fee, and when you’re paying for yourself and other family members or friends, those costs will add up quickly. However, when you have the New York Pass, it provides you with access to these places, and it’s far cheaper than buying tickets at the door.

Get New York Pass now

or check out our ultimate New York Pass Comparison .

Are 4 days in New York City enough?

I think 4 days for New York is great, because you have more time than if you only visit the Big Apple for a weekend. Of course 5 days, 1 week or even 10 days are even better! In the 4 days NYC as in our itinerary you experience the most important neighborhoods and attractions of the city – and that quite relaxed!

Is $1000 enough for 4 days in New York?

Yes! Because if you know how, you can save a lot of money in NYC! First of all, check out the different sightseeing passes for New York . You can easily save 50% on admission to the best attractions in NYC.

In addition, I recommend my hotel finder for New York . It shows you the best hotels in NYC for every budget . They are proof that good hotels in New York don’t have to be expensive. Another budget tip are the food markets of NYC . Here you can eat very tasty and at relatively good prices. I love them!

What should I pack for 4 days in New York?

This is the most important tip that I have: Wear Comfortable Shoes ! This probably goes without saying, but NYC is best explored on foot, and you will spend a great deal of time walking from one place to another. When you consider that the average New Yorker walks about 10 miles per day just during their daily lives, you’ll see that comfortable shoes are a must!

What else do you need? This depends a bit on your travel time: 2 shorts or long pants, 2-3 t-shirts and a sweater are sufficient for the warm months. In the colder months you should definitely have several warm sweaters and a jacket!

How much is a 4-day trip to NYC?

If you’re in New York for 4 days, the hotel and food will use up most of your travel budget. A 3 star hotel in Midtown Manhattan starts at $100 per night , a 4 star hotel is $150 and prices for a night in a 5 star hotel start at $300 , so expect overnight costs of $300, $450 and $900 respectively for 3 nights.

For breakfast in the diner you can calculate with $15 per person and in the restaurants with $40 per person . Of course, it can quickly be more expensive.

Sightseeing costs: I can’t stress this enough: be sure to check out the various New York City sightseeing passes. It’s a simple and easy way to save 50% off the regular admission price. For the New York Pass for 4 days you can visit as many attractions as you want. It costs you just $200!

How do you plan a 4 day trip?

What is important to me when planning a trip with 4 days in NYC, I have already implemented in the above itinerary. The attractions you see per day should be close to each other, so you don’t waste a lot of time by communing.

Furthermore, you should plan enough time where you just do nothing else but let New York City work its magic on you. This is best done in one of the many cafes or during a walk along the High Line or 5th Avenue.

3 Days in New York: The Ultimate Guide for 2024

7 Day New York Itinerary

1 Week NYC Itinerary For Free: Travel Plans, Sightseeing, Maps & Tips

I'm a true New York fan! Not only have I visited the city over 25 times but also have I spent several months here at a time. On my blog I show you the best and most beautiful spots of the city, so that you have a really good time! You can also find lots of insider tips in our New York travel guide . Also check out my hotel finder for New York !

Get exclusive content, real insider tips, and the best deals in NYC for FREE!

Start of your trip: We will remind you with current events when you are in NYC!

4 Days In Ireland: 56 Different Itineraries To Choose From

By Author Keith O'Hara

Posted on Last updated: December 29, 2023

Yes, we have  56  different 4-day Ireland itinerary guides for you to choose from…  

Why 56 you ask?! 

The reason for this is that we’ve covered  every  (we hope…) possible want or need you could have. 

Each of our 4-day guides:

• Has been meticulously planned
• Follows logical routes we’re confident you’ll love
• Has a detailed hour-by-hour itinerary
• Makes planning a trip to Ireland easy

In the guide below, you can pick a 4-day Ireland itinerary based on:

Please take 15 seconds to read the graphic above as it’ll help you pick the most suitable Ireland itinerary down below!

As you can see, we have 4-day Ireland itinerary guides that cover every angle we could think of.

All you need to do to find your perfect itinerary is read the section below  carefully .

How to browse our Ireland in 4 days itineraries

The handiest way to browse our itineraries is to select, from the list below, where you’re starting your road trip from/near.

We’ve used the main entry points to Ireland for those of you flying in or arriving by ferry.

Simply click one of the start points below and you’ll be taken to 4 days in Ireland itineraries that start at that location:

4 days in Ireland from Dublin

If you’re looking to explore Ireland in 4 days and you’re starting from County Dublin, this section is for you.

There are two sections below, split depending on how you plan on getting around Ireland .

As we explained in this graphic , ‘Fast Trips’ are for those of you looking to see/do as much as possible and who don’t  mind moving hotel regularly and ‘Slow Trips’ are ones where you’ll move accommodation as little as possible.

For those of you with a car

• A 4-day slow trip for those with good fitness
• A 4-day slow trip for those with low fitness
• A 4-day fast trip for those with good fitness
• A 4-day fast trip for those with low fitness

For those of you using public transport

An overview of the route from dublin.

Photos via Shutterstock

If you’re starting your 4-day Ireland itinerary in Dublin, the route above is hard to beat.

Although it varies slightly depending on how you’re getting around Ireland, both the car rental and the public transport itineraries take in many of Ireland’s top sights.

Over the course of your 4 days in Ireland you’ll:

• Explore the many things to do in Dublin
• Explore the Clare Coast, including Doolin and the Cliffs of Moher
• Take a day trip to Wicklow, Meath and Louth
• See Galway City, Connemara and Cong
• Tackle the Ring of Kerry Drive , explore the Dingle Peninsula and see a chunk of West Cork

4 days in Ireland from Shannon

If you’re looking for a 4-day Ireland itinerary that kicks off in Shannon, this section should tickle your fancy.

We’ve split up the different itineraries to ones for those of you using a car and ones for those of you that aren’t.

As we mentioned in this graphic , our fast 4 days in Ireland itineraries are for those of you looking to explore as much as possible and who don’t  mind moving about a lot.

Our slow itineraries are ones where you’ll move accommodation as little as is physically possible.

An overview of the route from Shannon

A lot of people start their 4-day Ireland itinerary from Shannon due to the convenience of flying into Shannon Airport.

One of the benefits of starting from here is that you’re kicking off your 4 days in Ireland a stone’s throw from some of the country’s most popular attractions.

If you follow our route from Shannon, you’ll:

• Explore Connemara National Park
• See the mighty Inis Mor Island
• Visit Bunratty Castle before heading into the ancient Limerick City
• See Killarney National Park and it’s many attractions
• Visit Blarney Castle and tackle the many things to do in Cobh

Ireland itinerary 4 days from Belfast

Another great way to tackle Ireland in 4 days is to fly/get the ferry into Belfast and take it from there.

Belfast is a great starting point for a road trip as you can explore the Antrim Coast before continuing on to Derry and Donegal.

Like we explain in this graphic , we split up our itineraries below into two sections – 1 section is for those using a car and the other is for those that aren’t.

An overview of the route from Belfast

This 4-day Ireland itinerary is one of my favourites in this guide as it takes in some of the most scenic parts of the country.

You’ll kick things off by spinning along the Antrim Coast, with a whole host of stops to choose from along the way.

If you follow our route from Belfast, you’ll:

• Explore the Causeway Coastal Route
• Tackle some of the best things to do in Belfast
• See the best of the Boyne Valley
• Spin around a good chunk of the Wild Atlantic Way

4 days in Ireland from Rosslare

If you’re spending 4 days in Ireland and you’re arriving into the ferry terminal at Rosslare, we’ve plenty of itineraries ready for you.

Now, as was the case with the ones above, we’ve split them into 2; 1 section is for those of you with a car and another for those of you using public transport.

If you’re wondering what ‘Fast Trips’ and ‘Slow Trips’ are, refer to this graphic at the top of the guide.

An overview of the route from Wexford

Now, this 4-day Ireland itinerary varies a lot  depending on whether or not you’re getting around in a car.

The public transport around some of the more remote parts of Wexford, in particular, are what causes there to be such a contrast in the different itineraries.

If you follow our route from Wexford, you’ll:

• See the glorious Hook Peninsula
• Ramble around the town of Kinsale
• Tackle some of the best things to do in Killarney
• Explore the mighty Dingle Peninsula

4 days in Ireland from Cork

Our 4-day Ireland itinerary guides that kick off in Cork take in some of the best that Ireland has to offer.

You can choose (or opt out of) some magnificent walking trails, soak up spectacular scenery and step back in time at heritage sites.

These are some of our more popular 4 days in Ireland itineraries. As usual, we’ve split them up for those of you with a car and for those of you without one.

An overview of the route from Cork

Photo left: The Irish Road Trip. Others: Shutterstock

Cork is a great starting point for a road trip. At the start of the trip, you can spend a bit of time in the city before moving into the wilds of West Cork.

Our itineraries from Cork then take you around the coast, into Kerry and up towards Limerick before heading to Dublin and back to Cork.

If you follow our route from Cork, you’ll see:

• The beautiful Beara Peninsula
• Wild West Cork
• The Ring of Kerry
• A chunk of Limerick, Tipperary and Clare

Ireland in 4 days from Knock

Although there likely won’t be a huge number of people looking for a 4-day Ireland itinerary that starts in Knock, we felt it important to include it as a start-point.

I can safely say that the public transport road trips from Knock were  very  tricky to research and map out. However, it was worth it.

Below, you can pick a 4 days in Ireland itinerary kicking off in Mayo based on trip speed, your fitness and how you’ll get around (we explain how to browse the itineraries in this graphic ).

An overview of the route from Knock

If your 4-day Ireland itinerary kicks off in Knock, you’re in luck – Mayo is home to an endless number of adventure opportunities.

Now, the public transport itineraries vs the car itineraries vary a fair bit due to the lack of buses and trains in places, but both versions pack a punch.

If you follow our route from Knock, you’ll:

• Explore Achill Island
• Tackle some of the best things to do in Galway
• See some of the finest beaches in Ireland
• Spend time in Sligo and plenty more

4 days in Ireland from Donegal

The last of our 4-day Ireland itinerary guides kicks off in Donegal.

This was by far the hardest one to map out for public transport and as a result the itineraries vary a lot.

As always, we’ve split the different itineraries up into sections for those of you with a car and for those without.

An overview of the route from Donegal

The route from Donegal for those of you driving is a peach. You’ll see parts of the county that rarely make it into tourist guidebooks and you’ll see many of Donegal’s historic sites.

You’ll then move into Sligo before heading to Mayo, Galway and beyond. For those of you using public transport, the route is  very  different due to Donegal’s poor public transport.

If you follow our route from Donegal, you’ll:

• Explore some of the best things to do in Donegal
• Soak up some of Sligo’s finest views
• See the Connemara coast

FAQs about exploring Ireland in 4 days

We’ve had a lot of questions over the years asking about everything from ‘Is 4 days in Ireland enough?’ to ‘What route should I follow?’.

In the section below, we’ve popped in the most FAQs that we’ve received. If you have a question that we haven’t tackled, ask away in the comments section below.

Is 4 days in Ireland too long?

No. If anything, it’s no where near enough. Although Ireland is small in comparison to the likes of the US, there’s endless things to see and do scattered right the way across the island. 4 days will only scratch the surface.

What to do in Ireland for 4 days?

This will depend on whether you want a a busy or an easy 4 day Ireland itinerary. You could see a lot of Ireland in 4 days, but you’d be driving constantly. You’re best off following one of our itineraries in this guide.

Where to spend 4 days in Ireland?

Again, this depends on you and what you want to see and do. If you follow our route from Dublin, Belfast or Shannon in this guide, you won’t go wrong.

Keith O’Hara has lived in Ireland for 35 years and has spent most of the last 10 creating what is now The Irish Road Trip guide. Over the years, the website has published thousands of meticulously researched Ireland travel guides, welcoming 30 million+ visitors along the way. In 2022, the Irish Road Trip team published the world’s largest collection of Irish Road Trip itineraries . Keith lives in Dublin with his dog Toby and finds writing in the 3rd person minus craic altogether.

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed .

Join the journey: Click here to get our top tips for affordable travel!

Washington, DC Itinerary 4 Days: 2023 Guide From A Local

Washington, DC is my home – I have lived here over 12 years and I absolutely love it. There is just so much to explore here – from its rich history and world-renowned monuments to its thriving food and arts scene. 

In this guide, I will share my perfect 4 Day Washington DC Itinerary. This will help you experience DC like a true local. This isn’t your typical tourist guide; instead, you’ll get to discover hidden gems and beloved local spots that truly make Washington, DC unique. 

So whether you’re a history buff, a foodie, or someone who simply enjoys the vibrancy of city life, this guide has something for you. Let’s immerse ourselves in the charm and culture of DC, shall we?

Table of Contents

The History of Washington, DC

Washington, D.C., the capital of the United States , has a history that extends far beyond the arrival of the first Europeans. The area now known as the District of Columbia was initially inhabited by Native American tribes, such as the Nacotchtank, also known as the Anacostan. These tribes lived along the banks of the Anacostia River, engaging in farming, hunting, and fishing, leaving a cultural footprint that continues to influence the city.

European exploration in the late 15th century introduced drastic changes to the region. In 1790, the Residence Act approved the creation of a capital district as specified in the U.S. Constitution. The states of Maryland and Virginia donated land to form the federal district, and President George Washington chose the exact location of the city, which was named in his honor.

In the 19th century, Washington, D.C., began its transformation into an iconic symbol of the American identity. The city was designed by Pierre Charles L’Enfant, a French-born architect and civil engineer. His design presented a city of wide boulevards, public squares, and grand buildings, embodying the ideals of the new nation.

Despite the turbulent periods of the Civil War and segregation in the 20th century, Washington, D.C., has continued to evolve, preserving its historic essence while embracing diversity and progress. Today, the city stands as a testament to the nation’s history, combining the past with the present in a distinctive blend that makes it one of America’s most visited cities.

Washington, DC Old Town Trolley City Tour

Travel through DC on a trolley with a live guide and visit all the top 25 tourist sites in the city at your own pace. Opt between a 1 or 2 day ticket so that you can make the most of your experience.

During this tour you can visit sites such as:

• The White House
• The U.S. Capitol Building
• The Smithsonian Museums
• Upgrade to get a tram tour of the Arlington National Cemetery as well.

This is the top rated bus tour in DC, and will serve as your transportation throughout the city!

Washington, DC Itinerary 4 Days of History & Culture

Day 1 | get to know the city, morning / early afternoon.

On your first day I recommend getting to know the city. DC is a highly walkable city, but it is spread out quite a bit. In my experience, this is a great way to efficiently cover the most ground is by taking a hop-on-hop-off bus . The top rated bus tour in DC is the Old Town Trolley Tour. I have taken this tour many times myself and always enjoy it. 

The best part about this bus is that all the tour guides are live and have a lot of good tidbits to share about the historical sites you’ll see along the journey. As you ride the bus, I recommend selecting 3-4 places to stop along the way (as that is all you will likely be able to do reasonably). I’ve but an asterisks by those locations I think are best for visiting on your first day below. 

On this bus tour, you will see the following places:

Washington Welcome Center

The first stop on your journey, the Washington Welcome Center, serves as an ideal starting point for visitors to the city, whether or not you take the bus. As the hub of the Old Town Trolley Tour, this center provides guests with valuable information, maps, and resources about Washington D.C.’s numerous attractions, monuments, and museums. Additionally, the friendly and knowledgeable staff is always ready to offer recommendations or answer any questions. Aside from being an information center, the venue also houses a gift shop, where you can pick up memorable souvenirs. 

If you do take the bus, you can start your tour  here . 

The White House*

The White House, an iconic symbol of the United States, serves as the official residence and workplace of the president. Its construction began in 1792 and was completed in 1800. It served as the second presidential home, following the first presidential house in Philadelphia. 

The structure was burned down by British forces during the War of 1812, but it was rebuilt and occupied again by 1817. Since then, it has hosted the country’s leaders and has become a symbol of the American presidency around the world. The White House is renowned for its neoclassical architecture, with its gleaming white façade and intricately detailed columns. It’s expanded over the years, with additions like the West Wing, which houses the famous Oval Office. 

Know that visiting the White House can be difficult to do / plan for. If you really want to visit, you will need to contact your Congressman. Learn more about the process  here .

The National Archives

The National Archives, is a treasure trove of US history. This monumental building serves as the custodian of the country’s most important official documents, including the Declaration of Independence, the Constitution, and the Bill of Rights, collectively known as the Charters of Freedom. These invaluable documents are displayed in the Rotunda for the Charters of Freedom. 

Besides the Charters, the National Archives houses billions of records, letters, photographs, maps, and films that trace the narrative of American history. The research rooms available to the public allow visitors to delve further into specific historical topics. 

One exhibit that I found interesting and entertaining is one dedicated to the letters sent to the government on behalf of Elvis by star-struck girls who didn’t want him to be drafted into the war back in the 40s. 

The building itself, made with Indiana limestone, is a beacon of the neoclassical style, featuring a grand pediment with sculptures representing the guardianship of the nation’s records. 

get your discount

Get 20% off my travel planning fee.

Do you hate planning your own trips? Are you looking for a unique and bespoke travel experience to a new destination? Maybe you aren’t quite sure where you want to go yet? No worries! I can help you plan your next vacation and make the process EASY for you! Sign up to get your discount code!

The National Japanese American Memorial

The National Japanese American Memorial is a poignant tribute to the trials and triumphs of the Japanese American community during World War II. Situated in Washington, D.C., this memorial commemorates the internment of over 120,000 Japanese Americans during the war. Showcasing a beautiful sculpture of two cranes entangled in barbed wire, the memorial serves as a symbol of resilience and hope. 

The names of the internment camps, along with quotes from internees, are inscribed on the memorial’s walls, providing a moving testament to their experiences. The site also honors the valor of Japanese American soldiers who fought for the United States during the war. A visit to this memorial offers an introspective exploration of an often overlooked chapter of American history, reminding us of the enduring strength of human spirit amidst adversity.

Union Station

Union Stati on , located in Washington, D.C., is an architectural marvel and one of the busiest transportation hubs in the United States. Built in 1907, it was designed by Daniel Burnham, a prominent figure in the Chicago School of architecture. The Beaux-Arts style building, characterized by its grand facades and lavish decorative elements, is a testament to America’s architectural prowess during the early 20th century. 

Not just a transportation hub, Union Station served as a critical part of the city’s infrastructure during both World Wars. It also houses an array of shopping and dining outlets, offering visitors more than just a travel experience. 

A walk through Union Station will let you soak it its beautiful architectural detail, from the intricate ceiling design to the statuesque figures adorning the main hall.

This is the 2nd option for st arting your tour .  

U.S. Capitol Building

The U.S. Capitol Building, an emblem of the American people and their government, is recognized worldwide as a symbol of the United States. Located at the eastern end of the National Mall atop of Capitol Hill, this iconic edifice is the meeting place of the United States Congress. 

The Neoclassical style building was completed in 1800 and has been built, burnt, rebuilt, extended, and restored several times since, reflecting the growth and evolution of the nation. Its distinctive cast-iron dome, completed in 1866, is one of its most notable features. The Capitol Building is home to an important collection of American art, including historic portraits, murals, and sculptures. 

If you are able to snag a guided tour , you can get a glimpse into the legislative process, as well as the architectural and artistic treasures within. 

Smithsonian Air & Space Museum

The Smithsonian Air & Space Museum, located in Washington D.C., is a treasure trove for aviation and space enthusiasts. As one of the most visited museums worldwide, it showcases the marvels of human achievement in air and space exploration. The museum is home to thousands of artifacts including the 1903 Wright Flyer, Charles Lindbergh’s Spirit of St. Louis, and the Apollo 11 Command Module Columbia – the spacecraft that took humans to the moon. 

The museum also features fascinating exhibits on space travel, astronomy, and planetary science. Interactive displays, including flight simulators and a planetarium, offer an immersive experience, making the vastness of space more accessible to the public. 

I’ll note, while this museum is great – there is an even  bigger and better version  out by the Dulles Airport. If you have time to visit it while in the area, I highly recommend it! 

The Wharf is an energetic and upscale neighborhood located along the Potomac River in Washington D.C. Known for its waterfront living, vibrant nightlife, and diverse dining options, The Wharf is a top destination for locals and tourists alike. The area boasts several luxury hotels, high-end shops, and a lively concert venue, The Anthem. 

Its bustling marina hosts everything from yachts to paddleboards, while the scenic riverwalk invites leisurely strolls and picnics. A visit to The Wharf isn’t complete without exploring the historic Municipal Fish Market, the oldest continuously operating open-air fish market in the United States. 

International Spy Museum

The International Spy Museum in Washington D.C. provides an intriguing insight into the shadowy world of espionage. This unique museum features the largest collection of international espionage artifacts ever placed on public display, offering a rare glimpse into the covert operations and intelligence techniques used throughout history. 

The museum’s interactive exhibits allow visitors to step into the shoes of a spy, learning about the tools, technologies, and tactics used in covert operations. I’ve visited this museum a few times, and have found the artifacts fascinating. Let’s just say, some of what you see in the spy movies is true!

The museum also explores the role of espionage in shaping world history, from the Revolutionary War to the Cold War and beyond. 

Washington Monument*

The Washington Monument stands as a symbol of the country and proudly pays tribute to the United States’ first president. Located on the National Mall, this iconic obelisk is one of D.C.’s most visited attractions, offering stunning views of the capital from its observation deck. 

Constructed from marble, granite, and sandstone, it is the world’s tallest obelisk and stands at a height of 555 feet. Visitors can explore the monument’s interior, which features exhibits detailing its construction as well as information on George Washington’s life. 

For those interested in catching a beautiful view of D.C.’s skyline, the Washington Monument is an ideal spot to take that perfect photo. 

Smithsonian National Zoo

The Smithsonian National Zoo, is a world-class attraction that welcomes millions of visitors each year. Housing over 2,700 animals across 390 different species, the zoo’s commitment to conservation, science, and education is evident in its vast range of exhibits. 

Notable inhabitants include giant pandas, African lions, and Asian elephants. The star attraction is undoubtedly the Giant Panda Habitat, where visitors can observe these beloved creatures in a setting designed to mimic their natural environment. 

The zoo also features a variety of interactive exhibits and educational programs for visitors of all ages. And like the rest of the Smithsonian locations, entrance is completely free! 

Thomas Jefferson Memorial

The Jefferson Memorial, dedicated to the third U.S. President, Thomas Jefferson, is another prominent landmark on the National Mall in Washington, D.C. Designed in a style reminiscent of ancient Roman architecture, the memorial features a bronze statue of Jefferson, accompanied by inscriptions of passages from the Declaration of Independence and other notable speeches. 

Interestingly enough, there is also a small museum located at the bottom of the memorial that gives more context on his life and accomplishments.

The monument is located along the Tidal Basin, which includes a beautiful park, adorned with cherry blossom trees, that offers a serene ambiance, making it a popular spot among locals and tourists for contemplation and relaxation. 

FDR Memorial

The Franklin Delano Roosevelt Memorial, is a tribute to America’s 32nd President and his legacy of courage, resilience, and hope. It tells the story of FDR’s life from his childhood through his presidency and features four outdoor galleries that represent each of FDR’s terms in office. 

The memorial features sculptures depicting key historical events, quotes from FDR’s speeches, and a contemplative waterfall that flows through the memorial. With its unique combination of artistry and history, the FDR Memorial allows you to reflect on President Roosevelt’s impact on society during his presidency, and also provides an opportunity to reflect on his legacy today.

Martin Luther King Jr. Memorial

The Martin Luther King Jr. Memorial is a monument to the civil rights leader and Nobel Peace Prize laureate located on the National Mall in Washington D.C. The memorial features a 30-foot granite statue of Dr. King surrounded by quotes from his most famous speeches, such as: 

“I have a dream.”

“Darkness cannot drive out darkness; only light can do that.”

 “Injustice anywhere is a threat to justice everywhere.” 

In addition to the statue, visitors will find an inscription wall with more of his quotes and a reflecting pool with a circular stone wall etched with words from Dr. King’s “I Have A Dream” speech. 

The memorial is a powerful reminder of the impact one person can have on a nation, and serves as a reminder of the need to continue the fight for justice today. 

Lincoln Memorial*

Located on the western end of the National Mall in Washington D.C., the Lincoln Memorial is one of America’s most iconic monuments. The memorial was built to honor President Abraham Lincoln and features a 19-foot tall marble statue of the 16th president surrounded by 36 columns representing each state at the time of his death. 

There are inscriptions throughout the memorial, including the Gettysburg Address, and words of Lincoln’s Second Inaugural address. In front of the monument is the reflecting pool, where visitors can take a moment to reflect on how far America has come in achieving freedom and equality for all since Lincoln’s time, as well as consider the work that still needs to be done. 

National Museum of American History

The National Museum of American History is one of the Smithsonian Institution’s most visited museums, located on the National Mall in Washington D.C. The museum houses an extensive collection of artifacts from U.S. history including a full-size replica of the Star-Spangled Banner, clothing worn by first ladies throughout history, and memorabilia from historical events such as the Apollo 11 moon landing. 

Personally, the First Ladies Exhibit is one of my favorites! 

Visitors to the museum can experience what life was like in America throughout its history, and gain a greater appreciation for our country’s culture and heritage. 

National Portrait Gallery

The National Portrait Gallery in Washington D.C. is a Smithsonian Institution museum that collects and displays portraits of influential Americans from all eras. From presidents to actors, the museum is home to hundreds of portraits that tell stories about U.S. history and culture. 

The gallery also includes contemporary works, such as a commissioned portrait of Barack Obama taken by artist Kehinde Wiley. 

Visitors to the gallery can take in the inspiring stories of past leaders and innovators, while also gaining insight into how America has changed throughout its history. 

African Art Museum

The Smithsonian National Museum of African Art is dedicated to the collection, conservation and exhibition of traditional and contemporary African art. The museum houses a variety of artifacts ranging from sculptures to textiles, with pieces from countries such as Ethiopia, Nigeria and Ghana on display. 

Here you can explore the vibrant culture and history of Africa through the museum’s diverse collections, while also gaining a greater understanding of the continent’s influence on the world. Additionally, special programs and events are held throughout the year that provide unique learning opportunities for all ages. 

Book your DC Trolley Tour Now!

After heading back to your hotel to recover after an active day exploring the city, I recommend going to a centrally-located restaurant. If you like Mexican, Oyamel is my top recommendation. 

Oyamel Cocina Mexicana   is an acclaimed dining spot that is located centrally and offers a gastronomic exploration of Mexico’s diverse regional cuisines. Helmed by Chef José Andrés, Oyamel delivers a culinary experience that beautifully blends traditional recipes with contemporary techniques. 

The menu features a broad range of dishes, from antojitos (small bites) to hearty main courses, all of which showcase vibrant flavors and fresh ingredients. The atmosphere is lively and inviting, adorned with colorful butterfly decor that pays homage to the annual migration of monarch butterflies in Michoacán. 

Alongside the delectable food, Oyamel’s bar serves a variety of tequilas, mezcals, and meticulously crafted cocktails, ensuring a flavorful and memorable dining experience.

If you eat nothing else here – I highly, highly suggest you try the fish tacos. There are absolutely PERFECT! 

Day 2 | A Day at the Smithsonian

The Smithsonian Institution, established in 1846, is a renowned group of museums and research centers based in Washington D.C. Its origins can be traced back to James Smithson, a British scientist who left his estate to the United States with the intent to create an establishment for the “increase and diffusion of knowledge”. Despite never having visited the U.S, his generous bequest laid the foundation for what would become a world-class institution. 

Over the years, the Smithsonian expanded to include 19 museums, the National Zoological Park, and nine research facilities, covering diverse fields such as natural history, art, space exploration, and American history and culture. 

Each museum has its unique origin story, tied to various historical events and initiatives. Today, the Smithsonian Museums continue to grow, documenting and disseminating knowledge, and educating millions of visitors each year.

On your second day in DC, I recommend choosing two of the below museums to pass the day at. Note, each has a good cafeteria, so you will be able to grab lunch while there.

MORNING/ AFTERNOON

National Museum of African American History

The National Museum of African American History and Culture (NMAAHC), located on the National Mall in Washington D.C., opened in September 2016 and has since become a significant monument in the American landscape. 

The museum is devoted to the documentation of African American life, history, and culture. With a collection of over 36,000 artifacts, the NMAAHC offers a comprehensive exploration of the African American experience, touching upon themes of slavery, segregation, civil rights, and the contemporary era. 

In addition to its expansive exhibits, the museum holds educational workshops and community events, furthering its mission to help all Americans see how their stories, histories, and cultures are shaped and informed by global influences. 

In my opinion, this is the BEST museum in the city. It is honestly the first place I have visited that provides the true and honest story of black people in America. If you’d like to learn something that is not taught in history books or elsewhere, this is the place that you should go.

Smithsonian National Museum of Natural History

Situated on the National Mall, the Smithsonian National Museum of Natural History is one of the world’s largest natural history museums. Established in 1910, it has since become a popular destination for tourists and locals alike. 

The museum houses collections from all over the world, containing specimens from every type of environment – terrestrial, aquatic, and even outer space. From its iconic dinosaur skeletons to the Hope Diamond, there is something for everyone at the National Museum of Natural History. 

You can explore permanent exhibitions such as Oceans and Animals, or take advantage of one-of-a-kind experiences like a live butterfly pavilion. By creating an atmosphere that is both educational and entertaining, the museum seeks to promote knowledge in natural history, inspiring visitors to explore and care for our planet. 

​National Museum of the American Indian

The National Museum of the American Indian is a museum dedicated to the preservation and promotion of indigenous cultures from across the Americas. This Smithsonian Institute museum showcases exhibitions that explore Native American history, culture, and contemporary life. 

Here you can explore art galleries, take part in educational films and lectures, or participate in traditional Native activities such as pottery-making. With its expansive collections of artifacts and art, the museum strives to document and share the stories of Native Americans with all who visit.  

O Street Museum

I’ll caveat – this is not a Smithsonian Museum, but it offers a unique experience. The O Street Museum in Washington, DC is a hidden gem and a must-visit for art and exploration enthusiasts alike. This unique museum is known for its eclectic mix of art, architectural styles, and winding secret passages. With over 100 rooms and 70 secret doors spread across five interconnected townhouses, it offers a truly distinctive experience. And in addition, it is a fully functional hotel as well!

The museum’s collections span various forms of artistic expression, including paintings, sculptures, photographs, and music. Additionally, the O Street Museum is deeply committed to promoting creativity, innovation, and the preservation of artists’ rights. Whether you’re an art connoisseur, a treasure hunt enthusiast, or simply curious about the unusual, the O Street Museum provides an immersive, unforgettable experience.

Day 3 | Explore Iconic DC Neighborhoods

On your third day in DC, I recommend going for a neighborhood walk in one of the city’s many unique neighborhoods. I recommend trying one or two of the following neighborhoods. Each neighborhood presents a distinctive slice of what makes Washington D.C. such an engaging and diverse city to explore.

Georgetown, Washington D.C.’s oldest neighborhood, is a charming and historic area known for its cobblestone streets, federalist architecture, and bustling waterfront. Its roots stretch back to the 18th century, well before the establishment of the District of Columbia. Today, Georgetown is a vibrant community with a rich history, boasting a wide array of shopping districts, eateries, and scenic views.

Locations to visit: 

• Georgetown Waterfront Park:  This beautifully designed park, stretching along the Potomac River, offers stunning views, picnic spots, and a well-paved path for walking, jogging, or cycling. It is a perfect place to relax, enjoy outdoor activities, or witness the sunset over the river.
• Georgetown University:  A visit to Georgetown would be incomplete without touring its namesake university, renowned for its stunning Gothic architecture and beautifully manicured grounds. Don’t miss the opportunity to climb the Healy tower for a panoramic view of the city.
• Dumbarton Oaks:  This historic estate in the heart of Georgetown houses an impressive collection of Byzantine and Pre-Columbian art, as well as an extensive library. The beautifully landscaped gardens, designed by Beatrix Farrand, are a haven of tranquility, offering a peaceful escape from the city’s hustle and bustle.

Hidden Gem:  The Exorcist Stairs : These stairs are best known for being featured in the infamous movie.  

Navy Yard, primarily known for being home to the Washington Nationals Stadium, is a lively and burgeoning neighborhood in Southeast Washington, D.C. With a rich naval history dating back to the 19th century, it is now a hotspot for modern living, dining, and recreational activities.

Sites to check out: 

• Nationals Park : This baseball park is the beating heart of the neighborhood, home to Washington D.C.’s Major League Baseball team, the Nationals. It offers a fantastic sporting atmosphere and is surrounded by a myriad of eateries and bars. If you are visiting during baseball season, I recommend checking out a game stadium is pretty new and the games are a lot of fun – even if baseball really isn’t your thing (like me).
• Yards Park:  Situated by the Anacostia River, this beautifully designed park includes a waterfront boardwalk, a breezy green space for picnics, and a dancing fountain, making it an ideal spot for relaxation and outdoor activities. In the warmer months you can catch a variety of activities such as local festivals and summer movies. 
• The Yards Marina : A modern and well-equipped marina with a community boathouse, offering boating opportunities to residents and tourists alike. Its vicinity to several dining and shopping outlets make it a must-visit location in Navy Yard. I love just going for a walk down the marina and in front of the actual Naval Yard itself. It’s a beautiful place for a stroll when the weather outside is nice. 

Hidden Gem:  This is a restaurant, but  La Famosa  in Navy Yard is one of my all-time favorites. It is a locally-based Puerto Rican restaurant that is pretty casual in style. I recommend trying the Canoa de Platano if you visit. It’s delicious! 

The Wharf is a vibrant and thriving neighborhood, located on the Southwest Waterfront of Washington, D.C. It’s one of the city’s most up-and-coming neighborhoods and has an upscale vibe to it. Its stunning views, waterfront dining, and diverse entertainment options make it a popular destination for residents and tourists alike.

While there you should check out: 

• The Anthem : A centerpiece of The Wharf, The Anthem is a state-of-the-art music venue that hosts performances from world-renowned artists. Its intimate setting and top-notch acoustics provide a concert experience like no other.
• District Wharf:  Stretching along the Potomac River, District Wharf boasts a variety of stores, restaurants, and outdoor spaces. Whether you’re shopping for unique gifts, enjoying a meal with a view, or simply taking a scenic stroll, there’s something for everyone here.
• The Municipal Fish Market:  As the oldest continuously operating open-air fish market in the United States, the Municipal Fish Market offers a truly unique culinary experience. Visitors can purchase a variety of fresh seafood, or enjoy prepared dishes at one of the market’s food stalls.

Hidden Gem – 7th Street Park : This park comes complete with walking trails and picnic-friendly plots. It also has interactive fountains with multi-color lighting. 

Day 4 | Excursion to Mount Vernon

Morning / afternoon.

On your fourth day in DC, I recommend taking a short excursion outside of the city to Mt. Vernon. ​Home of George Washington, America’s first president, it is a must-see destination for any DC visitor. Located on the banks of the Potomac River, the estate offers an exciting and educational experience for all ages.

On the site you can expect to see the following sites: 

• The Mansion : A tour of George Washington’s iconic mansion provides an in-depth look into his life as a statesman, soldier, and planter. Visitors can explore the interior of the house, gardens, and grounds.
• The Pioneer Farm:  Take a step back in time with a visit to Mount Vernon’s Pioneer Farm. Interact with costumed interpreters as they demonstrate 18th century farm work such as blacksmithing, carpentry, and spinning wool. This farm was completely run by Washington’s slaves, and was honestly the site where I truly understood what slavery meant to the wealthy. It’s a sobering look on what it took to make the rich live in luxury while the on site slaves suffered on a daily basis. 
• Distillery & Gristmill:  Tour the fully functioning, award-winning distillery and gristmill that George Washington founded in 1797. This educational experience highlights the importance of whiskey and flour production during his time. 
• The Tombs : In this unique exhibit, you can explore the final resting place for George and Martha Washington as well as other family members. The tombs offer an enlightening look into the reverence and respect George Washington received after his death. 
• The Museum & Education Center : The museum features interactive displays and unique artifacts to explore Washington’s life before, during, and after the American Revolution. Plus, visitors can learn more about his legacy through the center’s educational programs. 

Spend your final evening eating at a nice restaurant. If you are open to a true international experience, I recommend eating at El Secreto de Rosita . Tucked away near U. Street, El Secreto de Rosita offers an authentic culinary journey through the vibrant flavors of Latin American cuisine. This cozy, intimate restaurant embodies the warm hospitality of Latin culture, providing an atmosphere that feels like a home away from home. 

The menu showcases a range of traditional dishes, each bursting with rich and robust flavors that are sure to tantalize your taste buds. From the perfectly seasoned ceviche to the tender, melt-in-your-mouth carnitas, every dish is a testament to the culinary traditions of Latin America. As the perfect finale to your day of sightseeing, El Secreto de Rosita promises a dining experience that is as memorable as it is delectable.

Washington, DC City Map

All of the locations mentioned above can be found in the map below:

The Best Tours of Washington, DC

Here are some of the best tours you may want to check out in DC:

• DC Monuments and Memorials at Night : See all of DC’s most popular monuments at night and learn why the nation’s capital is considered one of the world’s most beautiful to see at night.
• Best of DC Plus US Capitol and National Archives Reserved Entry : See famous landmarks like the White House, the Lincoln Memorial, and more. Enjoy reserved and priority entry into the both the US Capitol building and the National Archives, where the Declaration of Independence and the Constitution are on display.
• African American History Tour with Museum Admission : Add to your experience of visiting the National Museum of African American History & Culture by learning more about the first Afro-Americans in the country. Visit sites like the Frederick Douglass National Historic site, the U Street corridor, the MLK Memorial, and more.

Day Trips from Washington, DC

There are many options for day trips from Washington, DC. Some of these include:

• Baltimore, Maryland:  Just an hour north of DC, Baltimore offers a rich maritime history. Explore the Inner Harbor, visit the National Aquarium, or tour the historic USS Constellation.
• Gettysburg, Pennsylvania:  A 90-minute drive will take you to the site of one of the most significant battles in American history. Tour the battlefield, visit the National Military Park, and explore the charming town of Gettysburg.
• Shenandoah National Park, Virginia:  Located just 75 miles from the capital, it’s a haven for outdoor enthusiasts. You can hike, camp, and enjoy breathtaking views of the Blue Ridge Mountains.
• Annapolis, Maryland:  This quaint city is the capital of Maryland and home to the U.S. Naval Academy. Stroll around the historic downtown and enjoy seafood on the waterfront.
• Harpers Ferry, West Virginia:  This historic town, located at the confluence of the Potomac and Shenandoah rivers, offers a wealth of American history and beautiful scenery. You can hike, visit historic sites, and explore the charming town center.

If you are open to being on the road for a bit more time, a day trip to NY C is also a possibility, if you are a true road warrior.

Getting to Washington, DC

Getting to dc via plane.

Reaching Washington, DC is a smooth and efficient process, thanks to its well-connected transportation network. For travelers journeying from far-off locations, the city is serviced by three major airports: Ronald Reagan Washington National Airport (DCA), Washington Dulles International Airport (IAD), and Baltimore/Washington International Thurgood Marshall Airport (BWI). All these airports offer numerous domestic and international flights. 

Getting to DC via Train

Alternatively, if you prefer a scenic route, Amtrak provides convenient train services to Union Station, a historic and architectural landmark. The station is centrally located, providing easy access to various sights and attractions. 

Driving to DC

Lastly, if you’re considering a road trip, Washington, DC is well-connected by the interstate highway system, which includes I-95, I-66, I-395, and I-495, among others. These highways provide extensive coverage and easy accessibility to the city for motorists.

Getting Around Washington, DC

Navigating around Washington, DC, is remarkably straightforward, thanks to the city’s diverse range of public and private transportation options.

The Washington Metropolitan Area Transit Authority (WMATA) operates the Metrorail and Metrobus networks, providing extensive coverage across the city and surrounding suburbs. Additionally, the DC Circulator bus offers a convenient and affordable way to reach the city’s most popular monuments and museums

For a more personal mode of transport, taxis, rideshare services like Uber and Lyft, and bike-sharing programs are plentiful.

If you prefer to explore on foot, the city’s grid layout and numerous pedestrian-friendly pathways make walking an appealing choice. Lastly, for those who wish to drive, car rentals are widely available, though be mindful of the city’s often busy traffic and parking limitations.

Where to Stay in Washington, DC

Washington, DC offers a variety of accommodations perfect for any traveler. For those who prefer hotels, there are plenty of options right in the city center, ranging from budget-friendly to luxuriously upscale. Plus, many offer views of iconic monuments and landmarks like the Capitol Building and Lincoln Memorial. 

Downtown DC Hotel recommendation

Citizenm hotel.

This hotel bills itself as “luxury without the capital prices”. It is located just a short walk from downtown and the Smithsonian museums. It features a colorful motif and a cozy environment. There is a hot and cold breakfast buffet and everything in the room is controlled by in-room iPad or the citizenM app.

navy yard Hotel recommendation

Thompson hotel dc.

If you are into sports, this hotel is just a short 8 minute walk from the Nationals Park and about a 20 minute walk from Audi Stadium, where the local soccer team plays. As this hotel is located in the trendy Navy Yard neighborhood, there are plenty of options for delicious restaurants and local festivals as well.

dupont circle Hotel recommendation

This boutique hotel in Dupont circle presents a classic and clean style. All the rooms are decorated in neutral colors with a touch of Art Deco-style decor. As this hotel is located in Dupont Circle, you will get a chance to spend time among DC’s most historic homes and buildings. This neighborhood also has plenty of unique shops and excellent restaurants and bars.

Where to Eat in Washington, DC

The restaurant scene in Washington, DC is as diverse and vibrant as the city itself. Whether you’re searching for traditional American comfort food, international cuisines, or gourmet dining experiences, the city has you covered.

Foodies will appreciate the range of eateries, from Michelin-starred establishments and innovative fusion restaurants to food trucks and vibrant farmers’ markets. While the local food scene is not as distinct as cities like New Orleans , DC’s food culture is a testament to its multicultural heritage, boasting a variety of flavors from around the world.

I have SO many go-to spots, but below are a few of my favorites. You won’t be able to get to all of these with just 4 days in Washington, DC, but try to see how many you can check out!

Quick (Local) Bites

Ben’s Chili Bowl

Ben’s Chili Bowl is an iconic food institution located in the heart of Washington, DC. For more than six decades, this family-run restaurant has been serving up its famous chili and half-smoke sausages to locals and visitors alike. The atmosphere is lively and welcoming, filled with the tantalizing aroma of its signature dishes. Stepping into Ben’s Chili Bowl is like taking a journey into the city’s rich history, as the restaurant has remained a consistent symbol of community and resilience through times of change. 

Good Stuff Eatery

Good Stuff Eatery, located in the heart of Capitol Hill, is a favorite among Washington, DC locals for its gourmet burgers and shakes. Founded by Spike Mendelsohn, a former contestant on Top Chef, this eatery is known for its farm-fresh ingredients and creative twist on American classics. The menu features a variety of mouthwatering burgers, from the classic ‘Prez Obama’ Burger to the vegetarian ‘Shroom Burger’ (my personal fave!).

 The hand-cut fries and hand-spun shakes are not to be missed either (the s’more shake is what brought me here!). Good Stuff Eatery not only offers delicious food but also a vibrant and friendly atmosphere.

Good Stuff has a location in both Georgetown and Capitol Hill.

Cava Mezze Grill 

Cava Mezze Grill is a fast-casual Mediterranean restaurant. This bright and airy spot serves up delicious, healthful fare with a modern twist. From their famous hummus to the grilled chicken pita wraps and falafel bowls, Cava’s fresh ingredients provide an explosion of flavor in every bite. For those looking to indulge, try the tzatziki fries – a unique take on classic french fries. Cava offers an array of sides, salads, and spreads that can be enjoyed alone or shared in addition to your meal. 

Union Market

Stroll the aisles of this bustling indoor market, where you’ll find a variety of locally-sourced produce, meats, cheese, artisanal products, and more. This vibrant venue also hosts over 35 vendors offering an array of international cuisines – from Korean barbecue to fresh Italian pastas. With all of the options, you can easily spend an entire day exploring this amazing marketplace. Enjoy some shopping and sit down for a bite to eat at one of the many eateries in Union Market – it’s an experience not to be missed while in DC!

Formal Restaurants

Founding Farmers

Founding Farmers in DC is a renowned dining destination, embodying the spirit of farm-to-table philosophy. As the name suggests, this restaurant takes immense pride in sourcing its ingredients from a network of family farms across the country, ensuring fresh and high-quality produce in every dish. With a menu that celebrates the diversity of American cuisine, Founding Farmers offers a culinary experience that is both delicious and sustainable. 

This restaurant is located in the Foggy Bottom neighborhood. 

dLeña

This restaurant has billed itself as providing a “modern approach on classic Mexican fare”. The food here is exceptional and the vibes are just right. If you visit this restaurant, I recommend eating in the basement, which is just so cozy. Also, on Wednesday nights, you can catch live music here too!

This modern Middle Eastern restaurant is a must-visit for anyone looking to add some cultural flavor to their trip. The menu offers traditional dishes, like mezze platters and pita sandwiches, as well as inventive creations sure to tantalize the taste buds. 

The restaurant is located in the Navy Yard neighborhood.

This Mediterranean mezze restaurant is a favorite of DC locals. It serves up an array of Greek, Middle Eastern, and Turkish dishes made with fresh ingredients. From small plates like dolmades and falafel to larger entrees like signature meats or wood-grilled fish, Zaytinya offers something for everyone. 

The restaurant is located in the Gallery Place / Chinatown neighborhood.

For a classic tapas experience, look no further than Jaleo. The restaurant features traditional Spanish dishes like paellas and patatas bravas, as well as more innovative creations such as the signature crispy potato “bomba” with alioli.No visit to DC is complete without experiencing the city’s renowned food culture.

Chloe 

Chloe, located in the Navy Yard neighborhood of Washington DC, epitomizes culinary craftsmanship and innovation. This contemporary eatery brings together flavors from around the world, creating a unique fusion that is both exciting and palate-pleasing. Chef Haidar Karoum’s extensive travels are reflected in the diverse menu which features seasonal ingredients, ensuring that every dish is fresh and flavorful. 

Rasika  

This modern Indian restaurant offers a unique take on traditional flavors. The menu includes favorites like tandoori chicken and curries, as well as innovative dishes such as the lobster korma or black cod served with tamarind glaze. 

When to Go to Washington, DC

Washington, DC is a great place to visit year-round. The city’s mild climate makes it easy to explore in any season. But if you are looking for the best time to go, October and April usually offer the most pleasant temperatures, with highs in the mid 70s Fahrenheit. Spring and fall bring some of Washington’s most beautiful blooms. This is the time I typically spend the most times outdoors, myself.

Summer is hot and humid in the city, so it’s best avoided. Winter months are cold but not too extreme and ideal for outdoor activities like skiing or snowshoeing. No matter when you decide to visit, DC offers plenty of exciting attractions and events throughout the year. 

For those looking to experience some of the city’s most iconic sights, the National Cherry Blossom Festival is a must-see. Held from late March to mid-April, the festival celebrates the blooming of DC’s world-famous cherry trees with a range of events and activities for all ages. 

Also, the annual DC Jazz Fest takes place over two weekends in late June, offering music fans an opportunity to enjoy jazz performances by local and international artists. 

FAQs on Visiting Washington, DC

Yes, Washington, DC is a highly walkable city with a layout that is easy to navigate. Many of the major landmarks, museums, and attractions are located near each other, making it possible to explore the city on foot. Additionally, the city has numerous parks and trails, providing a pleasant walking experience.

Definitely, Washington DC tours are worth it, especially for first-time visitors. They provide a structured and informative way to explore the city’s rich history and iconic landmarks. Besides, many tours offer unique perspectives or access to areas that you might miss if you were exploring on your own.

Typically, a three to four-day trip is sufficient to visit Washington, DC. This allows enough time to explore major attractions such as the National Mall, the Smithsonian Museums, and the U.S. Capitol. However, if you want to visit more museums or take day trips to nearby areas, you might want to plan for a longer stay.

The best area to stay in Washington, DC depends on your interests. Downtown DC is a great choice if you want to be near major attractions like the National Mall. Dupont Circle is known for its vibrant nightlife and dining scene, while Georgetown offers historic charm and upscale shopping.

The best time to visit Washington, DC is during the spring (March to June) or the fall (September to November). These seasons offer mild weather and beautiful natural scenery. Particularly, late March to mid-April is a fantastic time to witness the National Cherry Blossom Festival.

In Summary | Washington DC Itinerary 4 Days

That wraps this 4 day Itinerary of Washington, DC. As I hope you can tell, a trip to Washington, DC promises an enriching blend of history, culture, and nature. 

Whether you’re a history enthusiast, an art lover, or a foodie, the city has something to offer everyone. With its multitude of iconic landmarks, vibrant neighborhoods, and diverse culinary scene, Washington, DC stands as a city not just to visit, but to experience. 

Remember, the best times to visit are spring and fall, and staying in areas that align with your interests will greatly enhance your trip. So pack your bags and get ready for an unforgettable journey to the heart of the United States.

Looking for More US City Guides?

• 4 Days in New York City
• 2 Days in New Orleans
• The Best US Cities to Visit
• Historical Sites in New Orleans
• Virtual Washington, DC Travel Guide

Don’t forget to pin this for later!

Christen Thomas is the founder of TravelWanderGrow, established in 2018. She has lived abroad and traveled extensively to over 30 countries. In addition, she is a certified Travel Advisor and is an expert in planning trips focused on city history and culture. As a frequent traveler, she also shares tips on how to prepare to travel well and how to save money while doing so.

Leave a Reply Cancel reply

Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

Discover Which Colorado Mountain Town is right for you

The Only 4-Day Colorado Road Trip Itinerary You’ll Ever Need

• January 8, 2024
• By foxintheforest

Last Updated on January 15, 2024 by foxintheforest

If you only have 4 days in Colorado, you’ll see quite a bit with this locally-curated Colorado road trip itinerary.

Believe me, there are so many different stops to make on a Colorado road trip, that it’s hard to boil it down to just 4 days. Like me, you could spend a lifetime here and still not see everything.

This 4 day Colorado road trip itinerary delivers you a taste of the different areas of Colorado without feeling too rushed. You’ll be in a new place each day so you can really get a flavor for the epic beauty the Centennial State has to offer.

There is a lot of ground to cover with just 4 days in Colorado so be prepared to drive and spot amazing scenery along the way.

I’ve lived in Colorado for over 13 years and I road trip in this state constantly – in the summer, I’m on the road every 4 days. Once a weekend warrior, I turned my passion for road-tripping Colorado into a full-time gig as a writer for the outdoor industry.

As a seasoned pro and local, it’s my mission to empower you to make the most of your 4 days in Colorado like a local, not a tourist.

I know all of the best Colorado road trip spots and you won’t find better advice about traveling in Colorado anywhere else on the web.

So here’s how to see the most of Colorado in just 4 days.

How to Use this Colorado Road Trip Itinerary Guide

This 4-day Colorado road trip itinerary brings you a taste of the highlights. Are there other amazingly beautiful place in Colorado to explore ?

Sure, but this 4-day itinerary is designed to give you a taste of the unique landscapes of Colorado and maximize your time exploring this amazing state. This itinerary includes:

• How to make the most of 4 days in Colorado
• 2 of the best national parks in Colorado
• Incredibly Instagrammable views
• Delicious eats
• Colorado hot springs
• 2 of the most scenic drives in Colorado
• Quick tips to make the most of your Colorado road trip
• Ideas for additional amazing Colorado road trip stops if you have more time

When is the Best Time to Go on a Colorado Road Trip?

The Rocky Mountains of Colorado typically have snow from October through June. Although it’s a pretty time to visit, it’s also a dangerous time to hike due to avalanche hazards and many of the scenic drives close down for the season. Therefore, the best time to go on a Colorado road trip is from July through early September.

Colorado Road Trip Map

Although this route has ample driving, you’ll see plenty of amazing scenery along the way. This diverse itinerary spans many exceptional landscapes on your 4-day itinerary in Colorado.

Day One: Denver to Estes Park

Since you’ve only got 4 days to explore Colorado, pick up your vehicle and drive straight to Estes Park – one of the most beautiful Colorado mountain towns . Make sure to drink plenty of water and take things slow to get properly acclimated to the altitude.

Keep in mind the Denver International Airport (DIA) is pretty far from…well…anything. If you’re arriving late, consider spending the night in Denver, and prepare for an early morning to make the most of Estes Park , Colorado.

Things to do : Catch a sunset at Sprauge Lake or the Many Parks Curve Overlook in Rocky Mountain National Park, spot wildlife in Estes Park , take a short hike at Lumpy Ridge, relax and grab a drink at the Stanley Hotel (the inspiration for The Shining – some say this place is haunted if you’re looking for spooky vibes).

Drive time: 1 hr 40 mins

Where to Stay: Camp at a campground near Estes Park, find dispersed camping along Highway 34, stay in Estes Park (generally quite pricey during the high season), or stay in nearby Lyons, Colorado (cheaper, great AirBnBs).

Where to eat: Smokin’ Daves BBQ and Brew (mid-range brewhouse), Scratch Deli and Bakery (breakfast, lunch, coffee), Burgers and Gyros on Moraine (cheap lunch or dinner), Notchtop Bakery and Cafe (excellent breakfast or brunch).

Day Two: One Day in Rocky Mountain National Park

Rise and shine before the sun to make the most of your time on this 4 day Colorado itinerary.

As one of the most beautiful national parks in the US , Rocky Mountain National Park gets crowded year-round, but if you’re willing to get up before dawn, you can savor a few moments of solitude in the park.

Today you’ll go for a hike at one of the many amazing hiking trails in Rocky Mountain National Park, then continue onwards along Trail Ridge Road – one of the most scenic drives near Denver – to the west end of the park.

Local Tip: Trail Ridge Road is not maintained in the winter. Always be sure to check that the road is open before heading out. You can still hike, but you’ll have to drive around the west end of the park to get to Glenwood Springs if the road is closed.

Things to do in Rocky Mountain National Park : Sunrise at either Bear Lake (no walking) or continue onwards to Dream Lake and Emerald Lake (3.2 miles RT). Hikers looking for a challenge should check out Sky Pond via Glacier Gorge – a classic Colorado lake hike , or the Loch Lake Trail.

Drive time: Approximately 3 hr 30 min to Glenwood Springs with stops.

Where to eat: Pack snacks and grab a late lunch at Grand Lake. Check out Cy’s Deli or Sagebrush BBQ and Grill.

Heads Up: You’ll need a timed entry permi t to enter Rocky Mountain National Park during certain times, so plan in advance!

Local Tip: Got extra time? You’ll find plenty to do with 3 days in and around Rocky Mountain National Park.

Local Tip: If you’re planning on visiting more than 3 national parks in a year, snag the America the Beautiful Parks Pass to get into RMNP for free.

Glenwood Springs Overnight with Hot Springs

After a day in Rocky Mountain National Park, head to Glenwood Springs and relax with a soak in the Iron Mountain Hot Springs.

If you’ve got some spare time and energy, snag a permit to hike to Hanging Lake (book at least 4 months in advance), one of Colorado’s most beautiful hikes.

Things to do : Hike to Hanging Lake (near Glenwood Springs, advanced permit and paid parking or bus ride required), soak in the Glenwood Springs hot springs or ride the scenic Gondola to the top of the Canyon.

Where to eat: Sweet Coloradough (delicious donuts), Native Son Restaurant and Bar (tapas and great drinks), Slope & Hatch (delicious street tacos).

Where to Stay: The Hotel Glenwood Springs (pricey but convenient), two rest areas just east of town (free camping, budget option. Bathrooms are clean and it is very safe), Hanging Lake Inn (budget hotel).

  Local Tip: Hanging Lake has been experiencing temporary closures due to trail maintenance from the 2021 landslides (yup, even in 2024). Always check on the permit website for the most accurate and up-to-date info!

Day 3: Black Canyon of the Gunnison

In the morning, make the 2.5-hour drive to the Black Canyon of the Gunnison. Touted as the “Grand Canyon of the Rockies” this beautiful canyon plunges 2,722-feet down and is only 40 feet across at its narrowest section. It’s a must-see stop on any Colorado road trip.

Dr i ve Time: 2.5 hours to the more developed south rim, or 2 hours to the more remote north rim.

Things to do : Snap photos along the 12 scenic overlooks on the Rim Drive (Chasm and Sunset view are spectacular), hike to the bottom of the canyon (difficult, 5 hours, obtain a permit on arrival), go fishing, go to a ranger program and learn about the area (the night program is amazing), go for a scenic boat ride or white water raft, rock climb in the canyon (intermediate level), check out the historic town of Cimarron and see what life was like in 1882.

Where to eat: Crash Burger (casual, tasty burger joint), Colorado Boy Pizzeria, Guru’s Nepalese Restaurant (tasty Nepali food), Mimo’s (breakfast burritos, a Colorado breakfast staple).

Where to Stay: Reserve a camp spot at the East Portal Campground or stay in nearby Montrose. Stay at the Canyon Creek Bed and Breakfast (highly rated, but pricier), The Country Lodge (mid-range), or one of the many standard hotel chains.

Local Tip : With extra time on your Colorado road trip you can explore nearby Crested Butte (a charming mountain town famous for mountian biking) or the jaw-dropping San Juan Mountains.

Day 4: Explore Breweries in Denver

It’s time to head back to Denver today. If you’re short on time, make your way directly to DIA (keep in mind traffic is poor in the city around rush hour, and it’s an average of 45 minutes to the airport from Denver) or stop by one of Denver’s most amazing local breweries for a delicious beer and some food.

Dr i ve Time: 4 hrs and 45 minutes to downtown Denver. 5 hours and 20 minutes to Denver International Airport

Things to do : There’s a wide array of things to do in Denver , but if you’re short on time check out Red Rocks Amphitheater in nearby Morrison (you’ll pass it on the way to the city), grab a drink at a local brewery, visit the Denver Botanical Gardens, or wander around the RiNo District or Union Station area.

Where to eat: Lowdown Brewery (tasty pizza and beer), The Great Divide Brewery (a Colorado classic), The Post Brewing Co (the best fried chicken and soul food).

Local Tip: If you’re coming home on a Sunday and you’re traveling along I-70 the traffic is extremely bad from 11 am until 5 pm every weekend. Be sure to plan accordingly!

Bonus: Colorado Springs and the Garden of the Gods

After enjoying all the big city excitement of Denver during your Colorado road trip itinerary, you could head south to Pikes Peak. It’s a gorgeous mountain that is accessible via car, or hiking trail, and that sits right near the Garden of the Gods.

Just under an hour and a half from Denver, the Garden of the Gods is home to a series of quirky red rock formations that can be enjoyed via easy-to-navigate hiking trails. Just use I-15 to get here and hop on the Ridge Loop Trail which is a great way to get an overview of the park.

In total, there are over 15 miles of trails here that include everything from easy walks to intense climbs. This is also one of the best free things to do in Colorado since the former owner, Charles Perkins, gifted the land to the public.

Local Tip: Try to spend 2-3 days in Colorado Springs to fully enjoy all that the area has to offer. I would also avoid visiting Garden of the Gods in the summer since it is packed with people.

Additionally, golden hour is the best time for photos since the red rocks contrast beautifully against the sky.

Bonus: Great Sand Dunes National Park

Not sure where to go after you visit Colorado Springs during your Colorado road trip itinerary? If so then take a 2.5- hour ride along I-25 and US-160 to Great Sand Dunes National Park.

After all, this incredible natural oasis sits at the base of the Sangre de Cristo Mountains and is home to the tallest sand dunes in North America.

During your visit, enjoy fun activities like sand boarding, sand sledding, hiking, camping, and picnicking. Stargazing is also popular given the park’s remote location and dark skies. Plus, don’t worry about packing your own gear since many local outfitters will rent you all the gear and sleds that you need.

During your visit, you’ll want to stay in nearby Alamosa. It is just 35 miles away from the park and offers a wide array of budget, mid-range, and luxury accommodations.

Now, to visit all the major park highlights and to have ample time to hike around the dunefield to High Dune, Hidden Dune, and Star Dune, plan to spend around two or three days here.

Local Tip: This park is best visited in early fall when temperatures are pleasant and when the crowds at Medano Creek are long gone.

Colorado Road Trip Quick Tips

Visiting Colorado in just 4 days is a tall order. There’s a lot to see and do. For the best trip, travel like a Colorado local. When you’re planning a Colorado road trip, you’ll want to keep a few things in mind to make your experience better. Here are a few handy local tips:

Mountian traffic is a real problem year-round . Build in extra time when you’re traveling on Interstate 70 (coming back from the Gunnison).

Colorado locals drive quickly and pass on the left . Please don’t drive in the left lane unless you’re looking to pass.

Fire bans are common in Colorado. If you plan on camping in Colorado , check the latest fire ban regulations for where you’re traveling.

Colorado is a naturally beautiful place, be sure to do your part and practice Leave No Trace. Pack out your trash (this includes fruit peels, wrappers, used toilet paper while hiking, and dog poop).

The airport is rather far from Denver (40 minutes at least), book in some extra time for travel.

The weather is often unpredictable and wild in Colorado , especially in the summer be prepared with a proper Colorado road trip packing list.

Weed is legal and can be found virtually everywhere in Colorado, but it still illegal to smoke in public and smoke and drive. Respect weed laws.

Spend One Week in Colorado

If you can swing it, it’s worth it to spend a few more days visiting Colorado. The ideal amount of time for a road trip in Colorado would be one week.

This way, you can get into the mountains even further. Explore a few of the most unbelievable places in the Rockies that just isn’t feasible with only 4 days.

Although this itinerary covers some amazing places, if you’ve got extra time, check out these awesome Colorado getaway destinations .

Additional Stops for 4 Days in Colorado

Create your own amazing 4 day Colorado road trip itinerary by swapping or adding these fantastic spots.

Ouray in the San Juan Mountains

Known as the “Alps of America.” This place is an excellent addition to your Colorado road trip. Head here to explore some beautiful alpine lake hikes such as the famous Ice Lake . Or enjoy incredible camping, go ATVing and check out the town of Telluride. There are plenty of things to do in Ouray and around, especially if you’re into challenging hikes and off-road driving.

The Million Dollar Highway Scenic Byway in the San Juan Mountains. Easily one of Colorado’s most scenic drives . Extend your trip or swap the San Juans for Black Canyon of the Gunnison. (Note that drives times will increase drastically).

Crested Butte

Famous for its world-class skiing, charming mountain town, and mountain biking spending the day here after Gunnison would be a great way to add a day to your trip.

Carbondale and Aspen

Peep the famous Maroon Bells or embark on the Four Passes Loop – one of the most beautiful backpacking routes in Colorado. Accessible from Glenwood Springs and can be swapped for the Black Canyon on a 4 day Colorado road trip.

B uena Vista, Leadville, and Salida

A famous weekend getaway from Denver, these towns are the gateway to the Sawatch Range. Home to some of Colorado’s easiest 14er hikes – mountains that rise over 14,000 feet above sea level.

Other activities include rafting, mountain biking, fishing, and camping. Great place to stop after coming back from the Black Canyon of the Gunnison.

Grand Junction, Fruita, and Colorado National Monument

Stop here during the shoulder seasons (spring and fall, summers are sweltering) for epic desert scenery. You might just think your in Moab! 1 hour and 30 minutes from Glenwood Springs.

Breckenridge, Frisco, and Dillon

There are plenty of things to do in Breckenridge from stand up paddle boarding to amazingly scenic hikes in Breckenridge. Another great stopover coming back to Denver via I-70 if you have an extra day.

An easy, 40-minute day trip from Denver where you can embark on one of the Boulder hiking trails to see the famous Flatirons up close. Or browse the shops at Pearl Street.

Colorado Springs

Made famous by the stunning Garden of the Gods, Pike’s Peak, and the Air Force Academy, Colorado Springs is another awesome stop. Done either for a night or as a day trip from Denver, there’s lots to see.

If you’re looking to splurge, consider staying at the famous Broadmoor Resort. Ideally add Coloraod Springs to your itinerary on the return from Leadville to skip I-70 traffic.

Great Sand Dunes National Park

Experience the largest sand dunes in the Americas at the Great Sand Dunes National Park. Seeing the monumental dunes with the Sangre de Cristo peaks towering in the background is quite a site. As the only dog-friendly national park in Colorado, it’s fun for fido too!

Add this leg to the trip after the Black Canyon of the Gunnison.

Other Colorado Trip Ideas

Planning a big trip to colorado? Here are some local resources to help you plan:

• Best Free Camping Near Denver
• 29 of the Best Day Hikes Near Denver
• The Most Amazing Fall Hikes in Colorado

Enjoy your Colorado road trip with this iconic 4-day itinerary. Travel like a local with this insider’s itinerary.

Meg Atteberry

Meg is a long-time Colorado local and outdoor industry professional. She's spent the last 15 years hiking, climbing, mountaineering, and canyoneering all over Colorado, Utah, Arizona, and Nevada in search of the best views. She's written for Outside Magazine, REI, Backpacker Magazine, and appeared on the Weather Channel.

Let’s connect!

Meg aka Fox is a 30-something who's born to explore. Toddler mom, queer, and neuro-spicy her favorite things to do are climb in the alpine and camp in the desert. Her mission is to get you out on your greatest adventure.

Machu Picchu 4 Days Tour Package: Prices & Itinerary

Cusco - sacred valley - machu picchu, machu picchu 4-day tour.

• Description

Tour Description

The best way to enjoy the Sacred Valley and Machu Picchu is through our Machu Picchu 4-day tour package. Ideal for those who wish to discover the heart of the Andes and have just a few days. Pisac, Ollantaytambo and Machu Picchu are on the menu. Come and explore the best of Peru with this special tour program.

Tour Information

Cusco, peru.

Availability

All Year Long

Customizable

Tour Program

Day 1: arrival in cusco.

Cusco is located at 3400 (11200 feet) meters above sea level Upon your arrival, a representative from the Machu Picchu Explorer travel agency will be awaiting you to transfer you to your hotel. Cusco, also known as the "bellybutton of the world" is a charming place. You will be able to get to experience its architectural beauty, its traditional neighborhoods, the beautiful Plaza de Armas (its main square), as well as its various gastronomical delights. Cusco's main points of interests are the Cathedral, the Temple of the Sun (known as the Qoricancha), the San Blas district and San Pedro market among many others. We recommend that you take the first day to rest and become acclimated to the altitude. Night in Cusco.

Day 2: Cusco - Sacred Valley - Aguas Calientes

The Sacred Valley lies at 2800 meters above sea level (9,190 meters) Aguas Calientes lies at 2040 meters above sea level. (6,690 feet) Travel time between Ollantaytambo and Aguas Calientes: 1 hour 40 min by train. Today we will explore the Sacred Valley of the Incas, an enigmatic place whose beautiful lands and gorgeous landscapes were intelligently taken advantage of by the ancient Peruvian people. Our first visit will be to Pisac, a greatly important archaeological site whose shape and construction are inspired by a local bird (the Puna partridge). Straight away, we will visit the local market, famous for its original products. In the afternoon, we will go on towards Ollantaytambo, a place that clearly shows how the Incans designed their cities with narrow streets and lovely canals, all in harmony with its natural environment. We will then visit the fortress of Ollantaytambo with its spectacular Incan terraces that will take our breath away, not to mention the spectacular views of the Sacred Valley from them! At the end of the afternoon, we will board the train to our next stop, the town of Aguas Calientes. Night in Aguas Calientes.

Day 3: Machu Picchu

This will be a memorable day during your visit in Peru, given that you will see one of the Wonders of the World that all travelers dream of visiting, we mean the historical sanctuary of Machu Picchu. Early in the morning, our professional guide will pick you up from your hotel to board the bus to the Machu Picchu citadel (20 min trip). Once in Machu Picchu, you will visit the farming and urban zones, as well as its main temples. The tour will take about two hours, after which you will have time to explore the ancient city on your own as well as take additional photographs. In the afternoon, we will return to Cusco on a comfortable train. Night in Cusco.

Day 4: Cusco - Lima

Last day in Cusco! Ideal for doing some additional shopping as well as visiting other points of interest. After experiencing this authentic journey through the Inca's land, we will accompany you to the airport to board your flight.

Hotel 3-Star

2 nights of accommodation in Cusco and breakfast.

1 night of accommodation in Aguas Calientes and breakfast.

Tour Sacred Valley: Tour guide + transportation + Lunch.

Tour in Machu Picchu: Tour guide.

Bus Aguas Calientes - Machu Picchu - Aguas Calientes

Train Ollantaytambo - Aguas Calientes.

Train Aguas Calientes – Ollantaytambo/Poroy station.

Entrance fee at all sites.

Transfer in from Airport to the Hotel in Cusco.

Transfer from train station to the Hotel in Cusco.

Transfer out from Hotel to the Airport in Cusco.

Frequent Asked Questions

What's the weather like in cusco.

In the Andes, temperature changes too much between night and day. During the rainy season (November-March) we have cloudy days with rain at night. On the other hand, during the dry season (May-September) you can expect very cold nights and warm sunny days.

What should I bring for my trip to Peru?

If coming to Peru, make sure to bring proper clothing. We suggest sunglasses, a sun hat, a polar, gloves, and comfortable shoes for walking. If coming during the rainy season, a raincoat is highly recommended.

What is the best time to visit Machu Picchu?

We suggest booking your trip from April to September, since sunny and warm days are common during this period. On the other hand, if coming during the rainy season, you'll likely have less crowds than in the peak season.

How can I book the Huayna Picchu Mountain?

We can add the Huayna Picchu hike to your package as long as there's availibility. We recommend that you contact us at least 3 months before your arrival. To have more details, check our blog post regarding the Huayna Picchu Mountain hike.

What trains are available?

The train included in the package is the Expedition by Peru Rail. However, we can upgrade your train service upon request. Other trains are the Vistadome, the Voyager, the 360°, Hiram Bingham, etc.

What are the hotels like?

We work with 3-star hotels that guarantee a great service (breakfast included, WiFi, heater, 24hrs front-desk, safe, etc.) and are well located in the center of Cusco. To custom your accommodation, don't hesitate to drop us a message.

Is this package safe for children?

We recommend this tour package for children and families since it's easy and safe. All places have easy access and all facilities for visitors. Children have discounts on many sites, so feel free to contact us and get your quotation.

How long in advance should I book?

To guarantee all services, we recommend that you book your package at least 3 months in advance. Last minute bookings are also possible, but subject to availability.

What is the payment method?

Booking your package is very easy and safe. First, get in touch with us. Next, we'll reply with a confirmation. After you validate the program, we'll send you a link for the payment. All payments are online with your credit card.

Need Assistance?

For any questions, don't hesitate to contact us.

Explore More Destinations

Peru has lots of places that you can explore. From the coast to the andes, there's charm all around.

• Skip to right header navigation
• Skip to main content
• Skip to secondary navigation
• Skip to primary sidebar

Learn how to easily plan your dream trip to Iceland with helpful guides and tips!

The Ultimate 4 Days In Iceland Itinerary

May 30, 2021 //  by  Iceland Trippers //   14 Comments

Planning to spend 4 days in Iceland and looking for the perfect itinerary? We’ve got you covered. Despite being a small country, Iceland has an incredible amount of beauty and adventure to offer.

The island is one stunning natural wonder after the next. Even your drive from one place to the next will have you staring out the window in awe.

Exploring Iceland in a long weekend will allow you the time to cover some of the country’s most extraordinary sites, while still leaving you with plenty to keep you coming back for more.

Planning your trip to Iceland last minute?

Make sure to book your hotels and tours in Iceland in advance to ensure availability! The longer you wait, the more difficult it gets. Here are my top picks for your trip :

Top Experiences And Tours In Iceland:

• Golden Circle Full Day Tour From Reykjavik (Likely to sell out!)
• Silfra Snorkeling Tour (Includes photos + only small group)
• South Of Iceland Full Day Trip (Our pick!)
• Whale Watching In Reykjavik (On a luxury yacht)
• Northern Lights Bus Tour (Great to go with a local)
• Ice Cave Tour And Glacier Hike (Likely to sell out)

Tickets You MUST book in advance:

• Keflavik > Reykjavik Bus Airport Transfer (Skip the line!)
• Sky Lagoon Entrance Ticket (Includes 7-step spa ritual)
• Blue Lagoon Entry Ticket With Drink (Likely to sell out!)

Top picks for places to stay in Iceland:

• Hotel South Coast (Great central location)
• Grandi Reykjavik (Includes free breakfast)
• Hotel Kria (Close to black sand beach)
• Hotel Skaftafell (Mid-range price)

Our Iceland itinerary will have you visiting thundering waterfalls, brilliant white icebergs, black sand beaches, and canyons that look like something out of a fairytale. Iceland’s landscape is incredibly diverse making each stop unique and fascinating.

No matter what time of year you are visiting you’ll have more than enough activities to keep you busy.  Feel free to alter this Iceland itinerary as you see fit given your own time constraints and energy levels. Get a FREE printable “Hidden Gems In Iceland” E-book by joining our private  Iceland Facebook Group  and share your photos and ask for tips and tricks.

We definitely recommend renting a car for your 4 days in Iceland. It is possible to book tours that will take you to a number of stops on this itinerary, however in order to complete this itinerary in full or adjust your schedule as you see fit, most people find a car is the ideal option for getting around the country. This will allow you the chance to explore Iceland’s natural beauty on your own terms.

Driving in Iceland is not cheap, but we guarantee it will enhance your overall trip experience. Do take note, that unlike in the United States, many of the rental cars have a manual transmission, so if you don’t know how to drive a manual car, double check to make sure your rental car has an automatic transmission!

We’ve been to Iceland many times and are very fond of the country. The information you’ll find in this Iceland itinerary is the information we wish we had on our first visit to the land of fire and ice. We hope our past experiences will help make planning your trip a little easier!

4 Days In Iceland Map:

If you’re more of a visual person, we’ve provided this road trip map for your 4 days in Iceland below so it’s easier for you to see where each stop is located. For the driving route, check out the link to the map. This map will show you an idea of where all of the stops are along this route!

Click Here For Iceland in 4 Days Map

Day 1: Begin Your 4 Days In Iceland In And Around The Capital City

Stop 1: soak in a natural river at reykjadalur hot springs.

After a long flight and drive from Keflavik to Reykjavik, there’s no better way to start your trip than stretching your legs and getting your blood pumping on a beautiful hike. If you’ve ever wanted to bathe in a hot river in the middle of nature, you’ll be excited that the Reykjadalur Hot Springs is the first stop on your Iceland itinerary.

No matter what time of year you are visiting Iceland, bring a swimsuit! Understandably, it does seem counterintuitive to bring a swimsuit to a country called Iceland, but we guarantee you won’t regret having one handy.

Located in South Iceland, just 45 minutes from Reykjavik, Reykjadalur Hot Springs is the perfect quick nature escape from the capital. The hike to the hot springs is roughly 45 minutes-1 hour, and is easy to moderately difficult. The hike starts with a relatively steep uphill climb before leveling out.

The path is well maintained and clearly marked. Your hike will take you through a valley filled with steam, past a cascading waterfall and many grazing sheep.

As you approach the hot springs you’ll be greeted with the distinct smell of rotten eggs, which is attributed to the sulfur in the boiling water surrounding the hot springs. The boiling water is mesmerizing, but don’t touch it. The real prize is waiting for you, just mere steps away.

When you reach the part of the river that is safe for bathing, you can change on a wood platform with partitions. Privacy is lacking, but no one cares. Everyone is there to relax and have a good time.

Find your perfect spot in the river and enjoy bathing while the sheep suntan 10 yards away. The best spots in the river are right up against the rock piles dividing the river into sections. There you’ll find the deepest pockets of water.

In summer, the water in this section of the river resembles that of a Jacuzzi and is perfect for bathing. As the weather gets colder, you may need to hike a little further upriver to find a spot warm enough to enjoy for extended periods of time.

Arrive in the early morning or late evening (when you can enjoy the midnight sun in the summer) to avoid the biggest crowds. There is nothing quite like bathing in a river surrounded by stunning nature, and you’ll no doubt be glad you made this stop to kick off your 4 days in Iceland.

This is one of the best stops around Iceland’s Ring Road . If you happen to be driving in Iceland , you will want to ensure that you make time to see it! 

Stop 2: Downtown Reykjavik

Now that you’ve had a taste of Iceland’s natural outdoor beauty, we suggest taking a walk around downtown Reykjavik to explore the colorful capital. Laugavegur is the main shopping street downtown filled with shops, café’s, restaurants, galleries, etc. You can do anything from buying Icelandic wool sweaters to enjoying a delicious cup of coffee on this street.

Laugavegur along with Bankastræti and Austurstræti streets will take care of your shopping needs. There are also a number of wonderful museums in and around Reykjavik including Perlan, the former water towers turned observation deck and “Wonders of Iceland” museum, the Reykjavik Maritime Museum along the harbor, the underground Settlement Exhibition with an excavated longhouse, and the Arbær Open Air Museum where you’ll find preserved old Icelandic buildings with sod roofs.

A day in downtown Reykjavik would be incomplete without a visit to the iconic Hallgrimskirkja Church, designed by architect Gudjón Samúelsson with an outside meant to resemble the basalt columns found in Iceland’s nature. It’s the tallest building in downtown Reykjavik and as a result is very difficult to miss. The area in front of the church is dominated by a statue of the famous Leifur Eiriksson, the first European to set foot in North America even before Christopher Columbus.

The inside of the church is minimalistic in design and not particularly grand, though the large pipe organ inside is eye-catching. The real draw of the church however is the spectacular 360 views you’ll find at the tower up top.

Entrance to the church alone is free, but admission to the tower is 1000 ISK per person. Once you pay at the church shop you’ll take an elevator up to the tower where you can take your time enjoying the views over all of Reykjavik and beyond.

Another stop you’ll want to make while in Reykjavik is to the Harpa Concert Hall, the beautiful concert venue downtown with 714 honeycomb-like glass panels that light up at night. Like Hallgrimskirkja, the design was meant to resemble basalt columns. The site is somewhat controversial as it was an expensive project completed shortly after the 2008 financial crisis with money that many people felt should have been invested elsewhere.

Whether or not its completion was warranted, it stands today as an architectural beauty, recipient of the Mies Van der Rohe award for architecture and home to festivals, concerts of all music genres, conferences and more. Even if there are no concerts happening during your visit, it’s worth wandering the impressive building to admire the architectural work.

For those with a sweet tooth we’ve got a couple of locations you won’t regret visiting. The first is the Brauð & Co. bakery where you’ll delight in the most delicious pastries. The cinnamon and vanilla rolls and chocolate croissants are particularly fantastic and addicting.

The name of the bakery is not well marked on the building, but the outside is very distinguishable with its colorful street art, and the smells waft down the street so it can’t be missed! Our other suggestion is Valdis ice cream. The idea of eating ice cream in a cold climate can sound strange and yet Icelanders absolutely love their ice cream all year round.

This is a tried and true favorite of both locals and visitors alike. There are a large variety of flavors that are constantly changing. It’s hard to go wrong with this delicious ice cream.

Stop 3: Relax In The Hot Tubs At The Local Swimming Pool

Every town in Iceland has at least one swimming pool complex (Reykjavik has many), and there’s no better way to finish off an adventurous day than with a soak in one or all of the multiple hot tubs of differing temperatures. This is the perfect way to spend one of your four days in Iceland!

There are a couple things you should know about the public swimming pools. After you pay to use the pools (1030 ISK for adults), you’ll leave your shoes outside the locker room on a shoe rack.

You’ll be given a wristband or key to lock your individual locker. When you enter the locker room, don’t be alarmed if everyone is naked. In fact it’s a requirement that you shower naked before putting on your bathing suit and getting in the pool.

In Iceland, it’s entirely normal, and no one is paying attention to you anyway, so there’s no need to feel self-conscious. Most of the showers are communal, but if you’d feel more comfortable with some privacy there are sometimes a handful of shower stalls with doors. When returning from the pool you also have to dry yourself completely after showering before you can enter the locker room area.

We suggest heading to Laugardalslaug, the largest of Reykjavik’s pool complexes located right next to Iceland’s National Soccer Team Stadium. This complex is made up of an indoor pool, an Olympic sized heated outdoor pool, a kiddie pool with a slide, hot tubs of varying temperatures (38°C, 42°C, and 44°C) as well as a salt water hot tub. For those daring souls perhaps trying to recover from aches and pains, there is a cold tub as well, though as you might expect, it gets far fewer visitors.

This pool complex is a favorite of locals and tourists at all times of the year. And in the winter, there’s nothing quite like sitting in a steaming hot tub, surrounded by snow while reflecting on the adventures of your day.

Stop 4: Try To Catch A Glimpse Of The Elusive Northern Lights

If you’re visiting Iceland in the winter, we highly suggest driving out of town to try to see the lights or paying for a tour. The Northern Lights have the potential to be seen from September-April. A strong Northern Lights show makes your heart want to leap out of your chest with excitement, but the Northern Lights are inconsistent and elusive.

One minute the sky is dancing in brilliant hues of green and purple, and the next, clouds are obscuring anything and everything in the sky. In Iceland, there’s precipitation approximately 300 days a year on average, meaning the sky is more often than not cloudy or at least slightly overcast.

This makes the northern lights search particularly frustrating when you know there’s solar activity, but the lights are hidden behind clouds. Sometimes patience wins out, and the clouds will part long enough for you to see the lights; sometimes it never clears, and you’re just out of luck.

If you’re hoping to maximize your chances of seeing the Northern Lights, you have two options. Your first is paying to take a guided Northern Lights Tour . These tour guides are extremely knowledgeable and seek out the Northern Lights for a living, so they know the best places to wait and watch.

Remember though, nature is the only one in control of the Northern Lights, so even with a guide there is no guarantee you’ll see the lights. If you don’t see the lights on your first trip, most tour companies allow you to rebook a second trip at no extra charge.

The other option is to take your car, drive away from the city lights and search for the lights yourself. Dark, clear skies give you the best chance of seeing the lights so the longest nights of the year will give you the highest percentage of both.

You can track the aurora strength and visibility yourself, and you can continue to check it throughout the night as it continuously updates. The Northern Lights are a remarkable sight and worth taking a chance on!

Where to stay in Reykjavik:

Affordable: Hotel Klettur  Check rates: Booking.com

Mid-range: Fosshotel Reykjavik  Check rates: Booking.com

Luxury: Hotel Borg  Check rates: Booking.com

Day 2: Explore The Waterfalls Along Iceland’s South Coast

Stop 1: hrunalaug hot springs.

Hrunalaug is one of the many fantastic natural hot springs in Iceland, perfect for bathing and relaxing. Everything about this spot and its surrounding nature is picturesque and ideal, however recent surges in tourism and visits to the sites by large tour buses have worn down the site to the point where the owner considered bulldozing the whole thing down. The natural hot spring was built up to accommodate humans, but it remains very small and is not designed for large groups of people.

A small little turf hut acts as a changing room. Behind the hut is a small two-person rectangular hot pot that is designed almost more like a bathtub. To the left of the changing room as you face it is a slightly larger pot, but even that only holds perhaps 8-10 people.

As a result of the limited space, early morning and late evening is the best time to visit the natural hot spring to avoid the biggest crowds. The hot pot is also particularly popular because it is known to maintain a comfortable water temperature all year long. It is the perfect stop when spending 4 nights in Iceland!

If you’re fortunate enough to get one of the coveted spots in the hot spring, you’re in for an incredibly enjoyable experience soaking up the welcome heat of the water while gazing out at the undeniable natural beauty around you. 

We cannot express the importance of keeping this location clean, being respectful and picking up after yourself. For the most part, the changing hut and pools are clean and well maintained mostly thanks to the owner who comes by now and then to see to its upkeep. But as we mentioned, this wonderful natural hot spring is at risk of being shut down for good, so please play your part in preserving it so it can remain for future visitors to enjoy.

Stop 2: Visit The Þjóðveldisbærinn Saga-Age Farm

Have you ever wanted to learn more about how the Vikings lived? Well now is your chance at the Þjóðveldisbærinn Saga-Age farm, an impressive replica of Stöng, the excavated manor farm in Þjórsárdalur. You might find their buildings to be more charming and majestic than you had expected.

The reconstructed Settlement farm was built in honor of the 1100th anniversary of the Settlement of Iceland and opened in 1977. The idea was to provide an example of a medieval Icelandic farm, and it was thought a replica of Stöng would be the best representation of a farm from that time period.

Stöng was located dangerously close to the volcano Hekla. It is thought that the farm and the rest of the surrounding settlement was destroyed and abandoned after the 1104 Hekla eruption, however, Hekla also erupted many other times in later years, so the exact time of its final destruction and abandonment is unclear. Despite being covered in white volcanic ash, the remains of Stöng underneath were remarkably well preserved.

The farm was reconstructed with much love and care in an attempt to get every detail both on the interior and exterior exact and preserve an important piece of Icelandic history. Of course, without a full original to copy, there are aspects of the reconstructed work that had to be imagined, estimated, or pulled from story and folklore, but by all accounts, the finished result is remarkably accurate. You won’t regret immersing yourself in this fascinating piece of history when seeing Iceland in 4 days!

Stop 3: Admire One Of The Highest Waterfalls In Iceland At Haifoss

Right on the edge of the highlands in South Iceland sits Haifoss, an impressive 400-foot waterfall. It is one of the highest waterfalls in Iceland. Haifoss thunders down right next to its partner waterfall, Granni (which translates to neighbor).

Though Granni’s flow is slightly less powerful, the two waterfalls side by side are a sight to behold. Haifoss by itself eclipses most other waterfalls you’ll see in your lifetime. The two waterfalls are located in a gorge created by the Fossa River.

It is possible to hike down to the falls if you’re spending a significant amount of your day at the waterfall and its surrounding valley, but the view from the top is incredible, and easily accessible from the parking lot. From the parking lot, you can walk along the edge of the gorge taking in the waterfalls from multiple viewing points which is the perfect thing to do with 4 days in Iceland!

In the winter, Haifoss is usually inaccessible unless you are driving there in buses or jeeps designed for winter weather and icy gravel roads. Don’t attempt the drive unless you are in an appropriate vehicle. Even in summer, the gravel roads are rocky and full of potholes and require slow driving and patience.

Because of its distance from the more popular Golden Circle stops along the South Coast, and the rockiness of the road, the gorge is never crowded, and there’s always plenty of time and room to take pictures and take in the waterfalls in all their glory. If you can brave the drive to get there, the view at the end of the road is unforgettable, and you won’t regret making the drive, however bumpy.

Stop 4: Relax In The Hidden Oasis of Gjain

Gjain is a stunning valley that you won’t want to miss during your 4 days in Iceland, particularly in the summertime when the vegetation is at its peak. The valley truly comes alive with beauty. It’s full of a whole collection of small waterfalls, brilliant blue pools of water, carved out shallow caves, green growth of all kinds, flowers and birdlife.

When the weather is nice it’s the perfect place to bring a blanket and have a picnic. Because it’s a valley it feels very private and secluded giving you a welcome peace and quiet to your experience. It becomes your own little slice of paradise.

You’ll hardly ever find crowds here as it’s off the main road and not a stop that general tour buses make. The valley is beautiful at other times of year as well but it can just become harder or impossible to reach in the winter as the roads and paths turn icy.

Getting to Gjain is fairly straightforward from Haifoss. You’ll continue back down the road the way you came then turn right when you reach the fork in the road instead of heading all the way back to road No. 32.

To reach both Gjain and Haifoss it’s recommended you have a 4×4 with ground clearance because of the bumpy roads. The drive itself isn’t anything particularly spectacular as you pass through expanses of lava fields and rock, but it makes arriving at this hidden oasis even more spectacular and magical. It is a must see when visiting Iceland in 4 days!

Stop 5: Walk Behind A Thundering Waterfall At Seljalandsfoss

Seljalandsfoss, a 200-foot waterfall, is right off the Route 1 (Ring Road) on the South Coast of Iceland. There is no hiking required to see this waterfall. This is one of the most famous Waterfalls In Iceland! It is the perfect stop when spending 4 days in Iceland because there are multiple waterfalls nearby!

It is just a short walk from the parking lot, and it can even be seen from farther away as you drive up to it along the Ring Road. Though Iceland is graced with an endless display of stunning waterfalls, Seljalandsfoss’s unique quality is that it is possible to walk behind the waterfall.

A path leads from the parking lot up to the front of the waterfall and then loops around the sides and back so you get a view of the waterfall from every angle. We suggest wearing raingear, as you’ll likely get wet, particularly on a windy day.

With a waterfall as powerful as Seljalandsfoss, the spray is far-reaching. It is entirely worth walking the loop though, and being that up close and personal makes you appreciate the sheer size and power of the waterfall.

Seljalandsfoss is fed by the famed glacier-capped volcano Eyjafjallajokull that erupted in 2010 disrupting air traffic across Europe. The waterfall is relatively narrow, but its power is mighty as is evident when standing behind it inside the cave in the cliff. In the summer, the cliff and ground surrounding Seljalandsfoss are a brilliant green, and everything is dotted with yellow wildflowers creating a colorfully picturesque landscape.

Though the path gets wet, particularly on the backside of the waterfall, it is a well-marked path, and easy to navigate. In the winter, when the snow turns to ice and the path gets slippery, the path is often partially closed off. This is for your own safety.

Don’t try and circumvent the restricted area. Though closures may alter your experience, it isn’t lessened.

Seljalandsfoss is beautiful even in winter. For much of the winter, everything is coated in white, and the impressive waterfall becomes part of a winter wonderland. No matter when you visit, this waterfall should top your 4 day trip to Iceland!

Stop 6: Find Seljalandsfoss’ Hidden Neighbor Gljufrabui

Gljufrabui is often overlooked as it is slightly hidden and is smaller than its towering neighbor, Seljalandsfoss. However, we suggest that anyone completing this 4 day Iceland itinerary should take some time to explore this hidden gem as well. Why not when it’s right next door!

Gljufrabui is within walking distance of Seljalandsfoss. When you finish your loop around Seljalandsfoss, head to the right (if you’re facing the parking lot), and walk until you hit the campground.

On your right will be a sign for the waterfall, and you’ll see a cavern with a river running through it. To get to the waterfall you’ll have to walk through the river, so be prepared with waterproof boots or a change of shoes.

Oftentimes the river rocks will rise out of the water just enough for you to step from rock to rock and avoid getting anything more than the soles of your boots wet. After heavy rain though, the water level rises and it becomes a bit trickier to maneuver your way into the cavern. Once inside the cavern, you’ll be greeted with a beautiful waterfall that looks as if it’s pouring through a skylight in nature’s ceiling.

The sun lights up the cavern, illuminating the green, mossy walls and highlighting the streaming, crystal clear water. There’s a giant boulder in the middle of the cavern, which is easy to climb and perfect for taking pictures.

When you’re done you’ll exit the cavern that same way you came in. Just be careful to wait your turn and make sure no one is on the rocks trying to enter the cavern at the same time.

It’s also possible to view the waterfall from above, looking down on the waterfall from the skylight opening. The pathway up the hill though is steep.

Particularly after it rains the path becomes muddy and slippery, so if you go this way, use caution. Though the waterfall is of course still beautiful when viewed from above, the best view is from inside the cavern where you’re surrounded and almost consumed by your natural surroundings.

Stop 7: Climb To The Top Of The Impressive Skogafoss Waterfall

Skogafoss is just a 25-minute drive from Seljalandsfoss and Gljufrabui. It is also visible from the road and is easily accessible from the parking lot. At 197 feet, Skogafoss is roughly the same height as Seljalandsfoss but its width is an impressive 82 feet.

This is our favorite waterfall in Iceland, and a trip hasn’t begun until we see this site! It is truly the best!

The Skoga River flows along a wide pebbled path leading right up to the waterfall. The path is flat and easy to walk. The waterfall is forceful, and you will get unrelentingly sprayed as you approach it from its base, so you’ll want to consider wearing water resistant clothing.

But the feeling of standing that close to such a powerful force of nature is incredible. You might even see a rainbow on a sunny day, adding its finishing touch on an already stunning waterfall.

After you’ve spent some time appreciating the enormity of the waterfall from its base, you can climb the steps to view the waterfall from above. There are a little over 500 stairs to the top of the waterfall. It is definitely a quadricep workout, but the view is worth it.

From the viewing platform, you can see the Skoga River which flows to the top of the waterfall before plummeting over the edge. This is a much less photographed view of Skogafoss, but it’s still remarkable.

After spending some time viewing the waterfall from above, most people head back down the staircase to the parking lot. However, there is a hiking trail that follows the Skoga River back into the valley, and it’s filled with additional waterfalls if you’re up for a long, extended day hike. Assuming you’re returning to the parking lot, you’ll turn back to face the staircase and be greeted with a beautiful, sprawling view of South Iceland below.

Stop 8: Walk To The Secluded, Picturesque Kvernufoss Waterfall

Right next door to Skogafoss is the waterfall Kvernufoss. Kvernufoss is one of South Iceland’s less frequented gems. Fewer tourists know of its existence, but it’s certainly not lacking in beauty.

To get to Kvernufoss, you’ll take the same exit off the Ring Road as you would to get to Skogafoss, but instead of following the signs to the left for Skogafoss, continue straight down Skogar to the end of the road and turn right. You’ll park near Hotel Edda and walk the rest of the way into the valley. In the summer, it takes about 10-15 minutes to reach the waterfall.

The walk is comfortable, requiring very little in the way of elevation hiking or rocky terrain. From the hotel you’ll climb a short ladder over a fence and make your way back into the valley where the path is clearly marked. You might even run into a few Icelandic horses grazing by the river.

The waterfall itself is similar in looks to its neighbor, Seljalandsfoss. You can even walk behind it too! This is one of our favorite hidden gems to visit with 4 days in Iceland as it is so close to other waterfalls!

The whole valley is beautiful. It’s green and lush in summer, and sparkling white in winter. Best of all, it’s not overcrowded with tourists at any time of year. 

Though the path is easily navigated in the summer months, in the winter, it is often covered in ice and can be dangerous. Bring crampons to stabilize your feet on the slippery ground and exercise caution. It might be best to view the waterfall from farther away.

Where to stay in/near Vík:

Affordable/Mid-range: Þ akgil Campground . Check rates: thakgil.is

Mid-range: The Garage Apartments . Check rates: Booking.com

Luxury: Hotel Kria . Check rates: Booking.com

We have an entire article about Where To Stay In Vik Iceland so if you are searching, this is the place to check out even more detailed suggestions! 

Day 3: Black Sand Beaches And Plane Wrecks

Stop 1: explore the eerie remains from the solheimasandur plane wreck.

This popular tourist destination is the result of a DC-3 US navy plane running out of fuel and crashing on Solheimasandur Beach in 1973. Fortunately everyone survived, but the body of the plane was abandoned. The white wreckage of the plane lies in sharp contrast with the black sand of the beach, and together they make for hauntingly beautiful photographs.

There is a designated parking lot for visitors to the plane wreck located right along the Ring Road just 10 minutes down the coast from Skogafoss. Though at one time you could drive right up to the plane wreck you now have to walk 2 miles from the parking lot.

The path is flat and relatively easy, but will take you roughly 45 minutes to 1 hour each way. There is very little to see besides vast expanses of rocks and black sand, and on a windy day the walk can be particularly frustrating, as you have to fight the wind resistance as well.

If there is one thing to skip on your 4 days in Iceland, this would be it, as it takes quite a bit of time to go see! It is still epic, but if you are looking to save time, this is what we suggest cutting out!

The plane doesn’t come into sight until the end of your walk. Get your camera ready, and be prepared to photograph the wreckage. There are a lot of tourists and slim windows for getting pictures without other people in them.

So bring a friend and catch up on life as you hike to this unique, beautiful wreckage stranded in the middle of the beach. If you’re willing to power through the walk, it’s worth the trip.

Recently a shuttle bus has been provided to the plane for 2500 ISK round trip or 1500 ISK one way giving you roughly an hour to explore the wreck before you head back if you choose the round trip ticket. This is a fairly new development however that is still being tested out, so don’t depend on it being a reliable mode of transportation on your trip. As we said, if you’re willing and able (and the weather isn’t too bad), walking to the wreck can actually be quite enjoyable. 

Stop 2: Climb The Basalt Columns At Reynisfjara Black Sand Beach

One of the most famous stops on your 4 days in Iceland itinerary is Reynisfjara Beach, known for its signature black sand and towering basalt columns. This beach is among Iceland’s most impressive black sand beaches, and was even featured in the TV show Game of Thrones .

There are so many incredible spots along the beach to enjoy. However you should be aware that the beach is developing a reputation for its large sleeper waves. So take your pictures, but be aware and don’t let your desire for the “perfect” photo affect your judgment.

The beach and its surrounding waters boast an impressive collection of rock formations including the cliff of basalt columns that seems to rise out of the sand. This is a prime photograph location and you’ll see many tourists climbing the uneven columns to pose for a picture.

When facing the roaring Atlantic Ocean, to the left are the Reynisdrangar rock formations. These pointy basalt pillars rise straight out of the ocean, like man-made sculptures in the water. To the right is the Dyrholaey rock formation, an arched bridge-like formation with a large hole in the bottom.

Stop 3: Mulagljufur Canyon

Mulagljufur Canyon is one of Iceland’s lesser-known canyons along the South Coast, but it is certainly a gem to see during your 4 days in Iceland! Once you reach the gravel parking area you’ll hike along a moderately difficult trail for roughly 1.5 miles to reach the canyon.

Wear sturdy, waterproof hiking boots. You will get wet crossing rivers and squelching through mud, but the views are more than worth it. Trekking to Mulagljufur is the perfect way to leave the South Coast crowds behind and marvel at the beauty that nature has created.

Though steep canyon walls and flowing rivers would be enough to draw anyone in, this canyon also offers a look at two beautiful waterfalls, Hangandifoss and Mulafoss. At 50m, Mulafoss is perhaps not the most impressive of the waterfalls you’ll experience along the South Coast, but it carries its own beauty streaming from the canyon walls.

Hangandifoss on the other hand is quite tall at 123m and paired with the imposing canyon walls, it would surely be a well-trafficked South Coast staple if it were more easily accessible and clearly marked. For now, be thankful it is neither as you’ll feel particularly special getting to appreciate the magnificence of the waterfall all on your own.

Stop 4: Fjallsarlon Glacier Lagoon

Though Fjallsarlon is smaller and less frequented than its neighbor Jokulsarlon, these are exactly the reasons that this glacier lagoon is magical. This lagoon is a must-see during your 4 days in Iceland, and if you could only pick one glacier lagoon, it should be this one!

You’ll find this gem on the south end of the Vatnajökull glacier (Europe’s biggest glacier outside of the Arctic) just 15 minutes down the road from Jokulsarlon, and yet many tourists don’t even know of its existence. You’re also unlikely to find the big tour buses here, meaning you’re free to absorb your natural surroundings in relative peace and quiet.

In the silence you can sit along the edge of the water and listen to the ice breaking and colliding as the scene slowly but constantly continues to shift. Though there’s still a lagoon separating you from the glacier, at Fjallsarlon your experience with the majestic, calving glacier is far more intimate.

Fjallsarlon is conveniently located right off the Ring Road just before you reach Jokulsarlon. Once you park you’ll have to walk a short distance to reach the edge of the water, but you’ll be face to face with sparkling icebergs in no time.

Because Fjallsarlon is smaller in size, you might find that standing on the shore and taking in the views is enough to give you a complete experience at the lagoon. If however you wish to get even closer, you can take a boat tour which will allow you to navigate through the icebergs on a small boat with a knowledgeable guide.  The actual time spent on the boat is roughly 45 minutes.

Stop 4: Watch The Floating Icebergs At Jokulsarlon Glacier Lagoon

Next up on your 4 days in Iceland itinerary is the Jokulsarlon Glacier Lagoon . This stop is so vastly different from anything else you’ll have seen along the rest of the coast. Located on the east part of the South Coast, Jokulsarlon is a stunning lagoon filled with floating icebergs.

The lagoon is ever-changing as the surrounding glacier continues to melt and new ice blocks fall. During the summer, you can take a boat tour through the lagoon and get an up close view of the icebergs.

All year long you can view the lagoon from the shore, walking along its edge to see the icebergs from varying angles. The enormous glacier looms large in the background.

Across the street is a black sand beach called Diamond Beach. It sets itself apart from other black sand beaches like Reynisfjara Beach, because the entire beach is covered in clear sparkling ice. Pieces of the icebergs floating in the glacier lagoon break off and wash ashore, scattering themselves around the beach. This is such a cool stop on your 4 day trip to Iceland!

The contrast of the black sand against the clear ice is striking and makes for some powerful photographs. The beach becomes even more fairytale-esque at sunset when the sky is painted yellow. As the day comes to a close you’ll be thrilled you continued your drive up the coast to this natural beauty. Don’t forget to check out our Ultimate Guide To Iceland’s Glacier Lagoon!

Where to stay in/near Hofn:

Affordable/Mid-range: Old Airline Guesthouse . Check rates: Booking.com

Mid-range: Glacier World-Hoffell Guesthouse . Check rates: Booking.com

Mid-range/Luxury: Dima Studio Apartments . Check rates: Booking.com

Day 4: Visit A Striking Mountain Before Driving Back To Reykjavik To End Your 4 Days In Iceland

Stop 1: marvel at the imposing vestrahorn mountain.

You’ll begin the last of your 4 days in Iceland with a trip to one of the country’s most striking mountains. Think jagged snow-capped mountains seemingly rising from the edge of the Atlantic Ocean surrounded by dunes of pitch-black sand spotted with tufts of brilliant green sea grass.

When the lupines are in bloom the scene is even more fantastic, adding various shades of purple to the mixture. It’s impressive and picturesque to say the least.

When a thin layer of water covers the beach you can see the reflection of the mountain and yourself as you appear to be walking on water. It makes for a truly stunning photograph. Be careful though as you photograph from the beach as the waves can sneak up on you if you’re not careful and they have the potential to be high and strong.

The mountain itself is called Vestrahorn or perhaps you might have heard it referred to by its nickname, Batman Mountain. You’ll find this mountain on the Stokksnes Peninsula roughly 10.5 miles east of Hofn where you’ll have spent the night the previous day. About half of that distance will be driven on the Ring Road before branching off on a gravel road.

Typing in Vestrahorn Mountain into your GPS will take you to the exact location. When you reach the Viking Café you’ll have to pay the 800 ISK entrance fee. The fee is well worth the sites you’ll see.

This is also the perfect spot to catch a dramatic sunrise or sunset as the brilliant colors light up the mountain. It’s also a great spot for Northern Lights viewing given the right weather conditions, because the sky is so dark out at the beach.

Stop 2: Walk The Edge Of the Magical Fjadrargljufur Canyon

As if you haven’t seen enough picturesque landscapes during the course of your 4 days in Iceland, the next stop on your Iceland itinerary is at the magical Fjadrargljufur Canyon. This impressive canyon was thought to be formed at the end of the last Ice Age by a glacial river that carried sediment with it ultimately creating a 100-meter deep slice through the earth. The whole canyon is lined with moss that is a vibrant green in the summer with flowers blooming in the spring and summer.

In the winter the landscape is sometimes covered in lacy snow making it a whole different kind of magical. You’ll have to be careful though and potentially bring crampons to make your way over icy patches in the winter. Even when there’s no snow and the moss is more of a brownish color, you can’t help but find beauty in the canyon anyway.

A river runs down the center and you might even spot a waterfall or two as you wander along. Walking the edge of the canyon is a breathtaking experience, but we implore you to please stay on the designated path. At various points along the designated path, you’ll find viewpoints, each with a view seemingly more beautiful than the last.

As long as the water level remains low, you also have the option of walking down to the base of the canyon along the water. If you choose this option you’ll definitely need waterproof shoes.

In 2015, Justin Bieber released the music video for his song “I’ll Show You” in which he was seen frolicking around various Iceland locations including Fjadrargljufur. This video brought a surge of attention to the small island, but not all of it was positive. The number of tourists visiting the canyon surged and many of the visitors, following in Justin Bieber’s footsteps, were not respectful of the fragile landscape of the canyon.

As a result, the vegetation and stability of the edge of the canyon were severely damaged. Eventually, the Icelandic Environment Agency closed the canyon to visitors in an attempt to reverse some of the damage, some of which will take decades to restore. It has also been closed down in the springtime when the ice and snowmelt make the path too muddy and dangerous.

For now, the canyon is again open to the public but will only continue to remain open if people respect the environment and let nature thrive. If the canyon happens to be closed during your visit, you’ll just continue the drive west back towards Keflavik to end your 4 day Iceland itinerary.

Stop 3: Visit The Blue Lagoon

To finish off your 4 days in Iceland with a bang, we’re recommending you go to the Blue Lagoon , one of Iceland’s most famous attractions/activities and a hot spot for tourists and even celebrities. Another reason why it’s crucial you pack your swimsuit for your 4 days in Iceland!

This stop is in a great area and actually on our list of Best Places To Stay In Iceland . In this post, we offer suggestions for where to stay around the Ring Road!

The Blue Lagoon is conveniently located in Grindavik, only 13.5 miles from the Keflavik International Airport, making it the perfect final stop on your Iceland itinerary before heading to catch your flight home. You’ll need to book well in advance on the Blue Lagoon website to guarantee a time slot due to a heavy increase in tourism. Despite the crowds and hefty prices, this is an experience that is definitely worthy of a visit at least once.

Contrary to popular belief, this geothermal slice of heaven is not actually a natural hot spring. Though Iceland is filled with natural hot pots, this particular lagoon is actually a man-made lagoon resulting from activity at the nearby geothermal power plant, Svartsengi.

Though that sounds less than glamorous, the water is truly wonderful, safe to enjoy and is renewed every 48 hours. In fact it might just be the most relaxing, healing experience you’ll have during your 4 days in Iceland.

Like the public swimming pool complexes you’ll be required to shower naked prior to entering the lagoon, however there are private shower stalls available. When you’re showered and ready to go, it’s time to enter the Blue Lagoon and bask in its glorious waters. It is possible to enter the lagoon from the inside and swim to the outside so you don’t have to brave the cold air walking to the water.

You should take note, that while the water is wonderful for your skin due to its mineral richness, it is terrible for your hair. It will very quickly dry out your hair so we suggest keeping it dry (and tied up if it’s long) or if you’re set on getting it wet, prepare to condition it like crazy afterwards.

We are not kidding, getting your hair wet here sucks!!! And it will take 3-4 washes to get your hair back to normal! How do we know? Because we have made that mistake before.

The temperature of the Blue Lagoon varies, but you can always find an area of the huge lagoon that’s a suitable temperature for you. It’s easy to spend hours relaxing in the water.

As tourism has expanded, so has the Blue Lagoon and all that it offers. There is a bar in the lagoon itself where you can buy drinks (both alcoholic and non-alcoholic) without having to get out of the water. They charge the amount to your wristband and you’ll pay on your way out.

There are also a number of restaurants on the property as well as additional spa experiences you can pay extra for. Though the Blue Lagoon welcomes an enormous number of tourists these days, you don’t feel cramped when in the lagoon. There’s plenty of space and the number of guests allowed in is limited.

This is definitely a pricey experience as the lowest entrance package is $55-$95 depending on the time of day you visit, and the price seems to be constantly rising as tourism increases. However there is no doubt you’re in for a wonderful time in these blue waters surrounded by natural lava and moss.

As we said before, it’s an experience we think you’ll want to have at least once in your life. And boy will you feel good on your plane ride home!

From the Blue Lagoon you’ll drive the relatively short distance to the Keflavik International Airport to catch your evening flight home. If you are not flying out until the next day, you have the option of driving back to Reykjavik to spend the night, or staying in Keflavik for a quick and easy drive to the airport in the morning.

Where to stay in Keflavik:

Affordable: A. Bernhard Guest House . Check rates: Booking.com

Mid-range: Hotel Jazz by Keflavik Airport . Check rates: Booking.com

Luxury: Hotel Berg by Keflavik Airport . Check rates: Booking.com

The Golden Circle And Why It Was Left Off Our Iceland Itinerary

If you’ve begun planning a trip to Iceland, you’ve likely heard of The Golden Circle , one of the most famous and heavily trafficked tourist routes in the country. This route includes the Thingvellir National Park, Gullfoss (the golden) Waterfall, and the Strokkur geyser with additional optional stops at places such as Kerið crater and the Secret Lagoon.

We’ve chosen to leave the Golden Circle off of our itinerary because of its heavy tourist crowds, and because there are equally if not more spectacular spots to explore throughout the rest of Iceland that are more peaceful and isolated.

That being said, the stops along the Golden Circle are still wonderful and probably exceed many other natural wonders you’ll see in your lifetime. Because of that we wanted to provide you with information on the Golden Circle and leave it up to you whether you want to include it and swap it out for other stops currently included in our Iceland itinerary. If you decide to include it, at the very least it can make for a great introduction to all that Iceland’s nature has to offer.

Thingvellir National Park is a UNESCO World Heritage Site where Iceland’s first parliament was formed back in 930 AD. It was conveniently accessible from all corners of the country by horse or foot. This is where the chieftains met to create and change the country’s laws.

Meetings continued to be held there until 1798. The parliament would later be moved to Reykjavik in 1844.

Thingvellir National Park is also the site of a giant rift valley, which marks the meeting of the North American and Eurasian tectonic plates. Between the impressive rift valley, unbelievably clear waters, and Oxararfoss waterfall, Thingvellir National Park is certainly a beautiful stop.

Your next stop will be Geyser, the geothermal hot spot. While the actual Geyser is no longer active, its neighbor, Strokkur still erupts at 5-7 minute intervals. Crowds of tourists gather around Strokkur in anticipation of its burst of water and steam shooting up into the air.

While the main attraction is the geyser, the surrounding landscape is full of pots of boiling water. As you might expect, the water would be dangerously hot to the touch, so steer clear and enjoy the natural phenomenon at a safe distance.

You’ll wrap up the three stops with Gullfoss Waterfall. In the summer months, it is common to see a rainbow arching over the waterfall, earning it the name Golden Waterfall.

Though Iceland spoils you with an abnormally large number of impressive waterfalls, Gullfoss is rightfully among the top. It’s an impressive sight at any time of year. The waterfall has both upper and lower viewing platforms, and we suggest spending some time at both.

Where to stay along the Golden Circle:

Affordable: Selfoss Hostel . Check rates: Booking.com

Mid-range: Icelandair Hotel Fludir . Check rates: Booking.com

Luxury: Ion Adventure Hotel . Check rates: Booking.com

We’re thrilled you’ve chosen to spend 4 days in Iceland, the enchanting land of fire and ice. We have no doubt you’ll leave Iceland with an abundance of unforgettable experiences and more fantastic pictures than you can count. We hope you find this Iceland itinerary to be helpful as you plan your trip, and encourage you to comment below with any questions or stories you might have of your own Iceland adventures.

Reader Interactions

June 6, 2021 at 10:06 pm

This 4 day drive trip looks amazing!!!!! I did your GOT in Ireland and that was amazing a couple of years ago. so driving this 4 day adventure works for me. Thank you you guys are awesome with . Going the end of June 2021.

June 7, 2021 at 4:05 am

OMG!!!!!! REALLY!!! That is so amazing to hear! The GOT trip is sooooo fun I am glad you loved it! Enjoy! You won’t regret this itinerary!

June 27, 2021 at 4:51 am

Hi, I stumbled onto your site and finds it very informative and very useful. Thank you! I assumed this 4 days itinerary is more suited for the summer months. If it’s winter months (late Nov/early Dec), which places of interests would you drop due to shorter day light hours?

Given a choice, which waterfall (Seljalandsfoss vs Skogass) is preferred?

June 28, 2021 at 3:23 am

Hello! So this itinerary can be done pretty much all year round!! The only trouble may be hiking to the hot spring river which is difficult in winter. The two waterfalls are within 15 min drive of each other so you don’t have to choose just one! you can EASILY do both!!!!

August 24, 2021 at 11:08 pm

Hello, thank you for providing such useful guides on Iceland. We’re headed there for 10 days next month and was thinking of doubling the time in this itinerary. Do you think it’s overkill or should we spend time elsewhere?

I’m worried that 10 days on the full ring road would be too rushed

August 27, 2021 at 8:24 pm

Hello! you could EASILY double the time of this itinerary! We stay near Skogafoss area for 4 days on our trips! And then an additional 2+ in glacier lagoon area! You can easily double it! If you wanted, you can add a trip to Westman Islands which is nearby and easily doable in 10 days OR you can ‎Visit Snaefellsnes Peninsula for a day or two which is still nearby! I totally approve doing this over 10 days!

February 14, 2022 at 11:12 pm

Hi planning for end of June early July for a 4 day trip as our day 1 we arrived late evening so definitely not counted. We would still like to do the golden circle though, do we do this at the start after Reykjavik? Thank you your itinerary is amazing .

February 15, 2022 at 7:14 pm

Hello!!!! so YES! You do this at the start after Reykjavik! That is my suggestion!!! Do that part on your first day when you get started and then continue with this itinerary! Cut out parts you don’t have time for!

May 16, 2022 at 2:16 pm

HI – great site and most informative. For the four day itinerary, did/would you overnight in one or two spots and do day trips. Or spend three/four nights in different places. I have three clear days after arriving and a half day before leaving. Thoughts?

May 30, 2022 at 7:50 pm

I would overnight in the Vik/south coast region!! Thank you!

June 3, 2022 at 2:50 am

We’ve never been to Iceland, so we are totally lost! Find this itinerary and it is so complete, we feel like just doing it! Only question, is how does this vary from the Golden Circle. Would you recommend this itinerary or the Golden Circle? What important stops would we miss if we do this versus the Golden Circle?

June 4, 2022 at 8:47 pm

Personally i do not like or suggest the golden circle, i highly suggest this much more! golden circle is alright, but very touristy, a lot of driving, and this just generally has more epic sites! you won’t regret skipping it, i promise!

June 2, 2023 at 8:59 pm

Hello! I would love to do this itinerary for January to celebrate my 50th birthday. I have been looking through the flights. If I leave late from Houston, I arrive early morning, but I do not know to what city I should come. Which would you suggest, and since it is winter which stops should I do? I most definitely want to see the Northern lights! But also like all the scenery you have suggested. I did notice your post was in 2021. Is it still this amazing?

June 3, 2023 at 1:55 pm

Hello! Yes this is still amazing! I have done this route twice in 2022, once including in winter! I think you should fly into Keflavik Airport which is the closest one to Reykjavik. And then you can do this itinerary or some version of it in winter! Most of these stops are doable in winter!

Leave a Reply Cancel reply

Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

Save my name, email, and website in this browser for the next time I comment.

The Ultimate 4 to 5 Days in Washington, DC Itinerary

Last Updated on January 29, 2024

by Audrey Webster

Disclaimer: This article contains affiliate links. That means if you click a link and make a purchase, we may make a small commission. As an Amazon Associate we earn from qualifying purchases. For more information, see our privacy policy.

Planning out a Washington DC itinerary can be a challenge when you consider all there is to see and do in the US capital. History aficionados will fall in love with Washington DC. There are few other places in the world that house so many museums and monuments from a single country’s history.

During your 4 or 5 days in Washington DC, you’ll have access to the Smithsonian’s iconic network of museums, historical monuments, and slices of history that you won’t easily find anywhere else.

Table of Contents

How Many Days in Washington, DC?

If you’re wondering how many days to spend in Washington DC, it can vary dramatically based on what you want to see. It’s a city that is loaded with activities that could keep you busy for several days.

You should plan to spend a minimum of 3 days in Washington DC. This will grant you ample time to catch the highlights at a leisurely pace. Even then, you’ll still have to prioritize what you see during your visit to the nation’s capital.

With 4 days in Washington DC, you have a little more time to see the museums and historical landmarks.

5 days in DC allows you to take a day trip to a nearby site like Arlington Cemetery, Mount Vernon, or somewhere even further. You can easily hop on the metro for a quick day trip out of the city itself.

You also could easily use this time to explore some of the other neighborhoods around DC, such as Dupont Circle or Georgetown.

Getting To & Around Washington, DC 

If you’re coming from far away, you’ll likely arrive in Washington DC by plane. There are three major airports: Dulles, Ronald Reagan, and Baltimore-Washington.

Visitors can use the metro to reach inner-city Washington DC from these airports. Alternatively, rideshare services and taxis are easily available and you can also book a transfer ahead of time.

DC is also well-connected via rail to a number of other cities on the East Coast, including New York, Boston , Philadelphia and even Providence. You can view train schedules here.

When getting around the city, take the metro. It’s clean, reliable, and reaches all the city’s main landmarks. That said, you should walk around the National Mall and Tidal Basin. You can easily reach most major monuments and museums just by walking around the National Mall.

The Tidal Basin offers its visitors a pleasant walk any time of day while getting to see iconic memorials and monuments. 

4 to 5-Day Washington DC Itinerary

For the days with two museums, we recommend visiting one in the morning and one in the afternoon after taking a lunch break. You can mix and match depending on your interest, but consider the highlights listed below to be the most highly recommended stops for your DC itinerary. 

Day 1 – White House, Tidal Basin, Memorials & More!

While the sites on the first day of this itinerary can be visited independently it is also possible to take several guided tours such as this bus tour , this bike tour or this evening tour if you want to see the monuments at night.

Washington Memorial and White House

We’ve added the White House and Washington Memorial to the top of your itinerary because they are can’t-miss sites in Washington DC. These two marble structures are iconic.

The Washington Monument stands at just over 555 ft tall. There is an observation deck at the top that grants visitors excellent views of the National Mall.

You can also book a tour of a portion of the White House to see some of the building’s most famous rooms. 

Lincoln Memorial

The Lincoln Memorial is a favorite monument for many first-time visitors to Washington DC. It’s the site of Martin Luther King Jr.’s “I Have a Dream” speech. Where he stood at the top of the monument’s stairs is marked by an engraving.

The reflecting pools before the monument make for an iconic Washington DC photo op. Make sure to check out the Lincoln Memorial at night too. The monument lit up is a stunning sight to see. 

Walk the Tidal Basin

Walking the Tidal Basin is an absolute must no matter what time of year you’re visiting, but the spring and fall are the most stunning.

Every spring the cherry blossom trees bloom casting the basin into a beautiful pink floral park. Here you’ll find the Jefferson Memorial, Franklin D. Roosevelt Memorial, and MLK Jr. Memorial.

You can rent paddle boats to explore the basin from the water. It’s a highlight of your Washington DC itinerary. 

Vietnam Veterans and Korean War Veterans Memorials

Continuing your walk of the National Mall, visit the Vietnam and Korean War Veterans Memorials. The Vietnam Veterans Memorial, also known as “the Wall”, is a long black granite wall with the names of 58,000 Americans who died in the Vietnam War. It’s a solemn and thought-provoking memorial.

Next, the Korean War Veterans Memorial pays homage to the over 1.5 million of soldiers who served. These 19 stainless steel statues march in a triangle formation toward an American flag. 

World War II Memorial

The World War II Memorial is a stunning white memorial dedicated to the 16 million Americans who served in World War II. It’s a circle of 56 columns that represent all U.S. states and territories around the Rainbow Pool.

Here is another memorial you want to make sure you visit after dark. At night, lights shine on the columns and from the pool making it an eye-catching site. 

Day 2  – Museum of Natural History, National Archives Museum & the US Capitol

Smithsonian national museum of natural history.

Perhaps one of the most iconic museums in the United States is the Smithsonian National Museum of Natural History. It’s an absolute must for all visitors to Washington DC.

The museum, part of the Smithsonian museum network, is an especially great stop for a Washington DC itinerary that includes children and they are free to enter.

There are over 147 million items on display that range from marine life to geology to ancient Egypt. You can spend anywhere from two hours to about half a day exploring this museum and there is no doubt that it is one of the best things to do in Washington DC. It is also possible to take a guided tour if you want to learn more from a guide.

If you’re more interested in American History, then consider visiting the adjacent Smithsonian National Museum of American History during this time instead. Here you can find exhibits that are important to the history of the USA and it’s a wonderful place to visit.

National Archives Museum

Where can you find the true Declaration of Independence, the American Constitution, the Bill of Rights, and the surviving copies of the Magna Carta all in one place? The National Archives Museum.

Make sure you reserve a timed slot in advance to avoid waiting in the long line at the entrance. Here is the only place where visitors can view the country’s founding documents. 

U.S. Capitol & the Library of Congress

The U.S. Capitol building is one of the most impressive working government buildings in Washington DC. With its towering white marble dome, it stands out in the National Mall. Inside, you can see where both houses of Congress reside.

Visitors can enter the capitol, but you must make a reservation in advance. You cannot visit the Capitol without a reserved tour – you can book a small group tour here.

Nearby you’ll find the Library of Congress. Here is where you’ll find hundreds of years’ worth of historical books and documents in a beautifully-designed building. 

Day 3 – Air and Space Museum & the Holocaust Memorial Museum

Smithsonian national air & space museum.

The Smithsonian’s Air & Space Museum is a treasure trove of the country’s most iconic advancements in air and space technology. Here you’ll find Amelia Earhart’s Lockheed Vega 5B, the Apollo 11 Command Module, the Wright Brothers’ 1903 Wright Flyer, and much more.

There is also an IMAX theater, Einstein Planetarium, and flight simulators to enjoy. You can easily spend several hours wandering the massive hanger filled with excellently-preserved planes. You can organise a guided tour here.

United States Holocaust Memorial Museum

Visiting the Holocaust Memorial Museum is a sobering experience. The stories of Holocaust survivors are told through film footage, photography, artefacts, and more. It tracks the rise of Hitler through propaganda and World War II.

There are several special exhibits–most advise a minimum age warning due to the graphic nature of the material on display. Portions of the museum have walls raised so young children cannot see over them.

It’s an informative and impressive museum that is well worth adding to your itinerary if you have 3 days in DC. 

Day 4 – Museum of African American History, National Gallery & the JFK Center

Smithsonian national museum of african american history.

If you’re seeing Washington DC in 4 days, you should mix and match your museums to make sure you see the ones you’re most interested in. However, ensure you visit the National Museum of African American History.

This museum is a relative newcomer to the National Mall, opening in 2016. It contains over 40,000 artefacts that trace the experiences and lives of African Americans from the country’s earliest years to present day.

The museum is expertly curated and you could easily spend half a day wandering its halls. If you want to learn more about African American history, you can take a half-day tour that includes some time in this museum.

National Gallery of Art

Art fans should prioritize a visit to the National Gallery of Art. There are two wings: the East Building which is home to modern art and the West Building home to classic art pieces. The collection is huge.

You could easily spend a couple hours or an entire day wandering between these two buildings. Don’t leave without visiting the rooftop where you’ll get great panoramic views of the city. You can organise a guided tour here.

Those traveling with children or who simply don’t want to visit more museums, then consider using this time to visit the Smithsonian National Zoological Park – also known as the National Zoo. Easily reached on public transport, this zoo is free to enter and you can see incredible animal exhibits – including Giant Pandas!

John F. Kennedy Center for the Performing Arts

From dance performances to musicals, the shows at the John F. Kennedy Center for the Performing Arts is an excellent way to spend an evening.

You’ll want to look at the schedule and reserve your tickets in advance. However, if you don’t have time to see a performance, visiting the center is still worth it.

There is a rooftop garden and bars that boasts incredible views of the National Mall. There is an art gallery and sculpture garden to explore as well. It’s a great addition to any trip to Washington DC.

Day 5 – Arlington National Cemetery, Rock Creek Park or Mount Vernon

Arlington national cemetery.

Located just across the Potomac River in Arlington, Virginia is one of the nation’s most famous cemeteries.

Arlington National Cemetery is about one square mile and houses the graves of over 400,000 service members as well as former presidents. Highlights include John F. Kennedy’s grave and the Tomb of the Unknown Soldier.

If time allows, you should watch the changing of the guard at the Tomb of the Unknown Soldier. This memorial is dedicated to all those who have lost their lives, but their bodies were never found or identified.

You can opt for a tour of Arlington Cemetery if you want to learn more about the memorials and gravesites. Arlington isn’t far from DC itself, so it’s easy to add on to a 4-day itinerary or if you’re seeing Washington DC in 5 days. 

Rock Creek Park

If you’ve had enough of being in the city, head to Rock Creek Park. Here you’ll find over 32 miles of hiking trails, tennis courts, biking paths, and a golf course. It’s a great way to spend a day or afternoon after spending a few days seeing as much of Washington DC as possible.

Should you want to explore the park further, pay a visit to the Nature Center, the Peirce Mill, and the Old Stone House. 

Mount Vernon

A visit to Mount Vernon is a step back in history. It’s the former home of the nation’s first president, George Washington.

Here you’ll find an immaculately preserved home, the tombs of George and Martha Washington, and a memorial dedicated to the enslaved people who worked on the property. Over 96 million people have visited Mount Vernon since it opened to the public in 1860. 

There are several options for getting to Mount Vernon. It’s located about 15 miles from Washington DC. You can take a guided tour bus , public bus, or Metrorail. If you have a rental car, parking is also available at Mount Vernon, but the lot fills up very quickly.

If you want the more scenic route, consider taking a boat along the Potomac River. Note that you will not be allowed on the property without a ticket – you can pre-book tickets here.

Where to Stay in Washington, DC

Phoenix Park Hotel – This hotel is an excellent choice for mid-range visitors looking. They have many great rooms to choose from, a central location for exploring the city and breakfast available in the mornings.

Hotel Washington – Those looking for a high-end stay in the US capital will love this swanky hotel. Located within easy reach of the National Mall, they have numerous delightful rooms to choose from along with plenty of great amenities – including a spa/wellness center and an on-site restaurant/bar.

Highroad Hostel Washington, DC – Budget and solo travelers will love this highly-rated hostel located in the center of DC. Situated close to all of the top attractions of the city, they have both dorms and private rooms available along with good common spaces.

Not quite what you’re looking for? Click here to browse more Washington, DC hotels!

Whether this is your first time seeing Washington DC or you’re a return visitor, this itinerary will help guide your exploration of the US capital.

Are you visiting Washington, DC? Have any questions about this itinerary? Let us know in the comments!

Related Posts:

10 Best Stops on a Zion to Grand Canyon Road Trip

The Ultimate One Day in Crater Lake Itinerary

The Ultimate Big Sur Day Trip Itinerary

About Audrey Webster

Audrey Webster is a writer for The World Was Here First. She is an Oregon native who has visited countries across the globe and currently spends her weekends exploring the Pacific Northwest and surrounding states. Her approach to traveling combines exploring famous tourist sites and wandering off the beaten path to discover new destinations.

Leave a Comment Cancel reply

4 Days in Rome: Detailed Itinerary (+Map & 2024 Planning Tips)

By Author Jurga

Posted on Last updated: March 5, 2024

Visiting Rome for 4 days and wondering what to see and how to best plan your time? In this article, we share a perfect itinerary for 4 days in Rome , with maps, essential info, and tips to make the most of your stay in the Eternal City. Find out!

Rome is one of the most beautiful places to visit in Italy and an absolute must-see! Whether you are planning a city break in Rome or it’s part of a longer trip through Italy, it’s well worth taking a bit more time to explore this beautiful city and not just rush through the main attractions.

This Rome 4 days itinerary brings you to ALL the must-see places in the city . In addition, it also includes quite a few of Rome’s hidden gems , some of the best views in the city , and some amazing underground sites that will make your visit so much more memorable.

We also share hotel and restaurant recommendations and other useful tips that will help you plan a perfect trip and explore the city just a bit deeper than most standard itineraries.

Good to know: We recently spent 4 days in Rome and this itinerary is based on the trip that we did and is very detailed (including suggestions on where to eat or where to find the best gelato, etc.). In this guide, we share our experience-based tips and advice , the tickets we booked and tours we did, what we’d do differently, and why.

It should save you hours and hours of research and help you plan an amazing visit and make the absolute most of your four days in Rome. None of the activities, restaurants, or accommodations are sponsored, so if we recommend something it’s only because we actually liked it.

Top 4 Tickets & Experiences to Book in Advance:

• Vatican Museums & Sistine Chapel .
• Colosseum, Roman Forum & Palatine Hill .
• Local Food Tour .
• Appian Way, Aqueducts & Catacombs .

TIP: Use this itinerary just as an example of what can be done each day and switch the days around if you have to. Before deciding where to go on which day, be sure to check if all the places you want to visit are open!

For example, we had to adapt our 4-day Rome sightseeing plan because the Vatican Museums weren’t open on the day we wanted to visit.

PRO TIP: For the Vatican and the Colosseum, it’s essential to book your tickets or tours in advance , so be sure to check that first, before planning anything else! If you are planning on visiting top sites on your own, check out this digital Rome Tourist Card . It’s a combined ticket that includes entry to the Colosseum, Roman Forum, Palatine Hill, Sistine Chapel, St. Peter’s Basilica & its Dome.

This card allows you to choose time slots for all the top attractions in one go (so you can immediately see what’s available on which day). It saves you time and money, and it’s simple to use because all tickets are digital.

Below, you will find more information about tickets and tours for these and other sights in Rome.

READ ALSO: Tips for Visiting Rome

How to see the best of Rome in 4 days? With so many landmarks, must-see attractions, and countless interesting sights scattered in and around the city, there’s not one perfect itinerary.

But if you want to see the very best of Rome, this 4-day plan will not disappoint. I spent a lot of time creating this itinerary for our own trip and I’m quite confident that you’ll love it as well! At the bottom of the article, you’ll also find a MAP indicating all the places to see, restaurant suggestions, and even the meeting points of some tours we recommend.

Of course, you can just pick the places that interest you the most, see fewer places, and explore deeper. But this gives you an idea of what to see, how to plan your time, and what can actually be done in four days in Rome.

Good to know: Prepare to walk a lot (wear comfortable shoes!!!) and if you can, make an effort to get up early so that you can see some of the most beautiful places without the crowds. Also, stay in the heart of the city center! We stayed at 9HotelCesari , just a few minutes’ walk from the Pantheon and the Trevi Fountain. We always stay in this area when visiting Rome – it just makes everything so much easier and more enjoyable.

TIP: If you need airport transfers to/from the city center, you can find all the best options here (by train, bus, or pre-booked taxi).

• DAY 1: Historic Center, Colosseum, several hidden gems, Trastevere
• DAY 2: The Vatican, Food Tour & Jewish Quarter
• DAY 3: Markets, the Pantheon, Galleries, Crypts, Shopping, City Views
• DAY 4: Appian Way, Aqueducts & Catacombs Tour, most interesting churches, Colosseum at sunset
• Map & getting around
• Additional suggestions if you have more time
• Where to stay

Here’s what your four days in Rome could look like:

Day 1: Historic Center, Colosseum, Baths of Caracalla, Aventine Hill, Mouth of Truth, Trastevere

PLANNING TIP: Be sure to book the tickets or the tour of the Colosseum in advance! We did and recommend this all-in tour . If you rather go on your own, you have the choice between regular tickets or tickets that include Arena Floor as well . We recommend the latter as standing on the Gladiator Arena is really special.

Here’s what your first of the 4 days in Rome could look like:

7 – 8 AM: Trevi Fountain, Pantheon, Piazza Navona, Breakfast

Start your first day in Rome with an early walk through the city center. I recommend going to see the Pantheon and the Trevi Fountain first thing in the morning. These are the most visited landmarks in the center and they are always crowded. But if you come here early, you have a chance of seeing these places without too many people around.

If you stay in the heart of the city center, it’s really easy to see these places without the crowds. Our hotel was so centrally located that we woke up at around 6.30 AM, took a quick shower, dressed, and were at the Trevi Fountain just before 7 AM. It was magical to see it empty and actually be able to enjoy it and take the time to admire this masterpiece!

It’s also nice to see the Pantheon and Piazza della Rotonda without people. You won’t be able to visit inside the Pantheon this early, but you can come back for that later. If you have a bit more time, you can walk to Piazza Navona and see it without the crowds as well (it’s just a 3-4 minutes walk from the Pantheon, so really not a big detour).

Go back to your hotel for breakfast . Alternatively, you can have breakfast at one of the many cafés in the city center.

READ ALSO: The Best Area to Stay in Rome

8.30 – 10 AM: Piazza Venezia, Capitoline Hill, Via dei Fori Imperiali

Next big stop – the Colosseum . It’s just a 20-30 minutes walk from the city center. You could take a taxi, rent an electrical scooter, or simply walk. We recommend walking because you can see so many other landmarks along the way, especially around Via dei Fori Imperiali .

On your way to the Colosseum, you’ll pass Piazza Venezia . This is a huge and very busy city square with a colossal monument (Altar of the Fatherland) and the equestrian statue of Vittorio Emanuele II. This is one of the must-see places in Rome!

TIP: If you have some extra time, you could visit the monument and take the elevator to the top . The panoramic views are stunning, but it’s not cheap and can take quite some time if it’s busy. Yet, it’s definitely possible to squeeze it in your itinerary if you plan well.

Then, take the wide staircase on the right side of the monument and visit Capitoline Hill (Campidoglio). This staircase and the square were designed by Michelangelo. On top of the stairs, you’ll see impressive palaces that house Capitoline Museums .

With just four days in Rome, you’ll have to be very selective about where to go and what to see. If you want to visit these museums and the Colosseum + Forum Romanum on the same day, it’s definitely possible, but you’ll have to skip most of the other suggestions for this day.

We recommend just passing by here. On top of the hill, check out one of the best viewpoints in Rome , Belvedere di Via Monte Tarpeo which overlooks the Roman Forum. On the other side of the Senatorial Palace, you’ll see a small statue of the Capitoline Wolf . This statue depicts an old legend, according to which a wolf saved and cared for Romulus and Remus, the twins that later founded the city of Rome.

After leaving Capitoline Hill, turn left and walk to the main street – Via dei Fori Imperiali and in the direction of the Colosseum. This road is like a museum in itself – with the Roman Forum on your right, the Forum of Augustus and other historic places on your left, and impressive statues of Roman emperors around you.

10.30 AM – 1.30 PM: Colosseum Tour + Roman Forum & Palatine Hill

If you booked your tickets or a tour of the Colosseum , you can now visit the Colosseum inside. All tickets also include an entrance to the Roman Forum and Palatine Hill . So plan on spending the next 2-4 hours here. In fact, the tickets include a few other places, but those are not a must. Just as with so many other places in the city, you could spend the whole day here, but with just 4 days in Rome, we recommend only focusing on the musts.

There are several options for the Colosseum. Most people just get a regular ticket and visit on their own, but you should also know that there is a slightly more expensive ticket that includes Arena Floor . In addition, I recommend visiting the underground level as well. And for that, you need a guided tour.

I’ll spare you all the details about all the ticket and tour options and to keep things short, just say that after lots of research, we booked a tour like this that includes Colosseum (all levels), Palatine Hill, and Forum Romanum . It was absolutely worth it and I highly recommend it.

Good to know: We booked a tour at 10.30 AM. You could also rush and come here first thing in the morning, but it’s ALWAYS busy at the Colosseum anyway, so it won’t really enhance your experience. And if you prebook your tickets in advance, there’s no need to hurry or worry about anything.

Going with a tour, we didn’t have to stress about where exactly to go, which line to stand in (we actually skipped most of the lines except the security check), or where exactly to go once we were inside the Colosseum.

We saw all the levels of the Colosseum – the Underground, the Arena Floor, and all the regular areas accessible to everyone. It was an amazing experience and our guide made it a smooth, informative, and very enjoyable visit.

Afterwards, we walked to the nearby Palatine Hill and the Roman Forum . Once again, it was great to have a guide here. I’ve been to these places before, without a guide, and it’s only now that I realized how much I missed.

These areas are so vast and there’s so much to see that it’s easy to get overwhelmed and miss some of the highlights. Also, the guide tells you stories and anecdotes and helps put things into perspective and better understand what you are seeing. Our tour ended at the Roman Forum, giving us more time to explore it further on our own.

READ ALSO: Guide to Colosseum Levels & Tickets

1.30 – 2.30 PM: Lunch near Colosseum

After all the walking and sightseeing, you’ll want to sit down for lunch! So find a nice restaurant near the Colosseum and enjoy a quiet lunch. We thought that we’d just get something quick for lunch and go on, but it was actually nice to take a break and I highly recommend you do the same!

We headed to the small neighborhood east of the Colosseum – this is where you’ll find lots of restaurants and cafes. And yes, many of them are really touristy, but there are some good places to eat here as well. The biggest problem is finding a table here in the afternoon…

For a quick bite, you could try L’Antico Forno . If you have some time to sit down, check out Trattoria Luzzi . This is one of the most popular and good-value restaurants near the Colosseum, but if you want to find a table here at lunch, try to reserve in advance.

We had lunch at La Pace del Cervello , which didn’t have the best reviews, but had a free table outside and we didn’t want to waste more time looking around. The service was super fast and friendly, the pizza was one of the best we had in Rome, and the prices were very correct as well.

TIP: The best way to find where to eat in Rome is to simply take a look at the reviews on Google Maps of the nearby restaurants and pick a place that looks more local (to start with, no pictures on the menu). But – once again – it’s usually so busy near the Colosseum at lunch that you will be happy to find a free table. And if you just get a pizza and some drinks, as we did, you can’t really go wrong anyway.

3 – 3.30 PM: Baths of Caracalla

If you want to get a bit off the beaten path in Rome, I highly recommend visiting the Baths of Caracalla . Located about 20 minutes walk from the Colosseum, this is one of the most remarkable Ancient Rome sites that most tourists never see. Yet, it’s absolutely worth a visit!

Caracalla Baths were built at the beginning of the 3rd century and were one the largest Roman public baths. It’s a huge complex that used to house several baths, saunas, an Olympic-size swimming pool, sports facilities, and even a library. The baths were heated via a series of underground ovens and it’s absolutely impressive to see how advanced and luxurious this place was.

Nowadays, it’s an archeological site/ outdoor museum. Some parts are still very well preserved and restored, with some stunning mosaics that give you a glimpse of how grand and decorative these baths were.

To us, the Baths of Caracalla is one of the most special places in Rome. And yes, it’s not an absolute must, but I highly recommend including it in your Rome itinerary. This is one of those places that will make your visit more special. And it’s also a nice place to escape the crowds.

Good to know: The Baths of Caracalla are open daily except on Mondays and some public holidays. Here you can find more info and also get tickets online, but it’s not an absolute must – normally, you can just buy a ticket at the entrance. You can also visit here with a tour ; obviously, it’s quite expensive compared to just the ticket price, but going with a guide always gives you a very different perspective.

After visiting the Baths of Caracalla, you could see some of the lesser-known places in Rome . None of these is a must, but nice to do if you don’t mind a lot of walking and have some time to spare. You can visit all of them or just pick the ones that interest you the most.

TIP: You could also rent one of the electric scooters that you’ll find all over Rome for getting to these places. It would make it much quicker and easier.

4 – 5 PM: Pyramid of Caius Cestius and/or Aventine Hill

The Pyramid of Caius Cestus is about 20 minutes walking distance from the Baths of Caracalla, and you pass some very local areas of the city. The Pyramid looks like the ones you see in Egypt and was actually built as a tomb in 18-12 BC. It is possible to visit the Pyramid inside, but it’s only open a few weekends per month and requires an advance booking, but you can just see it from the outside, as we did.

Next to it, there’s also an old 3rd-century city gate, Porta San Paolo , part of the old city walls. There’s a small museum here and you can walk up to the top of the tower for nice views.

Next, head to Aventine Hill . Best known for the Knights of Malta Keyhole , there are also several churches here and the Orange Garden ( Giardino degli Aranci ) offering nice views of Rome.

The keyhole is the main attraction here and it is exactly as it sounds – a keyhole in an old door. But what makes it special is that through it, you can see the view of the green garden pathway with St. Peter’s Basilica perfectly framed in the middle.

This is one of the more popular hidden gems of Rome and often, there’s a long queue of people waiting to look through this keyhole. I’ll let you decide if it’s worth your time waiting in line for it, but a visit to Aventine Hill is worth it either way. The three churches are really interesting to see, especially Basilica di Santa Sabina all’Aventino , and also the city panorama from the nearby gardens is really nice.

5 – 5.30 PM: Mouth of Truth

Finally, head back towards the river and the city center and stop at Santa Maria in Cosmedin church . Here you’ll find the Mouth of Truth ( Bocca della Verita ), a marble face with an open mouth. The legend has it that the mouth will bite off the hand of any liar.

In the past, you could just stop by here, put your hand in the mouth, take a picture, and move on. However, it’s become a very popular tourist attraction, and so also here, you’ll have to stand in a long queue in order to take a picture with your hand in it. There’s now even a small gate, a donation box, and staff keeping an eye on the crowds and regulating ‘traffic’.

We chose not to waste our time in line and took a picture of the mouth through the gate (you can see it from the street). The church itself is also nice to see, and there’s also an underground crypt of Pope Adrian I (8th century) that’s quite interesting as well. If you don’t have to stand in line for the Mouth of Truth, a visit here will only take 5-10 minutes.

6 PM: Trastevere & Dinner

Trastevere is one of the nicest (local) neighborhoods in the center of Rome. The name Trastevere comes from ‘ trans Tiberim ‘, which means ‘beyond the Tiber’. And indeed, it’s located on the other side of the river, just over the bridge from the Mouth of Truth.

This is a really nice area with narrow cobbled streets, colorful houses, countless restaurants, cafes, and bars. If you are looking for a nice place to have dinner, Trastevere is the best foodie area in Rome!

Before heading to dinner, you could also visit a few churches here. The most famous is Basilica di Santa Maria in Trastevere , located on the most picturesque little square. Don’t miss it!

Also check out Basilica Santa Cecilia in Trastevere – a real hidden gem, best known for the sculpture of St. Cecilia that was originally found in the Catacombs of St. Callixtus (and that we recommend visiting – see day 4 of this itinerary).

TIP: If you like exploring with the locals, you could book a food tour of Trastevere . It covers some of the landmarks of the neighborhood, plus you get to taste some delicious food as well. There are normally tours starting at around 5-7 PM, so it’s possible to fit it into this itinerary.

Or simply find a nice restaurant and enjoy a quiet dinner – you definitely deserve it after all the walking! Some of the best places to eat in Trastevere are Trattoria Da Enzo al 29 (close to Basilica St Cecilia) or Osteria Nannarella (close to Basilica St Maria). Be sure to try fried artichoke ( carciofi alla giudea ), one of the local specialties.

Day 2: The Vatican, Food Tour & Jewish Quarter, Historic Center

PLANNING TIP: Be sure to check if the Vatican is open on the day you want to visit and reserve your tickets / tour for the Vatican Museums (Sistine Chapel) online! See below for the best tour suggestions. The tickets are timed and they always sell out at least a few days in advance. Also, be sure that you wear clothing that covers your knees and shoulders! Also be sure to book the food tour in advance!

Here’s how you could plan your day:

Early morning: St. Angelo Bridge & Castel Sant’Angelo

If you walk to the Vatican from the city center, you’ll pass the Sant’Angelo Bridge and Castel Sant’Angelo . This area gets crowded during the day, but if you come here early, you’ll be able to enjoy it without the crowds.

TIP: Some of the best views of the St. Angelo bridge with St. Peter’s Basilica in the background are seen from the Umberto I Bridge and the southern side of the river between the two bridges.

Morning: Vatican Museums & Sistine Chapel

Together with the Colosseum, the Vatican Museums (where you’ll find the famous Sistine Chapel ) is the most popular tourist attraction in Rome. It’s essential to book your tickets (or a tour) in advance!

Sometimes, if you didn’t think to book in advance and all the regular entrance tickets are sold out, you can still visit with a tour (they have separate access to tickets).

We have been to the Vatican Museums with a tour in the past, and so on this 4-day Rome trip, we just got the regular tickets instead of taking a guided tour. Big mistake! Next time, I’d definitely go with a tour. Here’s why.

Our experience: Once you enter the museums, you find yourself in a beehive with a labyrinth of halls and corridors and staircases… And yes, you get a plan and there are signs pointing to some parts of the museum, but it’s absolutely not clear where to go. All the routes point to Sistine Chapel and so eventually, you do get there (and see a lot along the way), but you have no idea what exactly you are seeing, whether you have missed something or not, and what’s worth it the most…

TIP: So if you want to save yourself all the stress and be sure that you see the best that the Vatican Museums have to offer, consider going with a guided tour . I’m a bit hesitant to recommend a guided tour with the official guide of the museum because we saw lots of frustrated people inside who were sent from one place to the other, looking for the official group tours. Instead, you can book a tour with one of the local companies (see below). That way, you meet your guide outside, enter the museums together, and can actually relax and enjoy your visit.

Here are 3 of the best tours of the Vatican:

• Early Entry to the Vatican & the Sistine Chapel . If you want to see the Sistine Chapel at its quietest , this is the best tour. It starts very early but gives you an extraordinary experience, incomparable to any regular daytime tours. In addition, this tour visits St. Peter’s Basilica and enters it directly through the museum saving you lots of time.
• Skip-the-Ticket-Line Vatican Tour and Sistine Chapel . This is the most popular (and great value) tour of the Vatican Museums & St Peter’s Basilica. A good alternative to visiting on your own.
• Early morning tour that includes everything + the dome . This tour includes ALL the musts of the Vatican : St. Peter’s Basilica with a visit to the underground crypts and the dome climb + the Vatican Museums & Sistine Chapel.

UNIQUE EXPERIENCE: VIP Key Master’s Tour – on select days, it’s possible to visit the Sistine Chapel with a Key Master as he opens the galleries of the Vatican Museums. You spend two hours inside with just a handful of people in your group – it’s a very unique experience (but also with a very high price tag and limited availability). A similar tour is also available through this company but it’s only bookable once or twice a month.

Good to know: The Vatican Museums are closed on Sundays, except on the last Sunday of the month when they are also free to visit (expect even bigger crowds if you visit on a free day). The museums are also closed on most religious holidays and on some other occasions.

When you pre-book your tour or tickets, you’ll immediately see if the date of your choice is not available, and can adjust your itinerary at that time.

Noon: Lunch near the Vatican

After your visit to the Vatican Museums, you’ll definitely want to sit down and rest your legs. All that slow walking is really tiring…

There are several restaurants and a café inside the Vatican museums, so you could have lunch there. But there are also quite a few nice restaurants in the nearby neighborhood. We chose to dine at one of the local restaurants.

We had lunch at La Locanda di Pietro , just a few minutes walk from the museum. It’s a very nice local restaurant with very friendly staff and truly good food. There are quite a few good restaurants in this area. For low-key simple Italian dishes, check out Ristorante dei Musei , or – if you prefer something different- head to La Cucaracha which serves Mexican food.

TIP: Try to go for lunch at around noon. When we visited, most restaurants were still quiet at 12, but half an hour – an hour later, there were hardly any free tables left (and only inside).

1.30 – 4 PM: St. Peter’s Square & Basilica

Unless you book a tour of the Vatican Museums and St. Peter’s Basilica together, I recommend visiting St. Peter’s in the afternoon. In fact, the later in the afternoon you go, the quieter it usually is.

We booked this tour of the Basilica that included a Dome Climb and the Underground , and it started at 2 PM. So after lunch, we headed to St. Peter’s Square , explored it a bit on our own, went to see the Swiss Guards , and sent some postcards from the Post of the Vatican .

At 2 PM, we met our guide and waited for about 15-20 minutes (security line) to enter the Basilica. The lines weren’t nearly as bad in the afternoon as they were in the morning. While you don’t really need a guide to visit the church (and the entrance is free of charge), we actually enjoyed having a guided tour here. Our guide told us so many stories and explained so many things that we would have totally missed otherwise (and actually did miss on the previous visits here).

TIP: If you go without a tour, consider getting an audioguide – that way, you can better appreciate what you are seeing.

We then visited the crypts where some of the Popes are buried. You can also see St. Peter’s Tomb here, but only the tomb that’s officially accessible to the public (the actual St. Peter’s tomb is located yet deeper under the Basilica and can only be visited with official Vatican tours if/when they run and are very limited in numbers).

After exploring the church, you can opt to go to the top of the Dome . Our tour included this, but if you go on your own, you can do this as well. The entrance is located on the far right side of the church and you can buy a ticket here. You can opt for the stairs or the elevator. We suggest taking the elevator to the rooftop because you’ll still have to do over 330 steps to the actual top of the Dome.

A visit to St. Peter’s Dome is one of the most special things you can do at the Vatican. So if you are fit enough for the 330 stairs (up and then down again), don’t miss it! Not only can you see the rooftop of the Basilica and stunning views of the Vatican and the city from the Dome, but you also get to walk inside the actual dome with the whole church right under your feet. People look like little ants from this height and you realize once more how colossal the building is.

A very unique experience!

4.30 PM: Campo de’ Fiori

After the Vatican, head back to the city center and walk to Campo de’ Fiori . It’s about 25-30 minutes walk.

Campo de’ Fiori is one of the nicest town squares in Rome and a bustling market. Visiting here in the afternoon, you can actually see the square and not just umbrellas and the food stalls.

In the center of the square, you can see a statue of Giordano Bruno . He was a 16th-century philosopher who was burned here for his progressive thinking.

However, it’s also a special experience to see the Campo de’ Fiori market when it’s open. So if there’s no market anymore when you visit here in the afternoon, I recommend coming back here the next morning as well. See more info on day 3 of this itinerary.

5 – 8 PM: Street food tour & Jewish Quarter

The street food tour was one of the best experiences of our 4-day visit to Rome. If you want to discover a more local side of Rome, I highly recommend taking a food tour! It’s such a great way to get a bit off the beaten path and taste some local specialties.

We’ve been to Rome many times before, but we still learned new things, tasted some of the most delicious food, and saw some places we would have never seen on our own.

We took this highly-rated food tour and I can highly recommend it! The tour starts at 5.15 PM at Piazza del Biscione, which is a tiny town square right at the northeastern corner of Campo de’ Fiori. Be sure to check the starting times and location at the time of your visit, in case something would have changed!

On this tour, you visit a traditional food store from the 19th century and still run by the same family, have Roman pizza, and try other regional specialties at several excellent local restaurants. Our tour also included a tasting of Italian wine, local beer, and delicious gelato. They can also cater to people who have special dietary requirements and, of course, alcoholic drinks can be replaced by water or soft drinks.

We also passed some really nice local areas and also visited the Jewish Quarter (Ghetto) . Together with Trastevere and Testaccio (a bit further away from the center), this is one of the best neighborhoods for food in Rome. If you are still hungry after the tour (can’t imagine you would be, but you never know), this is a nice place to come back for dinner. Or come here at another time, as we did.

The tour also visits Largo di Torre Argentina and ends close to the Pantheon. It takes about 2.5 hours.

LEARN MORE: Rome Street Food Tour: Review & Tips

Evening: Explore the historic city center in the dark

If you still have some energy afterwards, walk around the city center and see Piazza Navona, the Pantheon, and Trevi Fountain nicely lit in the dark .

How dark it actually is will, of course, depend on the season when you visit. In November, it gets dark at 5 PM, whereas in June, it stays light until after 9 PM.

TIP: If you still have some space left for another gelato, check out Giolitti or Gelateria Della Palma – these are the two best places for ice cream in Rome. We stopped for ice cream here every time we were around…

We ended our day with some drinks on the beautiful rooftop terrace of our hotel . I think you can also come here for drinks even if you are not a guest at the hotel, but I’m not 100% sure. The drinks are quite expensive compared to the prices at the nearby restaurants though. But if you aren’t having dinner (not likely you’ll still be hungry after the food tour), it’s actually not easy to find a restaurant that will want to seat you just for the drinks. So for that, this bar is perfect.

Day 3: Campo de’Fiori, Pantheon, Doria Pamphilj, Capuchin Crypt, Villa Borghese, Terrazza del Pincio, Piazza del Popolo, Shopping, Spanish Steps

PLANNING TIP: Reserve your tickets or a tour of the Borghese Gallery in advance! You may also want to prebook a timed-entry slot for the Pantheon .

Early morning: Campo de’Fiori

In the past, a field of flowers (thus the name), nowadays Campo de’ Fiori is a bustling food market. The market is open Monday to Saturday, usually from around 7 AM to 2 PM.

The market is really touristy, but locals shop here as well. You’ll find stalls selling fruits, vegetables, cheese, meat, pasta, Italian limoncello (and other colorful drinks), and also flowers.

It’s always a nice place to visit when in Rome. The market is lively and colorful, you can buy all kinds of food, fruit, and also stock up on some (edible) gifts to take home.

9 AM: Pantheon

You will have passed the Pantheon several times by now, but it’s one of those places that you really should visit inside. Seeing the famous dome with a hole (oculus to the sky) in the middle is a must when visiting Rome!

Originally built in 27 BC and rebuilt in the 2nd century, the Pantheon is probably the best-kept monument from the old Roman times. The name ‘Pantheon’ means ‘temple of all the gods’ and – originally – it was a pagan temple indeed. In 609, Roman emperor Phocas gifted the Pantheon to the Pope, and it was turned into a church. This is one of the reasons why it’s still so well preserved.

A visit to the Pantheon doesn’t require much time. However, it’s always busy here, so if you don’t want to waste too much time, be sure to come here well before it opens.

Good to know: Nowadays, there is an entrance fee to visit the Pantheon. It’s also possible to book a timed-entry ticket in advance, however, getting the earliest time slots is not easy. You may want to check the official website and also Tiqets and GetYourGuide to see what’s available for your travel dates. In any case, keep in mind that you have to pick up the actual ticket at an external location (they do like to complicate things more than necessary…).

Alternatively, you can just stand in line and hope to get in without too much of a wait (in that case, arrive at least half an hour before it opens). Or make it easy for yourself and book a guided tour (likely later than 9 AM though, so you’ll have to adjust this itinerary accordingly).

10-11 AM: Doria Pamphilj Gallery

One of the hidden gems right in the historic city center, Doria Pamphilj Gallery is a private art collection that belongs to the princely Doria Pamphilj family. This is one of the largest and most impressive private art collections in Rome and it’s open to the public.

This vast art collection was started in the 16th century and contains a large number of paintings, furniture, and sculptures. You can see various works by Caravaggio, Raffaello, Velázquez, and many other famous Italian artists. But what makes it truly special is the sheer number of pieces of art covering the walls from the floor all the way to the ceiling.

TIP: Be sure to pick up an audio guide at the entrance (included with your ticket). It’s a great way to learn more about the palace, the art collection, and the family behind it. The English narrative is spoken by Jonathan Doria Pamphilj, and he shares some fun stories and anecdotes about the family as well.

Good to know: Doria Pamphilj Gallery is located in a 17th-century Palazzo Doria Pamphilj, about halfway between the Pantheon and the Trevi fountain, about 7 minutes walk from either of the two. It’s open daily from 10 AM. Their website says that you need to prebook the tickets in advance (and they are non-refundable). In the low(ish) season, we were able to visit without an advance booking. During busy times, you may have to wait for a while if you don’t have a reservation.

TIP: If you want to be sure to visit when you want to, but also have the flexibility to cancel, you can book cancelable tickets here .

11 AM: Galleria Sciarra

As you walk from Doria Pamphilj Gallery to the Capuchin Crypt (about 15 min walk), you’ll pass another nice secret gem of Rome, Galleria Sciarra . Located just steps from the famous Trevi Fountain, this beautiful place is completely overlooked by most tourists.

Galleria Sciarra is a small glass-covered gallery/patio with beautiful frescos pained on all the buildings surrounding the courtyard. It dates from the late 19th century and is a fine example of the Art Nouveau style.

Good to know: The courtyard is always open, accessible, and free. A visit here only takes a minute or two, so definitely take a look inside!

11.20 – 11.50 AM: Capuchin Crypt

If you like quirky places, you may want to check out another interesting hidden gem of Rome, the Capuchin Crypt (Museo e Cripta dei Frati Cappuccini).

The 500-year-old monastery houses a small museum telling more about the Capuchin monks and the history of the friary. But the main highlight are the underground crypts that contain really special and artistic creations made of human skeletons.

We’ve been to several bone chapels in various places in Europe in the past, but this one really stands out from the rest. There are several different crypts, each with its own unique ‘composition’, and it’s fascinating to see how someone created real art from human bones… It doesn’t even feel creepy or spooky, but more artsy…

Good to know: Capuchin Crypt is open daily from 10 AM to 7 PM, except on some public holidays, and you can just get a ticket at the entrance. More information on their website . They have an audio guide available and also run guided tours.

Lots of organized city tours include a visit here together with some other crypts and catacombs visits in Rome. But if you just want to see the crypts and the museum on your own, 20-30 minutes is more than enough time here.

12 – 1.30 PM: Lunch

After visiting the Capuchin Crypt, continue in the direction of Villa Borghese Gardens (about 10 minutes walk to the entrance of the park or 15-20 minutes walk to the gallery).

On the way, you’ll pass several restaurants. If you are feeling nostalgic for some American food, you can stop at the Hard Rock Café.

Alternatively, there are plenty of local restaurants as well. If you don’t mind splurging a bit and are looking for something special, check out the historic Harry’s Bar . And there are lots of other cheaper and simpler places to eat in this area.

2 – 5 PM: Borghese Gallery & Gardens

Villa Borghese is a large landscaped garden, one of the biggest and most beautiful public parks in Rome. There is a lot to see and do in the park and you could easily spend half a day here, but the most famous place is the Borghese Gallery .

If you are interested in art, this is one of the best museums to visit in Rome ! Here, you can see a big collection of masterpieces by Caravaggio, Raphael, Canova, and many others. Also, the interior of the palace is absolutely impressive!

Good to know: The Borghese Gallery is very popular, the tickets are timed, and usually sell out long in advance (especially if you are visiting in high season). So if you want to be sure to visit here, it’s essential to reserve your tickets in advance!

You can opt for a regular entrance ticket , and there are also guided tours available that cover the museum as well as the beautiful gardens. A tour might actually be a good idea here since the gardens are really large and there’s a lot to see.

Alternative suggestion: If you are not interested in the museum or the gardens, or want to see as much as possible and don’t mind walking quite a bit more, you could also visit the Quartiere Coppedè nearby.

It’s a small neighborhood with some of the most special architecture you can find in Rome. You can read more about it in our guide to Rome’s hidden gems .

This beautiful but rather compact neighborhood is located about 20 minutes walk from Villa Borghese (so you need about 1 hour in total to walk there and back and see the highlights). However, if you could rent an electric scooter, you could probably visit in about 30 minutes.

It’s also easy to combine it with a visit to the Coppede district and that of the Borghese Gallery. It really depends on your interests and how much you are willing to walk.

5.30 PM: Terrazza del Pincio

Terrazza del Pincio is a popular viewpoint offering nice views of Piazza del Popolo, the city center of Rome, and St. Peter’s Basilica in the distance. This is a popular place to come at sunset too.

There are, in fact, two viewpoints here and the views are nice from both (the other one doesn’t have an official name and is located right under Terrazza Viale del Belvedere, but is often confused with Pincio Terrace). Anyway, I indicated them both on our map.

These viewpoints are located about 15-20 minutes walk from the Borgese Gallery, and the walk through the park is really nice in itself.

From Terrazza del Pincio viewpoint right above Piazza del Popolo, take the stairs on the right side and walk down to this town square.

READ ALSO: Best Views & Viewpoints in Rome

6 – 7 PM: Piazza del Popolo & Shopping Streets

Piazza del Popolo (the People’s Square) is one of the largest and best-known town squares in Rome. Located at the Aurelian city walls, there’s still an impressive city gate here.

If you are coming from the hill at Terrazza del Pincio, the city gate will be on your right. If you want to experience the ‘wow’ effect of the square as first-time visitors to Rome did in the past, you can walk through it and come back to the square that way, but it’s really impressive either way.

Piazza del Popolo is a place where three big streets come together. In the center of the square, you can see an Egyptian Obelisk and the Fountain of the Lions . There are two other fountains with impressive statues at the sides of the square. And it’s also flanked by two impressive churches Santa Maria dei Miracoli and Santa Maria di Montesanto .

The area to the south of Piazza del Popolo is one of the most popular shopping neighborhoods in Rome . You’ll find all kinds of fashion stores here – from the cheaper main street brands to the most expensive designer stores like Gucci, Prada, Dolce & Gabanna, Tiffany & Co, and pretty much any other big name in the fashion industry.

The most famous shopping streets are Via del Corso (popular brands) and Via dei Condotti (high-end designer shops), but the whole area is really a shoppers’ paradise. If you are more interested in sightseeing than shopping, check out Via Margutta . It’s a very picturesque and much quieter street that became famous thanks to the film Roman Holiday .

Good to know: Most stores here are open until 7.30-8 PM, but if you are planning to do some shopping here, you’ll probably want to come earlier. You could easily spend an entire day here too, but with just 4 days in Rome, I’d only come here to do some window shopping.

7.30 PM: Piazza di Spagna, Spanish Steps & Dinner

Piazza di Spagna and the famous Spanish Steps is one more of the ‘must-see’ landmarks in the historic city center that you really shouldn’t miss in Rome.

Surrounded by all the shopping streets, this is a very popular area that’s always crowded. In the summer, it’s often difficult to even see the staircase through the crowds. It is now, therefore, forbidden to sit or eat on the stairs.

If you take the staircase up, you’ll be walking in the direction of the Villa Borghese Gardens that you visited earlier today. At the top, there’s also a church – Trinità dei Monti – and you could visit inside if it’s still open.

But, frankly, the stairs are the most impressive when seen from the bottom and the interior of the church is not that special. There are some nice viewpoints at the top, but if you already visited Terrazza del Pincio viewpoint before that, going up the stairs is not really a must. Unless you are here at around sunset and want to see some nice twilight views from above – in that case, definitely go up.

TIP: For dinner with a view, check out Caffè Ciampini di Marco Ciampini , a short walk to the left at the top of the stairs. Otherwise, you will find lots of nice restaurants in the historic city center. I indicated a few nice restaurants on the map.

Day 4: Appian Way, Aqueducts & Catacombs tour, San Giovanni in Laterano, St. Clement Basilica, Basilica di San Pietro in Vincoli, Colosseum at sunset

PLANNING TIP: Book this e-bike tour in advance (possible for all ages). If biking isn’t your thing, this bus/ walking tour has a very similar itinerary and takes less time, but – at least at the moment, it only runs a few times a week and only in high season. Also, keep in mind that St. Callixtus Catacombs are closed on Wednesdays. You can still do the e-bike tour, but you’ll likely visit the Catacombs of Saint Sebastian instead.

9 AM – 3 PM: E-bike Tour of the Appian Way, Aqueducts & Catacombs

On the fourth day in Rome, we recommend that you get a bit outside the city and visit some of the ancient Roman sites nearby. The main highlights that are worth it the most are the Appian Way , the Park of the Aqueducts , and the Catacombs of St. Callixtus (or the nearby Catacombs of Saint Sebastian).

Hands down, this was one of our favorite days of the 4-day visit to Rome! So if you are comfortable on an e-bike, I highly recommend considering this tour .

There are other similar bike tours as well, but we chose this one because it has the most complete itinerary, includes (delicious warm) lunch, uses good quality electric mountain bikes, and has the best reviews. Also (take my word for this), you really don’t want to do the Appian Way with a regular bike!

I’m not going to list the complete itinerary of this tour, but below are some pictures that will give you a short overview of what you can expect to see. Since you go with a local guide, you have nothing to plan or worry about. Just enjoy the day and soak in the incredible 2000-year-old sights.

We loved every minute of this tour and I’d do it again in a heartbeat. Also, my teenage son said that it was the absolute best thing we did on the entire trip (and he really enjoyed the rest of Rome as well, with the food tour on day 2 of this itinerary being his second favorite).

3.30 – 4 PM: Basilica di San Giovanni in Laterano

Just 10 minutes walk from where your bike tour ends, you can visit the main church of the city, the Cathedral of Rome, Basilica di San Giovanni in Laterano . It is this church (and not the St. Peter’s Basilica in the Vatican) that is considered as the ‘Cathedral of Rome and of the World’. The Pope is the reigning bishop of the city of Rome.

The reasoning behind this is quite simple – while the Pope stands above the cardinals and the bishops, St. Peter stands above the Pope. So St. Peter’s Basilica is a whole other league compared to any other church, and Rome – just as any other city – deserves its own cathedral, of course.

Anyway, the Basilica di San Giovanni in Laterano is absolutely impressive. The cathedral is massive, very richly decorated, and the statues of the Apostles inside are just as majestic as the ones at St. Peter’s. In the middle, you can also see the tomb of Pope Martino V , and on the far left corner of the church, there’s an entrance to a 13th-century cloister . You have to pay a few euros to visit here, but consider it as a donation to the church and be sure to check it out.

It took me quite a few visits to Rome before I finally made the time to visit this church, and I can tell you that it’s absolutely worth a detour. And since the bike tour ends just nearby, it’s really easy to add it to your 4-day Rome itinerary. A visit is free of charge, and it’s incomparably quieter here than at the Vatican.

TIP: While you can visit the Cathedral itself for free, you need a ticket to visit the cloisters. You can get this all-in ticket which includes everything there is to see at the Basilica and at the Scala Sancta across the street (more info below).

4 – 4.15 PM: Scala Santa

Just across the street from the Basilica, there’s one more little-known gem of Rome, Scala Santa (the Holy Stairs ). This is a small catholic sanctuary with a papal chapel and three impressive staircases leading to it. The middle of the three staircases is the Holy Stairs.

According to a Christian tradition, Jesus Christ climbed these stairs before his crucifixion . It’s believed that these stairs have been brought from Jerusalem to Rome in the 4th century. This staircase is considered sacred and is reserved for pilgrims who come here to pray and climb to the top on their knees hoping for a plenary indulgence. Millions of people have climbed these stairs on their knees, including many popes.

On top of the right staircase, there is a nice chapel, with an adjacent smaller papal chapel in the middle.

The papal chapel Sancta Sanctorum (the Holy of the Holies) itself is normally closed to the public and can only be seen through a small opening at the end of the middle stairs. It was exceptionally open when we visited, but I’m not sure if it will remain open to the public in the future. It contains lots of relics, some of which have been moved to the Vatican.

Even if you can’t visit the Holy of the Holies, a visit here is more than worth a few minutes of your time. The staircases are really impressive and so is the bigger chapel. And you can see the other one through a small opening too.

Good to know: Scala Santa is open daily in the morning and in the afternoon. There’s no fee to enter and no reservations are needed and you only need a couple of minutes. If you want to visit the papal chapel of Sancta Sanctorum (and it’s open), there’s a small fee (or you can get this ticket for the Cathedral and the Holy Stairs, as mentioned before). You can find more info about this sacred place and the opening times on their website .

4.30 – 5 PM: St. Clement Basilica

After a visit to Basilica di San Giovanni in Laterano and the Holy Stairs, walk back in the direction of the Colosseum, and be sure to stop at St. Clement Basilica . From the outside, it might look just like any other of 900+ churches in Rome, but it houses a lot of secrets inside. This is one of the most unique places you can visit in Rome ! Yet, despite its proximity to the Colosseum, only very few tourists know about it or ever come here.

St. Clement Basilica was constructed in the 12th century. With its cozy interior and beautiful mosaics, it looks really nice, but – not that special, you’d think. There are tens of other very similar churches all over the city…

What makes it extraordinary is that underneath there’s an archeological site containing two underground levels. Right under the church, there’s the original Basilica, built in the 4th century. AND – yet another level deeper – there are 1st and 2nd- century buildings used by the members of the cult of Mithras. This seemingly ordinary church actually has three layers that literally take you back in time through centuries of Roman history.

There are several places in Rome where you can literally touch the 2000-year-old walls, but this is probably one of the most authentic sites (it probably feels like that because there are very few tourists) AND it’s so easy to visit! You don’t need any advance reservations, there are no queues, and it’s just a stone’s throw from the Colosseum! So even if you are not doing the bike tour and plan your Rome itinerary differently, you could easily come here when you are visiting the Colosseum.

Good to know: The Basilica’s Archeological Excavations are open daily except on Christmas Day. You can check up-to-date info for the opening times and buy a ticket on their website . Or pay a few euros more and simply get a ticket at the entrance. Kids under 16 are free of charge.

5.15 – 6 PM Domus Aurea

Domus Aurea , aka the Golden House of Emperor Nero, is located just next to the Colosseum and is well worth a visit as well. It’s an ancient archeological underground site where you can see the remains of the extravagant villa built by Nero after the Great Fire in 64 AD had destroyed a large part of the city.

The Golden House was huge, with over 200 rooms, pavilions, gardens, and even an artificial lake in the center, and was built to impress and entertain.

The most remarkable feature was the Octagonal Room with five rooms around it and waterfalls cascading down the walls. The main dining hall – the Octagonal Hall itself – has a big concrete dome with an oculus which is believed to have inspired the architecture of the Pantheon. This room also had a revolving floor – an impressive engineering achievement at that time.

Nero wasn’t loved and his impressive palace was looted and destroyed soon after his death. It was covered in earth and several other structures were built on top of it, including the Baths of Trajan and Titus. The Colosseum was built at a place where Nero’s lake used to be and it also got its name from the Colossus statue that used to stand at the entrance of Domus Aurea.

Good to know: Domus Aurea is normally open daily until 6.30 PM. However, at the moment of writing, it’s only open on the weekends and just a few hours a day. All visits are guided and normally also include a VR experience that gives you a good insight into how grand this palace was. Since it’s an underground site, it’s quite cold inside so you may want to take a sweater.

If you absolutely want to visit here, check the current opening times and reserve your tickets in advance. Normally, you can find info and reserve the tickets on this website , but it’s not always updated and can be somewhat unclear too. In the low season, you could probably just walk to the entrance and see if there are tickets available too. And otherwise, check out this organized tour – they’ll only show the dates and the times when a visit is actually possible.

6.15 – 6.30 PM: Basilica di San Pietro in Vincoli

Basilica di San Pietro in Vincoli is a 5th-century church best known for its relic – the chains of St. Peter and Michelangelo’s statue of Moses that is part of the tomb of Pope Julius II.

Normally, a visit is free of charge and the church is open daily until 7 PM. It’s located just 5 minutes walk from the Colosseum in the direction of the city center. Well worth a few minutes of your time.

TIP: After leaving the church, go to the right and you’ll find a small passage with a staircase on via San Francesco di Paola. It’s a nice hidden gem. If you walk to the center, you can continue via this staircase. Alternatively, head back to the Colosseum for sunset.

Sunset at the Colosseum

Depending on the time of the year (and the time of the sunset), you might find yourself close to the Colosseum at around twilight .

Seeing this landmark in a different light (and usually without the crowds of daytime visitors) might be a nice way to end your Rome city trip.

This itinerary is based on our most recent visit to Rome in November . At that time, the sunset was around 5 PM. So we came to the Colosseum after a visit to St. Clement Basilica, and could indeed enjoy the beautiful light. It wasn’t busy either.

There are many restaurants in the Colosseum area too, so you could have dinner here. We walked in the direction of the Jewish Quarter – there are some really good restaurants serving traditional Italian food here, but you have to reserve most of them in advance, definitely in the high season.

Here are some restaurant suggestions for this area that we got from our food tour guide: Giggetto , Sora Margherita , or Al Pompiere Roma (for local Roman dishes), Emma (for pizza and Roman appetizers).

Since the other restaurants opened for dinner even later, we went to Emma’s and were glad to get one of the last available tables (had no idea it would be fully booked on a weekday in November).

Map & Getting Around

Below, you can see a map of this 4-day Rome itinerary .

It contains all the places mentioned in this article, including restaurant suggestions. You can save this map to your phone and use it during the trip. To make it easier, we used four different colors – one per day.

Getting around: For this itinerary, we simply walked everywhere (except for the airport transfers and the e-bike tour, of course). This is definitely doable if you stay in the city center, plan well, and wear very comfortable shoes. However, prepare to walk A LOT .

You could also cover some of the bigger distances by public transport (buses, metro), take a taxi , or – probably the easiest and quickest – rent an electric scooter . They are scattered all over Rome and it looked like it shouldn’t be a problem to find one where and when you need it. Just drive carefully because the traffic is crazy.

LEARN MORE: Rome Airport Transfers

How to use this map:  Use your computer mouse (or fingers) to zoom in or out. Click on the icons to get more information about each place. Click the arrow on the top left corner for the index. Click the star next to the map’s title to add it to your Google Maps account. To view the saved map on your smartphone or PC, open Google Maps, click the menu and go to ‘Your Places’/’Maps’. If you want to print the map or see it in a bigger window, click on ‘View larger map’ in the top right corner.

If you have more time

If you have more than 4 days in Rome, you could, of course, take it easier and visit some of the places we indicated in our itinerary on different days. There are also many more museums, churches, etc.

However, if you want to make the most of your visit , I recommend booking a few day tours that take you outside the city.

Here are some of the most popular options for the best day trips from Rome :

• Villa D’Este & Hadrian’s Villa in Tivoli
• Pompeii & Mt. Vesuvius OR Pompeii & Amalfi Coast
• Tuscany Taster Tour: Day Trip with Lunch & Wine
• Florence & Pisa in a Day

Where to stay for 4 days in Rome

For this 4-day Rome itinerary, we recommend staying in the heart of the historic city center. Our favorite area to stay in Rome is around Pantheon, but pretty much anywhere between Piazza Navona and the Trevi Fountain is great.

Staying here, you can easily walk to the main landmarks, and pretty much all the main areas of interest are within 15-30 minutes walking distance.

Here are some of the best-rated hotels close to the Pantheon for all budgets (although low-budget options are scarce in this area):

• €€€€€+ The Pantheon Iconic Rome Hotel, Autograph Collection (a very luxurious 5* boutique hotel).
• €€€€ 9Hotel Cesari (a very centrally located 4* hotel; this is where we stayed).
• €€€ Hotel Navona (a popular 3* hotel).
• €€ Hotel Primavera (highly-rated 2* hotel; one of the best lower-budget choices in the historic center).

READ ALSO: Where to Stay in Rome

So, this is our 4 days Rome itinerary. I hope that all the time indications and the details will help you plan an unforgettable trip to the Eternal City and explore a bit deeper, beyond the main attractions.

Have a great trip!

TIP: If you are looking for more information and tips for your trip to Rome , be sure to check out this article with Rome travel tips for your first trip . It contains all the useful info and info that will help you plan a more enjoyable visit. Take a look!

READ ALSO: Best Things to Do in Rome

More travel inspiration for Rome:

• Hidden gems of Rome
• Where to eat in Rome
• 1 day in Rome
• 2 days in Rome
• Best views in Rome
• Best underground sites in Rome

TIP: If you are visiting Italy for the first time and are wondering where to go and how to plan your time, check out this Italy trip itinerary that includes all the must-sees.

If you found this post useful, don’t forget to bookmark it and share it with your friends. Are you on Pinterest? Pin these images!

More travel inspiration for Italy:

• Best places to see in Italy
• Best towns to visit in Italy
• Best Sights & Attractions in Venice
• Best Things to Do in Florence
• Best Things to Do in Milan
• Best Things to Do in Siena
• Best Things to Do in Bologna
• Best Things to Do in Verona
• Best Things to Do in Naples
• Best Things to Do in Ravenna
• Best Things to Do in Montepulciano
• Best Things to Do in Como
• Best Things to Do in Rimini
• One Day in Venice
• Three Days in Venice
• One Day in Milan
• One Day in Florence
• One Day in Cinque Terre
• One Day in Naples
• Florence to Bologna: Travel Info & Itinerary
• Bellagio (Italy)
• Tuscany itinerary
• Amalfi Coast itinerary
• Emilia Romagna itinerary
• Dolomites itinerary
• …. For many more destinations, be sure to check our Italy travel guide . It contains an overview of all our articles for a wide variety of popular places all over Italy.

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed .

John Signorelli

Sunday 15th of October 2023

I used the information here to plan my recent trip to Italy. This article was great (as was every article you have on Italy). If anyone is wondering to plan your trip yourself and use this article or to use a tour company, I have zero complaints about what I learned from Jurga for our trip.

Our next trip will be to Athens, but I didn't see an article on that - can't imaging planning my visit without your advice.

Monday 16th of October 2023

Thank you for your feedback on this and all those other articles where you left comments, John. It's always great to hear from our readers who use the information on our blog on their trips! As for Athens, unfortunately, I still haven't been there. And other trips to Greece are from so long ago that it wouldn't make sense to write about it anymore... So I'm afraid I can't help you much with that. But we have many other destinations covered on our blog if you are looking for some trip inspiration for the future. I can highly recommend you look into visiting Portugal one day. We now go there several times a year and absolutely love it every time. If you were to return to Italy, southern Italy and especially the area around Naples - Amalfi Coast is also incredibly beautiful with lots of very interesting sights. Happy travels!

Monday 17th of July 2023

Hi there, I've been trying to book tickets for collesium, forum and palatine Hill priority entrance + arena floor on tiqets website but it says hi there early bird, tickets are unavailable. I am planning trip next month and am trying to book before too late for non tour tickets due to health reasons I can't do tour because of frequent restroom breaks... is there another site to buy same ticket without tour including arena floor? I can't get a hold of anyone on their website. Thanks.

Tuesday 18th of July 2023

Hi Sam, the Colosseum tickets are normally released 30 days in advance and it's indeed, the best time to buy them - as soon as they are available for your travel date. This summer, things have been crazy. A few weeks ago, there was no availability at all; from mid-August things look a bit better. The official site is coopculture, but it's not really user-friendly, so we personally never use it. We recommend using either Tiqets or GetYourGuide for all your tickets in Rome. When the tickets are released, they are normally available on all these websites at the same time. But you can always check the official site in case they release them a bit earlier. As said, this summer has just been crazy for the Colosseum tickets. That said, I still highly recommend going with a tour if you can manage it. So many people tell me they regret not doing a tour because it wasn't always clear where to go, they missed certain parts but were not allowed to backtrack, etc. etc. Hope this helps.

Saturday 17th of June 2023

I love your blog. This itinerary will be so helpful as we are going to Rome for four days this August. Can you advise me on the following: I arrive at 8 a.m. and can't check into my air bnb until the afternoon. Do you know of a place to store our luggage so we don't waste our first day waiting to check in?

Hi Jill, upon arrival at the airport, take a train or a bus to the central station (see all the options explained in our Rome airport transfers article). Once at the station, you could use this highly-rated luggage storage for your bags. PS One more thing for this summer. The Colosseum tickets are practically impossible to get these days. So be sure to book a guided tour asap if you want to be sure to go inside (see our guide to Colosseum tickets for more info). Rome is very busy at the moment. Have a great trip!

Monday 22nd of August 2022

Hi Jurga, I like your itinerary very much. Thank you for all the info. For Colosseum ticket, it includes Roman Forum and Palatine Hill also. Are there separate entries for the Forum and Palatine Hill? Can I go to the Forum first, get out to have lunch, then go Palatine Hill, and then see Colosseum at the last? Is this doable? The morning tickets are sold out, and no re-entry allowed, but I have to get out to have lunch, then enter to another, I wonder how they handle one ticket for three places. Thank you! -Chen

Hi Jurga, Thank you so much! Booked 12:30 tickets. I got another question. For Appian way, if I walk/hike it, can I see all the places in your pictures? I can't bike, but I can hike 7 miles. Or is there a tour bus? Thank you! -Chen

Hi Chen, you can enter Colosseum separately, but the Roman Forum and the Palatine Hill can only be visited together. So it’s three places but actually two tickets. You can do one of the two in the morning and the other after lunch, but you could also do everything after lunch if you prefer. Hope this clarifies. Enjoy your trip!

Tokyo Itinerary: How to Spend 4 PERFECT Days in Tokyo

by Julie Dec 25, 2023 Itinerary , Japan , Travel

There is so much to do and see in Tokyo that it can be hard to plan a trip there. But at the same time, because there’s so much to see in the rest of Japa n, you’ve got to limit your time in Tokyo. In this post, I’m going to help you squeeze everything you should see into a Tokyo itinerary of 4 days.

This Tokyo itinerary is great for those who want to explore the culture, history, and food of Japan . I’ve got tons of recommendations for places to eat, neighborhoods to explore, and museums to discover .

Let’s get started and find out what to see, where to eat, and how to get around this amazing city.

If you want to add some day trips to this itinerary , just check out my post on the 4 best day trips from Tokyo and my detailed Hakone itinerary. 

BONUS: I've created a FREE PDF version of my Japan itinerary guide . It includes detailed day-to-day itineraries for Tokyo, Kyoto, and 9 other destinations in Japan.  You'll also get step-by-step instructions for buying and using your Japan Rail Pass.

Click here to get lots of great tips for traveling around Asia as well as my FREE Japan itinerary guide. 

This 4-day Tokyo itinerary is also part of my 3 weeks in Japan itinerary . Check it out!

And if you’re looking for the perfect place to stay in Tokyo, you can find one in this article about how to find the best places to stay in Tokyo .

Disclosure: This post may contain affiliate links.  As an Amazon Associate and a Bookshop.org Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases.  Please see this website's  Disclosure for more info.

Tokyo Itinerary 4 Days Overview

Click on the day to jump to that section of the itinerary. You can do this itinerary in any order.

Day 0 – Airport arrival, airport transfer, and hotel check-in

Day 1 – Historical Tokyo Itinerary – Asakusa (1)  Ueno (2) Yanaka (3) Tokyo Sky Tree (4)

Day 2 – Modern Tokyo Itinerary – Harajuku (5), Shibuya (6)

Day 3 – Cultural Tokyo Itinerary – Tsukiji (7)- Ginza (8) – Akihabara (9)

Day 4 – Food and Fun Tokyo Itinerary – teamLab Borderless (11) – Shinjuku (12)

The above itinerary depends on where you’re staying. If your accommodation is in the Shinjuku area, I’d move (12) Shinjuku from Day 4 to Day 1. 

You can add a fifth day to your Tokyo itinerary by taking a day trip to Mt. Fuji, Hakone , Kamakura, or Nikko. All 4 of these cities are just 1 to 2 hours by bus or train from Tokyo. Read how to visit them in this 4 Best Day Trips from Tokyo .

Is a Japan Rail Pass Worth It?

Are you wondering  whether the Japan Rail Pass is worth it?

In this guide to the Japan Rail Pass , I break down the transportation prices for each of the destinations in this Japan itinerary of 3 weeks . Then I compare them to the 2024 price of a Japan Rail Pass.

You'll also find out where and how to purchase a Japan Rail Pass, how to activate the Pass when you get to Japan, and how to use the Pass. Check out the current Japan Rail Prices from my favorite travel agency in Japan or book your pass through Klook .

Tokyo Itinerary- Day 0 – Airport & hotel transfer

When you arrive at either the Narita Airport or the Haneda Airport, you’re going to need to take care of the following things before heading to your hotel/hostel:

1. Pick up Your Pocket WiFi or SIM Card

Order a pocket wifi or a SIM card before your trip to Japan and then p ick it up at the airport in Japan. You’ll need WiFi when you’re out and about trying to find your way or for checking train times.

I bought my pocket wifi from Japan Experience.

You can also buy a pocket WiFi or SIM card through Klook and pick it up at either Narita or Haneda. You can also rent a pocket WiFi with a power bank .

Get an eSIM

A third way is even easier. You can get an eSIM and not worry about having to pick up anything at the airport. Before leaving your home country, you purchase an eSIM with Klook or Airalo.

2. Validate Your Japan Rail Pass

Don’t leave the airport without validating your Japan Rail Pass at the Japan Rail office.

When you validate your pass, you can choose which day it begins . You don’t have to start the ticket on the day you validate it.

I bought my Japan Rail pass from Japan Experience.   You can also buy your pass through the very reliable Klook . 

3. Make Seat Reservations for Future Trail Travel

If you have a Japan Rail Pass, make seat reservations for future train travels at the Japan Rail office. Seat reservations are free for Japan Rail Pass holders. You can cancel or change them free of charge.

4. Get Some Japanese Yen

Get some Japanese currency from the many ATMs around the airport .

You can also get Japanese yen from ATMs at convenience stores like Family Mart and 7/11 after you get to your hotel, but it’s good to have some yen right away.

5. Get a SUICA or PASMO Card or an Unlimited Train Ticket

There are 2 types of transportation cards you can get at the airport in Tokyo:

• Unlimited Metro Pass (1-day, 2-days, or 3-days)
• IC card – Suica or PASMO

Unlimited Metro Pass for Tokyo

I used an Unlimited Tokyo Metro Pass (US$10.55) both times I was in Japan. It’s very convenient and a good deal. You don’t have to buy a new subway ticket every time you ride the subway.

You can get a Pass for 1 day, 2 days, or 3 days .

The Pass gives you unlimited train travel on the Tokyo Metro Line and the Tokyo Toei Line. It doesn’t include JR trains like the Yamanote Line.

You can buy the Pass before your trip from Klook or Get Your Guide.

IC Card – Suica or PASMO

Your second option is to get a Welcome SUICA or PASMO Passport card at the airport. SUICA and PASMO cards are used for taking public transportation like the subway, trains, and buses around Japanese cities. To use the card, load money onto it at a subway station and tap it at the subway gate to get onto the subway. You can also use the card for buying stuff at convenience stores or from vending machines. They are good for 28 days .

In the past, you could get the SUICA and PASMO cards at subway stations all over Tokyo. However, due to a chip shortage , these cards are hard to find. Read this AMAZING article on where you can now get these IC cards in Tokyo .

You can also order one from these online travel agencies before arriving in Japan: Klook or Japan Experienc e.

6. Stop at the Tourist Information Booth

At the  Tourist Information desk at the airport, you can find out how to get to your hotel . I originally got my info from someone on Trip Advisor. They told me the wrong train line! The information desk was correct!

7. Find Your Transport to Your Accommodations

You have several options for getting to your accommodations from Narita Haneda. What’s most important is that you arrive within walking distance of your hotel.

I recommend stopping by the Tourist Information Desk at the airport to find out what your best option is for getting to your accommodation.

Transport Options from Narita

1. Narita Expres s (¥4,070): buy tickets at the Japan Rail East Service Center office at the airport; a good option if staying in Shinjuku

2.   Keisei train (¥2,570) has several train lines. Buy your ticket at the Keisei Skyliner office at Narita. Keisei has a line called the Toie Asakusa line that goes to  Asakusa. You can also take the Keisei Skyliner train to Tokyo Station . Buy your ticket on the Skyliner ahead of time through Get Your Guide .

3.   Airport Bus TYO-NRT   (¥1,300 – 2,600) – The cheapest option is the airport bus. The bus goes to Ginza Station, Tokyo Station, Shinjuku and Disneyland . Purchase tickets at the ticket sales counter from 9:00 – 22:00 or at the bus stop outside of those hours. You can also purchase your bus ticket before your trip through Klook for US$9.15 .

Transport Options from Haneda

1. Keikyu Line – Buy tickets at the Keisei Skyliner ticket office.

2. Friendly Airport Limousine (¥950 – Asakusa; Shinjuku ¥1,250) connects to different hotels throughout Tokyo. Please see their website for information.

3 . Tokyo Monorail – Take the monorail to Hamamatsucho (¥500) where you then need to transfer to the JR Yamanote train line. 

My Experience Getting to/from Narita

For my first and second trips to Japan, I flew into Narita and stayed in Asakusa . To get to Asakusa, I took a Keisei train . Keisei trains have many lines, so it can be confusing. The wonderful people at the airport information desk told me to take the Toei Asakusa Line from Narita to Asakusa station (¥1290; over 1 hour) . On my first trip, I had to walk 15 minutes to my hotel. But I was too tired to walk, so I got a taxi for ¥960. On my second trip, my hotel was 5 minutes from the subway station.

When I left Tokyo , I was staying in Tsukiji . I took the Narita Express Bus from Ginza station (2 subway stops from Tsukiji; take exit C4 at Ginza) to Narita airport (¥1,000, 1 hour and 20 minutes) . The bus ride was so much preferable to the train because I didn’t need to go up and down subway stairs, figure out the ticket machines, and navigate the subway’s maze-like and crowded subway stations.

The second time I was in Tokyo , I was staying in Shinjuku . My hotel recommended that I take the Airport Bus to Narita. The bus had a shuttle that picked me up from my hotel and took me to the bus stop in Shinjuku. It was convenient!

Just make sure to get to the bus stop early as these airport buses can fill up , and if you can’t get on one, you need to wait 30-60 minutes for the next one.

You can also buy your bus ticket ahead of time online to ensure that you can get a seat.

By the way, if you have too much luggage you can use this luggage transfer service . Check this AMAZING article for packing tips for Japan . 

Tokyo Itinerary – Day 1 – Historic Tokyo

Asakusa – ueno – yanaka.

On day 1 of your 4 days in Tokyo, explore the traditional east side of Tokyo. Start off in Asakusa where Sensoji Temple, one of the most important Buddhist temples, is located, then head over to Ueno to visit the Tokyo National Museum before finishing your tour in Yanaka, a very traditional area of Tokyo.

1. Asakusa Area

Start off the day in Asakusa, an area that is famous for being the main temple, merchant, and entertainment area of old Tokyo.

How to Get to Asakusa:

There are two subway lines that get you to Asakusa Station: the Ginza and the Asakusa lines. When you’re inside Asakusa station, follow the signs for exit 1 to get to the temple district. You can also take exit 2 to get to the Asakusa Culture Tourist Center on Kaminarimon Street to pick up a map of the area.

Asakusa is where you’ll find the most important Buddhist temple in Tokyo, Sensoji Temple .

In old times, the outside area of the temple gate was where merchants and craftsmen would set up their businesses . The area near temples was safer than others because warlords would leave temples alone when attacking a community. These areas became known as the mon-zen machi (town in front of the temple gate). The merchant area in front of Sensojii Temple became particularly famous.

Asakusa was also well-known for being the entertainment district of old Tokyo . You could find lots of theaters in this area. Behind Sensoji temple was a famous prostitution area .

In the early morning , Asakusa is a wonderfully quiet and peaceful place . It’s so quiet that it’s hard to believe you’re in a city of 9 million people.

At night, there are just a few locals and tourists out and about . You can find locals drinking and eating outside on tables set up in quiet alleyways. However, it’s nowhere near as crazy as Shibuya or Shinjuku.

Is it Safe to Walk Around Late at Night?

I felt completely safe walking back to my hotel from the subway station at around 10:00 pm.

Where to Eat in Asakusa:

• Ippudo – ramen chain restaurant
• Sometaro – Okonomiyaki; really hot inside and often long waits; not ideal for solo travelers as it’s more of a group experience.
• Sushi Zanmai – chain sushi restaurant; I think they have pretty good sushi; get the tuna set for ¥3200; always filled with locals whenever I ate there
• Ichiran – near Ginza station; their ramen is better than Ippudo’s

1.1 Kaminarimon Gate

Start your day off at the Kaminarimon Gate. This is the outer gate of Sensoji Temple.

The Kaminarimon is named after the two statues located on both sides of the gate. The left statue is the god of thunder and the right one is the god of wind . They protect the Sensoji temple from storms, floods, and fire.

1.2 Nakamise-Dori Street

After passing through Kaminarimon Gate, walk up Nakamise-Dori Street to Sensoji Temple.

You’ll see lots of souvenir shops along the way especially ones selling rice cakes and green tea-flavored snacks. Supposedly, this street along with Shin-Nakamise Dori are the best places to buy souvenirs in Toky o.

Nakamise-Dori Street helped Asakusa become one of the main entertainment areas of old Tokyo.

The story goes that tea shops opened up along the road that led to Sensoji. After the shogun made Edo his capital, more and more people visited Sensoji. They would visit the tea shops on their way to the temple. This increase in business made the tea shop owners quite wealthy .

Naturally, tea shop competition increased as more and more people saw the money-making potential of having a tea shop outside Sensoji. To stay competitive, the owners needed to think of other ways to attract customers , so they started offering other forms of entertainment, hiring young women to serve tea. Sometimes they would offer other services as well and that is how prostitution became part of Asakusa. 

You can find out more info on the history of Tokyo from  this wonderful website on the history of Tokyo and  the history of Japan podcast.

Read Before You Go to Japan:

• Tokyo Vice – By Jake Adelstein
• A Death in Tokyo – By Keigo Higashino
• Tokyo Ueno Station – By Yu Miri
• The Little Teashop on Tokyo – By Julie Caplin

1.3 Senso-ji Temple

• OPEN : 6:00/6:30 am – 5:00 pm
• SUBWAY STATION: Asakusa Station
• LOCATION: Google Maps

Finally, you’ll make it to Sensoji Shrine. The temple was first built in 628 . Like many structures in Tokyo, it burned down many times over the centuries, including during World War II.

Go through the bright red gate called Hozomon Gate , the inner gate of Sensoji Temple.

After you pass through the gate, look back at it and notice the two large straw sandals . The sandals are called o-waraji . People offer waraji to temples to pray for safe travels and healthy legs. Without healthy legs, one can’t work, and if one can’t work, one can’t eat.

Before going into the main hall, get an omikuji , which is a paper fortune.

To get your fortune told , put a 100 yen coin in a slot. Then shake a canister until a wooden stick falls out. The stick contains a number on it that's written in Kanji. Find the drawer that corresponds to the number on your stick. Pull out a paper fortune from the drawer. The fortunes can be both good and bad. Mine was good, but the person I was with got a bad fortune . If you get a bad one, you’re supposed to tie the paper fortune to a nearby rack.

When you enter the huge temple, you’ll notice that there are no Buddha statues even though this is a Buddhist temple.

You’re not allowed to take any pictures of the altar when inside the temple.

1.4 Shin-Nakimise Dori and/or Dembouin Dori Street

After visiting Senso Ji Temple, walk around Asakusa for a while walking under the covered pedestrian-only arcades . These are Shin-Nakimise Dori and Dembouin Doir Streets. They’re full of souvenir shops and restaurants.

If you walk east along one of these streets, you’ll eventually make it back to the subway station .

Pro Tip – Getting Around Tokyo

Tokyo has an amazing subway/train system. It’ll take you anywhere you want to go. But it can get expensive. One ride will cost you from ¥150 to ¥500 .

You can pay for transportation in several ways.

1. You can buy individual tickets each time you take the train or subway.

2. Another way is to get a Suica or PASMO IC card  and just add money to the card at a subway kiosk machine and swipe it every time you take the train or subway. Very convenient.

Due to a chip shortage, you’re limited on where you can get a Suica or PASMO card as of the fall of 2023. So, read this AMAZING article on all the different places to get a Suica or PASMO card .  Alternatively, you can get a Suica card  from an online travel agency like Klook before your trip. 

3. A better option is to get the 24-, 48-, or 72-hour train passes . With these passes, you can travel as much as you want on any Tokyo Metro or Toei Metro subway line for one price (except for the JR lines).

It’s super convenient. It’ll save you from always scrounging for money and it often ends up being cheaper than using a Suica or Pasmo card or buying individual tickets.

You can buy the pass at the airport or tourist information centers (Asakusa). Some hotels also sell them. You can also buy them online from Get Your Guide or Klook and have them sent to your hotel or your home .

2. Ueno Area

The next stops on your Tokyo itinerary are the Ueno and Yanaka districts .  To get to Ueno, hop on the subway and travel 3 stops on the Ginza line to Ueno station .

Ueno’s subway station was famous after the war for being the place where all the homeless (veterans, widows, and orphans) camped out .

A famous post-WWII black market was also located outside the subway station called Ameyokocho . Today the market is full of discount stores, souvenir shops, and restaurants.

The whole area is now known for a terrific park and several of Tokyo’s best museums.

Where to Eat in Ueno and Yanaka:

• Kamachiku – I ate here. They have delicious soba noodles in a beautiful old building
• Izuei Honten – it’s supposed to have good unagi
• Starbucks – This coffee shop is in a convenient location in Ueno Park
• Hantei – I’ve eaten here. The restaurant is in a beautiful traditional wooden building. Very delicious . It’s a set multi-course meal. A bit pricey. I felt comfortable eating here solo.
• Nagomi – They serve skewers

2.1 Tokyo National Museum

• COST: ¥1,000 (US$7.78 | €7.5 | £6.38); ¥500 for college students
• OPEN: 9:30 am  – 5:00 pm (last entry is 30 minutes before closing)
• WEBSITE: https://www.tnm.jp/
• SUBWAY STATION: Ueno Station

When you get to Ueno, head to the Ueno-Koen park. There’s a lot to see in the park: a zoo, a lotus pond, and several museums . The park is huge and with such limited time, I suggest going straight to the museum.

Inside the park is the main museum of Tokyo: the Tokyo National Museum. The museum has five buildings with exhibits:

1. Honkan Gallery – Must-see: the “Highlights of Japanese Art” on the second floor . The second floor gives you an excellent overview of Japanese Art from the Jomon period (11,000 BCE – 5th Century BCE) to the Edo period (1603-1868). The first floor is organized by genre, which is also good but not as good as the 2nd floor. One painting not to miss is the Hakusai’s “Great Wave of Kanagawa.” It’s at the end of the tour on the 1st floor.

2. Heiseikan Gallery: This gallery focuses on Japanese archaeology . I’m into archaeology, so I enjoyed touring it. It’s connected to the Honkan by a passageway.

3. Hyokeikan Gallery: This gallery is closed unless there’s a special exhibition.

4. Toyokan Gallery: This gallery shows art and artifacts from Asia including China, Central Asia, and India. I didn’t get to visit this gallery.

5. The Gallery of Horyuji Treasures: This gallery exhibits 8th and 9th-century objects from Horyuji Temple . Lonely Planet highly recommends visiting this gallery. I did not have time. There is a restaurant on the 1st floor.

The one building that you must start with and go to if you’re limited on time is the Honkan Gallery . It’s the above picture.

You can pay one price ( ¥1,000 for adults; ¥500 for students and free for children ) for all regular exhibits in all galleries at the ticket booth on the right side of the main gate to the museum.

When you get inside the Honkan, you’ll see lockers where you can store your stuff.

Take the grand staircase in the lobby of the museum to the second floor. The second floor gives you an excellent overview of the art from different periods in Japan’s history.

Make sure to get the excellent written guide to the museum on the second floo r before you enter the first room.

3. Yanaka Area

After visiting the Tokyo National Museum, explore the lovely and tranquil Yanaka neighborhood .

It’s quite a long walk from the museum to this area. But it’s well worth it. In Yanaka, you’ll get to see a more traditional side of Tokyo . Historically, this area was where the artists of Tokyo lived . It is still home to many artisans making things like pottery, textiles, and traditional cuisine.

There are lots of temples and a cool cemetery in Yanaka .

The food is another highlight of Yanaka. I had some great udon noodles at a beautiful restaurant called Kamachiko and on another visit, I ate at the famous Hantai restaurant .

End your walk at Sendagi Station .

You might be interested in these Japan travel posts:

• Kyoto Itinerary 4 Days: A City of a Million Temples
• The Best Ever Guide to the Tateyama Kurobe Alpine Route
• Kamikochi Hiking: A Perfect Day Trip from Takayama

4. Tokyo Sky Tree

• COST: Floor 350 – ¥2060; Floor 450 – additional ¥1,030. You first need to go to the 350 th floor and then buy another ticket for the 450 th floor
• OPEN: 8:00-22:00

Finish your first day in Tokyo at the tallest building in the city, the Tokyo Sky Tree . You’ll get some memorable views of the city.

.You can buy tickets online for the Sky Tree to avoid the long lines, or you can buy tickets on the fourth floor at the Sky Tree . They might be sold out by the time you get there, though.

The photo above is from the 350th floor.

PRO TIP:  If you are lucky to be in Tokyo in January, March, May, July, September, or November , you can watch a sumo tournament at Ryogoku Kokugikan Sumo Stadium . Check here for how to buy tickets. If you can’t make it to a sumo match, you can always watch the professional sumo wrestlers do their morning training exercises .

Tokyo Itinerary – Day 2 – Modern Tokyo

Harajuku – shibuya.

Spend the second day of your 4 days in Tokyo exploring the modern side of the city with its neon lights, skyscrapers, and hoards of fashion-crazy young people.

I lived in Asia for many years, but I’d never experienced any place as dynamic and as vibrant as Harajuku, Shibuya, and Shinjuku . I’m not into partying and shipping, yet these neighborhoods were two of my favorite areas of Tokyo .

1. Harajuku Area

Harajuku is one of the most fashionable areas of Tokyo with its designer stores and boutiques. However, there’s also a famous shrine , some charming museums , and a fun energetic street full of fashion, food, and young people.

Where to Eat in Harajuku

• Harajuku Gyoza-ro – ( Google Maps ) – This is where I ate. It’s a famous gyoza restaurant; they’re used to having foreign customers – 6 gyoza – ¥319 – ¥374 (US$2.45/£1.99/€2.32) – What a deal!
• Marion Crepes – ( Google Maps ) – You can find these crepes all over Tokyo; looking at the plastic replicas of the crepes is almost as fun as actually eating one
• A Happy Pancake – ( Google Maps ) – I had breakfast here; make sure to try Japan’s fluffy pancakes
• Kawaii Monster Café – They permanently closed as of January 31, 2021. It’s too bad as this was a fun restaurant.
• Afuri – ( Google Maps ) – I love the ramen here ; they charcoal grill the pork and add yuzu to the broth.

1.1 Meiji Shrine

• OPEN: sunrise to sunset
• SUBWAY STOP: Meiji-jingumae Station or the JR line to Harajuku Station.
• LOCATION OF ENTRANCE: Google Maps

Start day 2 of your 4-day Tokyo itinerary at Tokyo’s most popular shrine, the Meiji Shrine, in Harajuku.

Over 3 million people visit the shrine during the first few days of the New Year. To make the most of your visit, make sure to perform all the Shinto rituals. You can read about how to perform the rituals in my Meiji Shrine guide.

Don’t forget to write your wishes on the votive tablets under the big camphor tree. You can get detailed information about the   Meiji Shrine here.

1.2 Omotesando Street

Take a stroll down Omotesando and window shop. You can see lots of designer-brand stores.

Make sure to stop at Kiddy La nd — ( Google Maps ) a 5-storey toy store .

1.3 Explore the narrow side streets

Next, explore some of the side streets off of Omotesando. It’s easy to get lost (I did!), though.

The narrow winding streets are filled with beautiful boutiques, cafes, and restaurants.

Make sure to walk down Cat Street ( Google Maps ).

What stood out for me was how incredibly quiet i t was as if I wasn’t even in a big city. That’s Tokyo. One moment you’re on a street teeming with an ocean of people and cars and the next you are on a quiet street without a car or human being around you. 

1.4 Ukiyo-e Ota Memorial Museum of Art

• COST : ¥800 – 1,200 depending on the exhibition (US$6-$9/£5-8/€6-9)
• OPEN : 10:30 am – 5:30 pm
• WEBSITE:   http://www.ukiyoe-ota-muse.jp/eng

Visit the small Ukiyo-e Ota Museum, a museum devoted to beautiful ukiyo-e woodblock prints .

Ukiyo-e means the floating world in Japanese . This was the pleasure world of kabuki actors, geishas, and prostitutes (the outcasts of Edo society) during the Edo and Meiji periods in Japan.

The museum rotates its collection every month .

You could spend about 1 hour here.

1.5 Takeshita-dori

Your final stop on your Harajuku itinerary is a street called Takeshita-dori ( Google Maps ), which is not far from the museum.

This is Tokyo’s teenage fashion street where young people from all over Japan go to shop.

Be forewarned that the street is jam-packed with people . I loved it. 

Looking for More Info on Japan...

• Japan Itinerary: The Perfect 3 Weeks in Japan
• How to Find the Perfect Place to Stay in Tokyo
• Hakone Itinerary: A Guide for 2 Fabulous Days in Hakone

2. Shibuya Area

The next stop on your Tokyo itinerary is a trip to  Shibuya. You can take the subway or walk to get there from Harajuku .

Make sure to stay around the area until it gets dark , so you can see all the neon lights .

Check out the Shibuya Crossing, the famous Hachiko statue, wander around the pedestrian streets, and do a ramen food tour.

I was so tired after my day in Harajuka that I went all the way back to my hotel in Asakusa to rest and then went back to Shibuya later in the evening.

Where to Eat in Shibuya

• Starbucks – A great place to watch Shibuya crossing
• Kamakura – Great ramen restaurant – I ended up eating here both times I was in Shibuya. Decent. Lots of foreign tourists end up here.
• Ichiran – A chain ramen restaurant–for me, they have the best ramen
• 35 Steps Bistro – Izakaya with English menu – Tripadvisor reviews
• Food Show – Supermarket where the bento boxes are discounted after 5:00
• Sushi no midori – I tried finding this place, but no luck. The sushi is supposed to be really good.
• Kaikaya by the Sea – Good seafood

2.1 Hachiko Statue

The story goes that back in the 1920s, a professor had a dog named Hachiko who would meet him every day after work at Shibuya Station. The professor died, but the dog kept on showing up for the next 8 years to meet his owner at the station. Hachiko is a sign of loyalty in Japanese culture . It’s popular to take a photo of yourself with the statue .

2.2 Shibuya Crossing

Shibuya Crossing is famous for the scramble where cars are stopped at all intersections to let all of the pedestrians cross at the same time . Surrounding the crossing are buildings adorned with neon lights and large video screens. For me, it was one of my biggest OMG I can’t believe I’m in Japan! m oments in Tokyo.

You can take a rest at the Starbucks that overlooks the crossing and watch people walk back and forth.

2.3 Wander Around Shibuya

After you’ve done Shibuya Crossing a number of times and gotten your photo taken with Hachiko, walk around the back streets of Shibuya taking in the energy of all the people, food, bars, and neon lights.

2.4 Ramen Food Tour

One of the BEST ways to experience Shibuya and Tokyo in general is through its food . Shibuya has a very popular and highly rated food tour devoted solely to one of Tokyo’s most iconic dishes: ramen.

Do you know how many different types of ramen there are?

According to Tasting Table, there are 27 types of ramen . But others say there are 5 main types and 14 regional varieties . Who knows? It’s best to take the tour and find out from the experts . Or you can also visit the ramen museum in Yokohama/

Tokyo Ramen Tours takes you to 3 Tokyo neighborhoods including Shibuya. You’ll visit 3 ramen shops where you get to sample 6 different bowls of ramen as well as learn all about where the popular noodle soup comes from and how it’s made.

Tokyo Itinerary – Day 3 – Cultural Tokyo

Tsukiji – ginza – akihabara.

Your 3rd day on your 4-day Tokyo itinerary is spent sampling Tokyo street food and experiencing Japanese traditional culture at the Kabuki-za Theater and modern culture at Akihabara.

1. Tsukiji Area

The highlight of Tsukiji is the Tsukiji Food Market . If you have time, also check out the Namiyoke Shrine . The Hamarikyu Gardens are within walking distance of Tsukiji Market but they’re huge so you’ll need 2 or 3 hours to see much. 

1.1 Tsukiji Outer Market

Start day 3 of your 4 days in Japan by visiting the Tsukiji Outer Marke t for some amazing sushi and street food . Make sure you get here before 9:00 am so that you can get to the next stop of your Japan itinerary on time.

Tsukiji Market used to consist of both the Inner Market and the Outer Market . The Inner Market was the wholesale market and it was where the tuna auction took place. That market moved to new facilities at Toyosu Market.

The Outer Market is all that is left. You can still sample street food (tamagoyaki, raw oysters, Kobe beef, sea urchins, and grilled seafood) at the many street vendors or have a sushi breakfast at the remaining sushi restaurants. Many of the famous restaurants moved to Toyosu but still have a branch in Tsukiji.

A great way to explore the market is with this VERY popular and VERY highly-rated guided food tour of Tsukiji ( RATED: 4.9/5). You get to learn all about the history of the market and local foods. Plus you get to try lots of different foods: fried fish cakes, a Japanese omelet, Japanese tea, katsuobushi, dashi stock, and a fish bowl (food is included in the price).

2. Ginza Area

Ginza is home to m any upscale shops, restaurants, and cafes . It’s considered one of the most expensive pieces of real estate in the world.

Historically during the Edo period, a silver coin mint was located there , hence the name Ginza , which means “silver mint.”

When Japan was opening up to the outside world, the buildings in Ginza became the first ones to be modernized . European-style brick buildings were constructed. The area also became the media center of Tokyo where there wee lots of newspaper and magazine publishers . Unfortunately, during the war, many of these buildings were destroyed by American bombs.

Where to Eat in Ginza:

• Mitsukoshi Department Store – buy some food in the basement and go to the 9th floor to eat it; this is where I ate
• Kyubey – sushi – very expensive but cheaper at lunch
• Sushizanmai – great sushi (¥3,000 for a set meal of tuna); picture menus; I ate at their restaurant in Tsukiji, Asakusa, and Shinjuku

2.1 Kabuki-za Theater

• COST FOR SINGLE ACT SEATS: ¥1,200-¥2,600 (US$9 – $18 | €8 – €17 | £7 – £15) depending on the length of the show
• SHOWTIMES: 6 – 7 acts/day; first act: 11:00 am; last act: 8:00 pm
• TICKET SALES : Online the day before the performance; 10:00 am on the day of the performance. Seats are limited.
• WEBSITE: Kabukiza Theater  
• SUBWAY STATION: Higashi-Ginza station

The next stop after Tsukiji is the Kabuki-za Theater in Ginza.

Kabuki is Japan’s traditional dance-drama performance . The stories are historical dramas and comedies set in old Japan. They center around samurai, geisha, and the common people of Japan and involve tales of ambition, betrayal, revenge, and broken hearts.

Watching a kabuki performance was the highlight of my trip . I loved the story, costumes, and acting.

How to Get to the Kabuki-za Theater:

From the Tsukiji Market, it’s a 10-minute walk .

If you’re coming from outside the area, take the subway to the Higashi-Ginza station . The theater is right next to the subway station. Just follow the signs for Kabuki-za.

At the Kabukiza Theater , there are usually 2 Kabuki shows a day:

• Matinee – 11:00 am
• Evening – 4:00 pm

Each show consists of 3 – 4 acts and can last up to 4 hours . Tickets can also be quite expensive (up to ¥17,000)

However, the good news for tourists is this:

Kabukiza Theater has made kabuki more accessible for tourists by allowing them to buy tickets for just one act , meaning you don’t need to stay for the whole 4-hour show . These are called Single Act Tickets.

There are usually 6 to 7 acts per day . Some acts are 30 minutes, while others are 60 to 90 minutes. You can choose to go to any act.

The person who was managing the line for the tickets told me to avoid the 30-minute shows as they’re only dancing.

Shows change each month , and the number of acts per day and start times vary . Check the Kabukiza Theater website for that month’s performance.

To give you some idea of the start times and prices for each act, here they are for November 2023 :

Matinee Show

• Act 1 – 11:00 am – 12:32 pm – ¥1,400
• Act 2 – 1:07 pm – 2:07 pm – ¥1,300
• Act 3 – 2:27 pm – 3:30 pm – ¥1,300

Evening Show

• Act 1 – 4:30 pm — 5:35 pm – ¥1,400
• Act 2 – 6:20 pm – 7:40 pm – ¥1,300
• Act 3 – 8:00 pm – 8:59 pm – ¥1,300

How to Buy Single-Act Tickets:

There are 2 ways to buy the Single Act Tickets .

• Reserved Seats – Tickets go on sale at 12:00 pm (noon) the day before the performance. Buy online with credit card. You can buy up to 4 tickets per person.There are 70 reserved seats.
• Non-reserved Seats – Tickets go on sale at 10:00 am on the day of the performance. Cash only. You can only buy 1 ticket per person. There are 20 non-reserved seats.

Although the performances are in Japanese, you can rent a portable translator that translates the whole show .  The translation machine didn’t distract me from the show.

Check Out These Hidden Gems:

• Takayama Itinerary: How to Spend 2 Days in Japan's "Little Kyoto"
• Travel Guide to Shirakawago: Enter a Japanese Fairy Tale
• Day Trip to Nara: A Suggested Itinerary

3. Akihabara Area

Day 3 of this 4-day Tokyo itinerary ends with a visit to Akihabara.

Akihabara is famous for its electronics, video games, and anime and manga shop s. If you want to see the famous maid cafes , then Akihabara is the perfect stop on your Tokyo itinerary.

To get the best experience of this area, take a stroll along Chuo Dori Street .

If you need to buy camera equipment, stop at Bic Camera or Yodobashi Camera.

If you spend at least ¥5000 in one store in one day , your purchase is tax-free . You will need your passport with you to not pay any taxes. You must leave Japan within 30 days. 

Tokyo Itinerary – Day 4 – Fun Tokyo

Tokyo bay – shinjuku.

This is my favorite day of the itinerary because today you’re going to one of my favorite museums in the world and finally to my favorite area of Tokyo, Shinjuku.

1. Tokyo Bay

You’ll be crossing Tokyo Bay to Odaiba , a collection of islands of reclaimed land.

1.1 teamLab Planets or teamLab Borderless

• COST OF TEAMLAB PLANETS: ¥3,800 (US$27 | €24 | £21) for adults; ¥1,300-¥2,300 for children | ¥1,900 disabled person discount
• COST OF TEAMLAB BORDERLESS: Closed until Feb 9, 2024; tickets go on sale Jan 16, 2024 – check website for price
• TIMES FOR PLANETS: 9:00 am – 10:00 pm (every day)
• BUYING TICKETS: teamLab Planets with Get Your Guide ; teamLab Planets with Klook
• LOCATION: teamLab Planets ; the new teamLab Borderless in Azabudai

Day 4 of your 4-day Japan itinerary starts at teamLab Borderless, a digital art museum. Teamlab Borderless wasn’t in my guidebook when I first visited Japan. But I’d seen so many Instagram photos of it that I had to check it out on my next trip to Japan. Instagram didn’t do it justice .

There are 2 teamLab museums in Tokyo :

• teamLab Borderless
• teamLab Planets

Both museums exhibit interactive digital art . Artwork is displayed digitally on the walls, ceilings, and floors and changes as you move barefoot from room to room. The concept is that there is no border between art, design, and technology and between humans and nature.

teamLab Planets is a temporary museum that focuses on water and flowers . It was supposed to close in 2020 but it proved to be so popular that the museum will remain open until 2027 . Wear shorts as you will need to walk through water but not a skirt as the floors have mirrors.

I have only visited teamLab Borderless and loved it!  teamLab Planets also gets rave reviews.

Expect to stay between 2 and 3 hours.

It’s very popular so buy your tickets ahead of time . Get Your Guide also sells tickets for teamLab Planets .

Getting to teamLab Planets in Toyosu:

Toyosu is located in Odaiba and often takes 1 hour to get to from most popular tourist districts in Tokyo.

• Take the Yurakucho Line and get off at Shijo Mae Station. Then  walk 5 minutes to teamLab Planets
• Take the Yurikamome Line and get off at Shin Toyosu Station. Then walk 1 minute to teamLab Planets or
• Take the Yurikamome Line and get off at Toyosu Station. Then  walk 10 minutes to teamLab Planets.

I couldn’t use my 72-hour Unlimited Train Pass on the Yurikamome Line as the pass only works on the Tokyo Metro and Toei Subway Lines.

Getting to teamLab Borderless in Azabudai:

The good news is that teamLab Borderless’s new location is close to Roppongi District which makes it closer to Shinjuku and Asakusa Districts.

• Take the Tokyo Metro Hibaya Line to Kamiyacho Station and take Exit 5 to teamLab Borderless.
• Take the Tokyo Metro Namboku Line to Roppongi-Itchome Station . Take Exit 2 and walk 4 minutes to teamLab Borderless

2. Shinjuku Area

End day 4 of this Tokyo itinerary by touring Shinjuku . This is my favorite area in Tokyo.

The BEST time to experience Shinjuku is at night when the neon lights turn on, the crowds come out, the crazy cafes and izakayas fill with people, and the narrow alleyways with their tiny bars buzz with life.

Yes, you’ll see signs for sex shops, sex shows, host and hostess bars, love hotels, etc. But it doesn’t feel seedy or dangerous even walking alone at night.

The interesting thing is that Shinjuku has always had a shady reputation . It began as a post town on one of Edo’s main highways, where travelers stopped to rest.

Then it became one of Edo’s six licensed pleasure quarters , catering to a more working-class clientele . Soon Shinjuku grew into a bustling area of shops, inns, theaters, and teahouses.

In the late 1800s, its population began to grow when newly built railway lines began carrying passengers to Shinjuku. It grew even more after the 1923 earthquake destroyed much of the eastern part of the city. People started to live in Shinjuku and it lost a bit of its bad-boy reputation.

However, Shinjuku’s shady past came back with a vengeance when immediately after the war, the yakuza opened Tokyo’s largest black market in Shinjuku .

Starting in the 1950s, Shinjuku’s dark alleys with their tiny bars and izakayas have attracted intellectuals and student radicals . Nowadays add a whole bunch of tourists to the mix and you have Tokyo’s version of a red-light district.

Where to Eat in Shinjuku

• Sushi Zanmai
• Fuunji – ramen
• Tsunahachi Shinjuku – tempura

2.1 Kabukicho

Take a stroll around Kabukicho , the Red Light District. Don’t worry about walking around this area by yourself. The streets are packed with tourists. It may be seedier than most other parts of Tokyo, but I felt safe when I was there.

Take a look inside Don Quixote store . It’s a multi-storied store selling everything from food to maid costumes. The aisles are so narrow and jam-packed with goods that it’s difficult to walk down them. It’s not a great store if you’re claustrophobic.

2.2 Omoide Yokocho

The highlight of a tour of Shinjuku is a walk down Omoide Yokocho or Memories Lane . Another name for it is Piss Alley . It’s a very narrow alley lined with red lanterns and tiny bars and yakitori restaurants .

2.3 Shinjuku Golden Gai

Golden Gai is a seedy but atmospheric area of around 200 small bars . Just walk around and find one that seems open to tourists.

I went to Araku Golden Gai bar. Look for the red sign and the red staircase. 

The bartender speaks English and there’s an English menu. When I was in Golden Gai, everyone was excited by the fact that Quentin Tarantino had just been there.

Visiting some of these tiny bars in Shinjuku as a foreigner can be intimidating. Some of the bars would rather you not visit as they’re more for locals. I went to all the tiny bars in Omoide Yokocho and Golden Gai on a guided tour .  

More ideas for your trip to Japan:

• Matsumoto Itinerary: Exploring Japan's Coolest Castle
• Hiroshima and Miyajima Day Trip Itinerary
• Hiking in the Japan Alps: Perfect Day Trip from Takayama

Where to stay in Tokyo

One of the hardest decisions to make about Tokyo is where to stay . So, I wrote this post on how to find the best places to stay in Tokyo (even on a budget) .

I’ve stayed in three different areas of Tokyo: Asakusa, Tsukiji, and Shinjuku. All of them have their pros and cons. However, I prefer Asakusa for its price and the laid-back vibe of the neighborhood and Shinjuku for its excitement and energy .

My favorite hotel was the Hotel Gracery Shinjuku . It’s the one with the Godzilla head sticking out of it . A bit gimmicky, I know, but you can’t blame the hotel for trying. It’s in the perfect location: right in the heart of Kabukicho and just a five-minute walk from Shinjuku Station . 

Grab a FREE Japan Itinerary Guide

Get all my great travel tips as well as this FREE Japan travel and itinerary guide sent to your email right away!

You have Successfully Subscribed!

Final thoughts: tokyo itinerary.

After you’ve explored Tokyo for 4 days, where should you go next?

I highly recommend taking a trip to Hakone for 1 or 2 days , where you can soak in a traditional onsen, see some fabulous art, delve into Tokyo’s history, take one of Japan’s most Instagram-worthy shots, and perhaps get a glimpse of Mt. Fuji.

Other amazing day trips or overnight trips close to Tokyo include Kamakura, Nikko, and Mt. Fuji.

If you’re following my 3-week Japan itinerary , your next stop is to visit the Japan Alps and the magical towns of Takayama and Shirakawa-go .

Best Resources for Your Trip to Japan

Book your flights for japan.

Use Skyscanner to find the cheapest flights to Japan. They will turn up results for all airlines including major ones and local airlines. You’re going to find EVERYTHING that’s available and thus get the cheapest price.

Book Your Accommodations for Japan:

The best hotel booking sites for Japan are Booking.com and Agoda . They have the biggest selection, and they consistently churn out hotels and hostels at the lowest prices of any other booking site. Another website for backpackers and budget travelers is Hostel World .

Book Your Tours for Japan:

The three best tour booking sites for Japan are Viator , Get Your Guide , and Klook . Viator has the biggest selection. Get Your Guide has terrific customer service. Klook specializes in tours in Asia.

Get Connected when in Japan:

You’ve got 3 options for staying connected in Japan: a pocket WiFi (what I used), a physical SIM card , or an eSIM . Several companies offer eSIMs for Japan. I recommend getting one through Klook or Airalo .

Book your Japan Rail Passes:

Japan has many different types of passes. The JR Pass is one of the most popular passes. Buy them through Klook before your trip to Japan. There are other passes as well like the Hakone Freepass .

Get Your Rail Pass for Tokyo

Get an unlimited train pass for most metro lines in Tokyo. They’re good for 1, 2, or 3 days. I always get the 3-day pass.

Are you on Pinterest?

Hey! How about saving one of these pins to Pinterest to read for later?

And feel free to follow me on Pinterest, where you'll find lots of travel articles for everywhere around the world.

Looking for more info on Japan? Check out these posts:

• Tokyo Itinerary: How to Spend 4 Perfect Days in Tokyo
• Hakone Itinerary: How to Spend 2 Days in Hakone
• Kyoto Itinerary 4 Weeks: A City of a Million Temples
• Nara Itinerary: The Perfect Day Trip from Kyoto
• Matsumoto Itinerary: Exploring Japan’s Coolest Castle
• Shirakawago Itinerary: Enter a Japanese Fairytale
• The Ultimate Day Trip to Hiroshima and Miyajima
• Kamikochi Hiking: The Perfect Day Trip from Takayama
• Takayama Itinerary: Travel Back in Time to Old Japan
• The Best Ever Guide to Japan’s Tateyama Kurobe Alpine Route
• Top 10 Must-See Places to Visit in Kyoto
• 13 Things You Need to Know Before Going to Japan
• The 20 Best Novels to Read Before Visiting Japan
• A Foolproof Japan Packing List

26 Comments

I absolutely love that I sound this post! I have been planning to go in January but then I thought I might as well brave the tourists and go in March. I have been planning to spend exactly 4 days in Tokyo so I am saving this article. thanks for this.

I’m glad this will be helpful! Tokyo is such a great place!

What a great post, so extensive. I absolutely loved Tokyo and I definitely want to go back one day. Didn’t know the Tsukiji market changed location! Reason to go to Toyosu Market during my next visit.

I’m so sad that it has moved. Now it’s kind of out of the way and the new place I hear doesn’t have the character that Tsukiji had.

Thanks for writing such a super detailed post! I can’t wait to visit Tokyo one day and you’ve given me serious wanderlust!

You should definitely visit! For me, it was one of the most exciting cities that I’ve been to.

Tokyo is number one on my bucket list right now! I really appreciate the time you put into this itinerary– it’s super helpful as a starting point for my trip! I’m especially interested in Harajuku and all the fun cafes!!

Thanks! I hope you get a chance to go soon! It’s a great city!

Great blog. This has been on mutt bucket list for so long.

Thanks! I hope you get a chance to go to Tokyo soon! It’s a great city!

WOW! this is such an incredibly comprehensive and complete itinerary… I’m definitely saving it for when I go to Tokyo! You’ve got me craving ramen too! 🙂

Thanks! Ever since I went to Tokyo, I’ve been craving ramen like crazy! I hope you get a chance to go soon!

You made me miss Japan! I wish I had more time in Tokyo but with only 2 days, I just ate and relaxed. Ha! Saving your post for when I go back for some sightseeing 🙂

I also wish I had spent more time in Tokyo!

Thank you for the wonderful itinerary ideas…gives me a great idea how to plan for my upcoming 4 days in Tokyo! It looks like a great place to visit.

Thanks! I hope you have a fabulous trip to Tokyo! It’s an amazing, unforgettable city.

Tokyo is on our bucket list and your post want me to go and see it even more. Im pinning it for later

I hope you get a chance to travel there soon! It’s definitely worth it. I was surprised by how much I loved Japan.

I am staying in Shinjuku now and wondering how to spend a couple of days that are currently unplanned. This is extremely helpful and love that you included restaurants in each area. This is the best article I have found and am planning Kyoto solely from your recommendations also. One thing to include in Tokyo is information on attending baseball games. Can’t thank you enough!

Hi Jill, Thank you so much! I’m glad you found this useful. I’ll be back in Tokyo soon and will hopefully have time to research more places, especially restaurants. I’ll definitely look into including more information on attending a baseball game in Tokyo.

Wow what an amazing write up about Tokyo. Loved the Japan Rail pass, got to see so much more of Japan than I thought during my two weeks there.

Hi Patrick, Glad you found the JR Pass so useful!

“The wonderful people at the airport information desk told me to take the Toei Asakusa Line from Narita to Asakusa station (¥1290; over 1 hour)”

Hi, can you explain more on this? Because I can’t find the route for it. Does the Toei Asakusa Line included Narita in their map?

Hi Gee, The Tokyo train system is very confusing. Before my trip, I couldn’t find this route either, but it does exist. A few paragraphs above the quote is a link to the Keisei Electric Railway website that has information on the Keisei train that connects Narita and Asakusa Station. https://www.keisei.co.jp/keisei/tetudou/skyliner/us/traffic/index.php The people at the information desk called it the Toei Asakusa Line of Keisei Railway. The train arrives at the same station and same tracks as the normal Toei Asakusa Line that you see on the Tokyo subway maps.

Julie These guides look great. I very much would love a pdf of your Tokyo and Kyoto itineraries but can’t seem to download them. You also should get some kind of compensation for your hard work. Do you offer to guide any trips????? Thanks

Hi Robert, Thanks! I’m glad you you found the guides useful. I’m not sure how to download them. I don’t do any guided trips.

Submit a Comment Cancel reply

Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

Submit Comment

This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed .

What are you looking for?

About the bamboo traveler.

Welcome to The Bamboo Traveler, a travel blog dedicated to helping those travelers who want to dig deeply into the history, heritage, and culture of a place. Whether it’s through the pages of your passport or the pages of a book, I’ll help you travel the world and uncover the history, culture, food, architecture, and natural beauty of some of the world’s most fascinating places.

Traveling to Japan soon?

Japan itinerary posts.

• Japan Itinerary : The Perfect 3 Weeks in Japan
• Hakone Itinerary : How to Spend 2 Days in Hakone
• Kamikochi Hiking : The Perfect Day Trip from Takayama
• Kanazawa Itinerary: 2 Days in the City of Samurais
• Kyoto Itinerary 4 Weeks : A City of a Million Temples
• Matsumoto Itinerary : Exploring Japan’s Coolest Castle
• Nara Itinerary : The Perfect Day Trip from Kyoto
• Takayama Itinerary : Travel Back in Time to Old Japan
• Tokyo Itinerary : How to Spend 4 Perfect Days in Tokyo

Posts About Kyoto

• Kyoto Itinerary: A City of a Million Temples
• Top 10 Must-Visit Places in Kyoto
• The Best of Kyoto: Fushimi Inari Shrine
• The Best of Kyoto: The Bamboo Forest
• The Best of Kyoto: Kinkaku-ji Temple
• The Best of Kyoto: Tenryu-ji Temple

Preparing for a Trip to Japan

• Top 10 Must-Visit Places to Visit in Kyoto
• Traveling Solo in Japan: The Good, the Bad, and the Ugly
• Don’t Panic: What to do if you need a doctor in Japan

Get Your FREE Japan Itinerary Guide Here!

Subscribe to my newsletter to receive the latest travel tips for Asia and get a free 4-page PDF version of my 3-Week Japan Itinerary.

Pin It on Pinterest

• Salkantay Trek
• Inca Jungle Trek
• Huchuy Qosqo Trek
• Ausangate Trek
• Vilcabamba Trek
• Choquequirao Trek
• Huayna Picchu
• Altitude Sickness
• Packing List
• Humantay Lake
• Lake Titicaca
• Nazca Lines
• Rainbow Mountain
• Get A Trek Quote

4-Day Inca Trail – Ultimate Guide To The Classic Trek

The 4-day Inca Trail to Machu Picchu is celebrated as Peru’s most famous hike. This is one of the world’s most iconic trekking experiences and provides an awesome combination of breathtaking landscapes and ancient Incan sites.

This detailed, day-by-day guide of the 4-day Inca Trail is based on my personal experience.

In this article, I will give you insights on what to expect and how to prepare for this adventure of a lifetime.

Get an Inca trail trek quote

Start planning your Machu Picchu hiking holiday.

4-Day Inca Trail - Ultimate Guide To The Classic Trek

4 day / 3 night classic inca trail route and distance.

Our handy route map below shows the 4D/3N Classic route which typically departs from Cusco (3,399m / 11,151 ft) and ends at the iconic ruins of Machu Picchu (2,430m / 7,972 ft).

Please Note:  Regarding camping sites on the route map below, the 4D Inca Trail trek itinerary can vary from tour company to tour company. See more in our article on the best Inca Trail trekking companies for epic 4-day Inca Trail tours. 

The total trek distance from Cusco to Machu Picchu is roughly 45km (26 miles) and reaches a maximum altitude of 4,200m (13,775 ft). It is a moderately challenging trek that can be completed by most people, as long as they are fit and well acclimatized.

You may also like:

• How difficult is the Inca trail
• Training program for the Inca trail
• Avoiding altitude sickness on the Inca trail

What You Need To Know About Booking The Classic 4-Day Inca Trail

The first thing you need to know is that permits sell out fast! The trail is world-famous, so hikers should book their tickets 6 months to a year in advance. Only 500 permits are issued per day and half of those are reserved for porters/guides.

Although the classic trek is 4D/3N, most tour companies will arrange your pre and post-trek hotels. This means most tours are in fact 7D/6N (with one acclimatization day included).

The classic 4-day Inca Trail to Machu Picchu should include your ticket to Machu Picchu. This is usually a Circuit #3 ticket. Most people consider this the best circuit as the tour goes through the citadel and to the top of the mountain. If you want to do another route, then you will need to purchase an additional ticket.

Check out our handy altitude profile for the 4-day Inca Trail below to give you a better idea of the elevation you'll experience during your trek. 

• What to do at Machu Picchu
• Hiking Huayna Picchu
• Machu Picchu history
• Facts about the Inca trail

Looking for a day tour? Here are my 5 favourite day tours around Cusco: 

• Rainbow Mountain day trip (with meals)
• Moray and Salt Mines Quad Bike Tour
• Sacred Valley day tour
• Humantay Lake day tour
• Machu Picchu and Huayna Picchu entrance tickets

See more Cusco day trips .

Why Choose The 4-Day Inca Trail To Machu Picchu?

The Inca Trail is a chance to follow in the footsteps of ancient kings. For many, this is the one-and-only choice to do the original trek to Machu Picchu. Nothing beats the sense of achievement and wonder when you pass through the sun gate after 4 days of trekking.

The 4-Day Inca Trail gives you the best opportunity to see Peru’s sub-tropical Andean mountain environments. Trail habitats include cloud forests, alpine tundra and jungle landscapes. You will get to experience remote areas free from roads and human presence.

The impressive array of Inca archaeological sites is another top reason to hike the Inca Trail . Some of these ruins (Runcuracay, Phuyupatamarca, Wiñayhuayna, and Machu Picchu itself) are worthy of a visit on their own!

• Hiking the short 2-Day Inca Trail
• Cycling through the Inca Jungle Trek

4-Day Inca Trail To Machu Picchu - Daily Itinerary

Below is a typical itinerary for the 4D/3N classic route.

Day 1: Cusco – Ollantaytambo – KM82 – Wayllabamba

Day one consists of an early morning car or bus ride through the Sacred Valley, and a relatively easy ~12km (7.5 mi) trek.

You will be collected at your hotel early in the morning (usually between 05:00-06:00) by your tour operator and transported from Cusco into the Sacred Valley (some companies start their tour in Ollantaytambo).

The drive takes approximately 3 hours to reach the starting point, called KM82 (named as such as it is 82KM by train from Cusco).

On the drive, you will pass through the towns of Chinchero, Urabamba and Ollantaytambo. You may even stop for about an hour in either Urubamba and Ollantaytambo, where you can grab some breakfast and last minute supplies.

The trail from KM82 first crosses the Rio Vilcanota (often referred to as the Urubamba River) before climbing steeply up from the Rio Cusichaca to a small local village.

• Top things to see in the Sacred Valley
• Paragliding in Cusco
• Things to do and see in Cusco

On the other side of the village, you will see an Inca fort called Huillca Raccay. This was built as a strategic look-out point into the Urubamba valley and was likely used to control the Cusichaca valley.

You will also be able to see below you, on the other side of the river. From here, there is another impressive Inca site called Patallaqta.

Patallaqta was discovered by  Hiram Bingham in 1911, on the same expedition when he discovered Machu Picchu. It is an extensive Inca ruin that is thought to have been an agricultural settlement used to grow and supply food for the inhabitants of Machu Picchu.

Llactapata, an impressive Inca ruin discovered by Hiram Bingham in 1911.

The route continues for another 7-8km (4-5 mi) along a series of gradual undulations to the small village of Wayllabamba (sometimes spelled Wayllapampa), which means ‘grassy plain’ in Quechua, (3,000m / 9,842 ft).

You will most likely camp here from the night. However, some trekking companies continue a little further on to Inca trail campsites near Ayapata (3,300m / 10,827 ft).

Please Note: Wayllabamba is the point at which trekkers on the Salkantay / Inca Trail Combo trek join the Inca Trail. Pack animals are allowed up to this spot on the trail before porters carry on for the rest of the way up.

Day 2: Wayllabamba – Llulluchapampa – Warmiwanusca – Pacamayo

You will be waking up early for breakfast and to prepare for the toughest trekking day. Day 2 is similar in trekking distance to Day 1 which is about 11km (6.83 mi) but involves going up and over the Warmiwanusca Pass (aka Dead Women’s Pass), a 4,200m (13,779 ft) traverse.

The beginning of the trek is straightforward. After your first hour, you will reach a bridge that crosses the Huayruro river. Here, you will find a campsite which has toilets. If you feel the call of nature in the morning, it might be best to hold it in until you reach this point.

Fast Fact: 'Huayruro' refers to a small tree that has red and black seeds. You will commonly see these colours on the ponchos of porters from Ollantaytambo. For this reason, porters from this area are often called Huayruros.

From here, the trail begins to steepen. It winds its way through cloud forest terrain and after nearly hours of hiking, eventually reaches the small village of Llulluchapampa (3,800m / 12,460 ft).

After this juncture, you will trek another 1.5-2 hours to reach the top of Warmiwanusca Pass (aka Abra de Huarmihuañusca or ‘Dead Woman’s Pass). This notorious pass is situated at 4,200m (13,779 ft).

The route up can be hot and intense if the sun is out (wear sunscreen), or cold and cloudy and foggy with icy winds. Be prepared for all conditions by wearing multi-layered clothing.

The view from Dead Woman's Pass (4,200m) on the Inca Trail.

Now, you can celebrate your successful climb to the highest point of the Classic Inca Trail. After catching your breath for a few minutes, you will descend for about 2km (1.2 mi) on a steep trail to the campsite for that night. This camp is located at Pacaymayu (3,580m / 11,700 ft). You will be glad to know that there are toilet facilities here.

Please Note:  Dead Women’s Pass is named as such not because women died on the pass but rather for its shape. When viewed from the descending valley, the mountain slope resembles a supine woman.

Day 3: Pacamayu – Runkurakay – Sayacmarca – Phuyupatamarca – Winay Wayna

Day 3 is another challenging day that covers about 16km (9.94 mi) and traverses two small passes.

The day begins with an hour-long trek up to the ruins at Runkurakay (3,680m / 12,073 ft). This Inca site is believed to have been used as a watchtower over the Pacaymayu valley.

After a second hour’s trekking, you will reach the Runkurakay Pass (aka Abra de Runkuracay). This pass is the second of the Classic Inca Trails major passes. It has a maximum altitude of 4,000m / 13,123 ft. From here, you will be walking on beautifully paved pathways and stone staircases. These structures are still intact from the days of the Incas.

The first staircase down from Runkurakay Pass is relatively steep, so take care with your footing. You will reach the Sayacmarca ruins (3,650m / 12,000 ft) an hour or so after the second pass.

The purpose of Sayacmarca is still unknown but the site’s name means ‘Inaccessible Town’. This accurately describes its well-protected position at the foot of three steep cliffs. The main feature of these ruins is the beautiful stone staircase.

From here, the trail passes through an original Inca tunnel before climbing up to Phuyupatamarca, the third and final pass at 3,680m (12,073 ft). On a clear day, you will be presented with fantastic views of Salkantay Mountain (6,217m / 20,397 ft) in the south and Mount Veronica (5,860m / 19,226 ft) to the North.

Phuyupatamarca or Puyupatamarca is also known as 'La Ciudad entre la Niebla' ('The City Above the Clouds').

Just after the pass, you will reach Phuyupatamarca, one of the most impressive Incan sites on the trail (bar Machu Picchu). Phuyupatamarca or Puyupatamarca is also known as ‘La Ciudad entre la Niebla’ (‘The City Above the Clouds’). An apt description for a place 3,680m (12,073 ft) above sea level.

The site is accessed via a steep path that passes 5 original Incan baths. These may have been used for spiritual or ritual reasons.

Leaving Phuyupatamarca, you will encounter a staircase of 1,000 steps. Prepare your knees (and your mind) for a tough descent. Go slowly and make sure of your footing.

Wiñay Wayna, an Incan site near the final campsite of the same name, is located on the Inca Trail.

After 2-3 hours of trekking through the cloud forest, you will reach the campsite at Winay Huayna (which is the Quechua name for ‘Forever Young’).

Just south of the campsite are the ruins of Winay Huayna, situated at 2,650m / 8,694 ft. The area was likely used as a final resting spot before reaching Machu Picchu. The site has a number of Incan baths and were likely used in ritual cleansings in preparation for arrivals at Machu Picchu.

The view of Machu Picchu from Inti Punku (the Gate of the Sun).

Day 4: Winay Wayna – Inti Punku – Machu Picchu – Aguas Calientes – Ollantaytambo – Cusco

From Winay Huayna, you will awake early (around 04:30) to have breakfast and start the 1.5-hour trek to Inti Punku (the Sun Gate), situated at 2,750m / 8,956 ft.

The initial part of this trek may happen before sunrise. In this case, you might need to use a head-torch (which you can find more details about on our Inca trail packing list ). Although, most operators only hit the trail around 05:30 when dawn breaks. The early departure is on account of trying to catch the sunrise over Machu Picchu. The first rays shine through between 06:30 and 07:00.

The trail from Winay Huayna runs through a cloud-forested contour path. After the forest, you will reach about 50 steep flights of stone stairs to Inti Punku.

At the top of the staircase, you will be presented with an unforgettable view as the famous Inca site of Machu Picchu is revealed through the Sun Gate.

You will get 30-40 minutes to soak in these first views of Machu Picchu from Inti Punku. Then, you will descend down a gradual path into the Citadel. From here, you will register with the authorities and put your backpack in storage.

Most tour operators include a full 2-3 hour tour of the city before giving you free time to explore the ruins. If you still have the energy and are not afraid of heights, then I highly recommend climbing Huayna Picchu (the iconic mountain behind Machu Picchu).

Please Note:  When climbing Huayna Picchu, you will need to book your place prior to arriving at Machu Picchu. There are only 400 climbing permits a day with two departure times (07:00 and 10:00am). Like the Inca trail, it is important to book early. You can get tickets here .

After exploring Machu Picchu for a few hours, you will either need to catch a bus or walk down to Machu Picchu town (aka Aguas Calientes) in the valley below. The bus trip is usually included in your Inca trail tour price (see cost to hike the Inca trail and cheap Inca trail tours ). The walk down takes approximately 2 hours and is worth considering as it provides fantastic views of Machu Picchu’s terraces.

Most tour operators will have booked a mid-afternoon train journey for you back to Ollantaytambo, where they will also have organized a bus or private car to transport you back to Cusco. If you depart from Aguas Calientes (2,040 m / 6,693 ft) at 15:00, you will get back to Cusco around 20:00.

The view of Machu Picchu from Huayna Picchu (aka Wayna Picchu or Wayna Pikchu).

Extended / 5-Day Inca Trail

One can also do a 5D/4N Inca Trail itinerary. These packages include a night in a hotel in Aguas Calientes and an additional day at Machu Picchu.

This is ideal for those who would like to spend more time at Machu Picchu (perhaps climbing Machu Picchu Mountain or Putucusi). With the 5-day Inca Trail, you will also have the opportunity to visit the hot springs at Aguas Calientes.

Alison Macallister

With a degree in Nature Conservation and experience working with wildlife including the Big 5, Alison works as a guide for a 5-star reserve. She enjoys sharing her passion for all things nature-related. She enjoys hiking, horseriding, 4x4 driving and kayaking.

Leave a Reply

Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked

Name * * * *

Email * * * *

Alison, Your description of the Inca Trail is the most detailed and exciting one that I have read so far. I'm thoroughly impressed with your knowledge, training and passion for Nature Conservation. I also appreciate your maps and love your photographs.

Thank you so very much! Nancy Levyssohn [email protected]

Hi Nancy, thank you for those kind words, you’ve made my day! Glad that you have found this article useful.

Allison, thank you for this great break down!! We are retired military in our late 50s, but in great shape and have hiked in the Rockies and Sierras. This hike is one of our top bucket list items! We now know we want to look for a 5 day trip to enjoy the hot springs and extra day and that we have to reserve for the extra permit to do the hike up to the Mt over Machu Picchu. Now we just have to find a trip that fits our budget! Are there affordable air Bnb options for an additional night before the bike in Cuzco?

Hi Rob n Lisa, yes, there are tonnes of accommodation options in Cusco. AirBnB’s aren’t great in Cusco, you’re better offer searching for a hotel. Here are some recommendations: https://www.machupicchutrek.net/best-hotels-in-cusco-peru/ . In terms of a local trek operator, I recommend checking out Skyhook: https://www.skyhookadventure.com/go/machu-picchu

Get a quote from our recommended local trek operator in Peru

Grand Excursion 4-Day Tour

Tour office, flagstaff, arizona, 4 days, 3 nights, tour destination, flagstaff, grand canyon, sedona, monument valley, page, from $2,284, multi-day grand canyon excursion.

Discover the best of Arizona on our 4-day, 3-night Grand Canyon Excursion Tour. This tour will cover all of the most sought after sights in Arizona—from the Grand Canyon to Antelope Canyon to Monument Valley. This small-group multi-day tour includes all of your meals, hotel stays (double occupancy), and activities, including river rafting, jeep tours, and more.

While on our adventure, you’ll learn the history and geology of some of the most iconic natural wonders in the U.S. from our knowledgable and experienced guides . When you explore the Southwest with Grand Canyon Adventures, we do all the work so that you can simply relax and enjoy the experience. Book your 4-day tour today!

Day 1 - Let's Get Going

At 9 am you depart from the tour office in Flagstaff and make your way to the South Rim of Grand Canyon National Park. Once at Grand Canyon, we will have the entire day to explore the Canyon on the Rim, or join our hiking guide for a short hike down the historic Bright Angel Trail. After lunch, we make our way east, stopping at some of the most magnificent sights on the South Rim. We’ll eventually make our way to the Cameron Trading Post for a traditional Southwest-Navajo inspired meal, and rest for the night in the historic Lodge.

Includes: Lunch, Dinner, Hotel Night, Activities

Not Included: Flagstaff Hotel, Alcohol

Day 2 - Get Ready for a Monumental Day

After breakfast, depart Historic Cameron Lodge and make our way through the painted desert to Monument Valley.

At 1pm, we depart for a 3 hours open air, Navajo tour of Monument Valley.

Departing Monument Valley, we make our way to Page, Arizona where we will stay for the remaining 2 nights.

Includes: Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner, Activities, Hotel

Day 3 - Rise and Shine! We have a Day Packed with Adventure.

After breakfast at your hotel, we will make our way to Colorado River Discovery for a 1/2 Day guided raft trip through beautiful Glen Canyon. This trip includes rafting through Horseshoe Bend!

After your rafting tour, we will have a picnic lunch at Glen Canyon Dam, followed by a short trip to Antelope Canyon for a 90 minute guided tour.

Finally, we will make our way to Horseshoe Bend, where you will see one of the most magnificent views in the country.

Day 4 - Red Rock Country, Here We Come.e.

After breakfast, we will depart from Page, Arizona and make our way to the beautiful town of Sedona, AZ.

Experience the red rocks like no one else on a scenic helicopter tour and explore the rest of the city.

Now, all good things must come to an end. After your exciting last day, you will be taken back to Flagstaff.

Price Includes & Tour Overview

• All-inclusive tour (hotels, meals, entrance fees, additional tours)
• Professional guides
• Family friendly

What to Bring

• Comfortable walking shoes or hiking boots
• Sunscreen, hat, sunglasses
• Small backpack for personal items
• Gratuity for guide (industry recommendation is 10-20%)

Contact Us to Book

Related tours.

Team Building Workshop

Grand Canyon Air Tours

Searching Availability...

Need Help Planning Your Trip?

Quick links, area guides.

• South Africa
• Afghanistan
• North Korea
• Adventure + Outdoors
• Amusement Parks
• Backpacking Trips
• Boating + Cruises
• Budget Travel
• Bus + Train Travel
• Coasts + Islands
• Country Trips
• Fall Vacations
• Family Vacations
• Green Travel
• Heritage + History
• Honeymoons + Romance
• Inspiration + Guide
• Landmarks + Attractions
• LGBT Travel
• Markets + Bazaars
• National Parks + Reserves
• Nature + Wildlife
• Parks + Gardens
• Pets + Animals
• Photography
• Airlines + Airports
• Budgeting + Currency
• Business Travel
• Celebrity Travel
• Customs + Immigration
• Deals + Rewards
• Family Travel
• Hotels + Resorts
• Luggage + Packing Tips
• Offbeat News
• Photography Tips
• Responsible Travel
• Solo Travel
• Tech + Gear
• Travel Etiquette
• Travel Warnings
• Bars + Clubs
• Celebrity Chefs
• Restaurants + Cafés
• Wine + Vineyards
• Beach Hotels
• Boutique Hotels
• Hotel Openings
• Hotel Reviews
• Luxury Hotels
• Mountain + Ski Resorts
• Spa Resorts
• Vacation Rentals
• Asia Cruises
• European Cruises
• Festivals + Events
• Museums + Galleries
• Style + Design
• Travel’s Best
• Hotel with Agoda.com
• Hotel with Booking.com

Guide to Shenzhen nightlife — Top 5 things & what to…

Ladakh trip cost per person from Delhi — How much does…

India travel tips — 25+ what & things to know before…

Must eat in Hong Kong — 7+ must eat & must…

Coron itinerary 5 days — What to do & how to…

India trip tips — 9+ things to know before going to…

All about tips in Nepal — How much to tip in…

Cambodia travel tips — 15+ what to know & things to…

When is the best time to visit Kyoto? — The best,…

Must eat in Georgetown — 10+ famous, must-eat & best street…

Must eat in Melaka — 10+ famous Malacca street food &…

Hong Kong Soya sauce Chicken Rice and Noodles — The first…

Top hotels in Siem Reap — 8+ best places to stay…

Top hotels in shanghai — 15+ best hotels in Shanghai

Top hotels in Malacca — 10+ good & best hotels in…

Top places to stay in Bali — Top 10 best areas…

10 must-know things for your best first time European river cruise

Top 3 best luxury cruises in Halong Bay, Vietnam

Cherry blossom festival Korea 2024 — Top 5 cherry blossom festivals…

Ghibli museum blog — The fullest Ghibli museum guide for first-timers

Kyoto festival — Top 10 best events & most famous festivals…

National Palace Museum Taipei blog — What to see in National…

Japanese waterfall — Top 10 most beautiful waterfalls in Japan in…

19+ most beautiful towns in Europe every tourist need to visit…

Georgia travel photos — 20+ captivating photos show Georgia is heaven…

Explore Damnoen Floating Market — The oldest floating market of Thailand

Visiting Fenghuang Ancient Town — One of the most charming ancient…

Mekong Delta travel blog — Beyond rivers of Southwestern Vietnam

14 reasons why you should travel when you are young

Shigaraki Tanuki – An animal symbol of good luck in Japan

Living in the charms of cave houses in Andalucia, Southern Spain

20+ jaw-dropping tiny homes around the world

Japan itinerary 4 days — how to spend 4 days in japan to visit naria, tokyo, fuji.

Summer has come, I packed up again and hit the road, this time to the land where the sun rises the earliest in the world — Japan, dubbed the land of the rising sun, the land of cherry blossoms and one of the world’s most beautiful autumn places as well. I didn’t have too much time for this trip because I planned for some long upcoming trips, so I chose to go to Japan for a short time, enough to embrace the rainfall in Tokyo, strolling around Shinjuku, visit Naritasan Shinshoji Temple and fruit picking in Yamanashi.

• What to do in Japan? — 100 things to do in Japan & best, must things to do in Japan
• Japan itinerary 9 days — How to spend 9 days in Japan to visit: Osaka – Kobe – Kyoto – Nara?
• 8 recommended onsen (hot springs) you should visit when traveling in Beppu, Japan

Arashiyama travel blog — The fullest Arashiyama travel guide with top things to do in Arashiyama

• Tokyo best parks — 10+ best & most beautiful parks in tokyo

So, what to do and how to spend 4 days in Japan? Let’s check out our suggested Japan itinerary 4 days 3 nights on my field trip in summer to visit Narita, Tokyo and Mount Fuji with a very detailed plan from how to get to Japan, where to go, what to do as well as the trip cost.

Japan itinerary 4 days: Fly to Japan

I chose to flying with Vietnam Airlines because I want to fly directly and Vietnam Airlines allows up to 40kg of free checked baggage, which is convenient because every trip to Japan I often bring back a bunch of beautiful things, delicious food and buy all kinds of miscellaneous things, usually at least 30kg will be needed to store. There is a small note, you should bring one normal suitcase and another empty suitcase to be able to shop comfortably.

The airfare from Saigon, Vietnam to Tokyo ranges: USD 439 – USD 657/round-trip. You should book one month in advance to get low fare.

How to spend 4 days in Japan?

Here are my detailed suggested Japan itinerary 4 days 3 nights.

Day 1: Saigon – Narita, visit Shinshoji temple in Narita, try Shabu Shabu hot pot and stay overnight at Toyoko Inn.

Day 2: Tokyo – Odaiba, visit Asakusa Shrine in Tokyo, take photos with Tokyo Skytree, visit Akihabara electronics district, go to Teamlab Planets – an impressive digital museum, go to Odaiba to see the Statue of Liberty and overnight at Grand Hotel Kanachu in Kanagawa near mount Fuji to visit it on the next day.

Day 3: Tokyo – Kawaguchiko – Fuji: Visit Yamanashi Fuehukigawa Fruit Park to pick seasonal fruits, experience an earthquake at Earthquake Simulation Center, visit Oishi Park flower garden, visit Oshino Hakkai ancient village. Overnight at Route Inn and bath onsen.

Day 4: Fuji – Narita, shopping at Aeon Mall and fly back to Vietnam.

Japan itinerary 4 days: The most impressive places and best things to do of the trip on 4 days in Japan journey.

Naritasan shinshoji temple, narita.

Shinshoji Temple left an impression on me because of the peace and grandeur of its architecture, coming here you will feel as to live in a completely different space. This place is not crowded but the area is extremely huge, to walk and explore entire the temple area you will need a whole day.

Address: 1 Narita, Chiba 286-0023, Japan Hours: 8AM–4PM Founder: Kanchō Daisōjō Opened: 940 AD

teamLab Planets TOKYO

In Tokyo, there is not only one teamLab museum but also 2, one is teamlab Planets in Toyosu and another is teamlab Borderless in Odaiba. You can go to 1 of 2 because each place has extremely impressive digital galleries. I chose teamlab Planets because that day Borderless closed for maintenance. But really overwhelmed with the exhibitions that hit all the senses, here you will be able to step into the star-lit room, go into the luminescent lake, and watch the night sky full of glowing flowers.

Address: 6 Chome-1-16 Toyosu, Koto City, Tokyo 135-0061, Japan Hours: 9AM–8PM Entrance fee: 3,200 JPY Website: https://teamlabplanets.dmm.com/en/

Peach picking in Yamanashi

During this trip to Japan, I had the opportunity to visit Yamanashi Prefecture to visit fruit farms, Yamanashi Prefecture is considered the fruit garden of the whole of Japan with a variety of fruits grown all year round.

June is the peach harvest season. Delicious, succulent and ripe. When I arrived, I saw many green grape vines, ready for August to be harvested. Coming to Yamanashi, except for winter, you can participate in fruit picking activities at the garden in the rest of the seasons: Cherry (April-May), peaches or apples (July 6), grapes (November 8).

Lavender Garden – Oishi Park in Kawaguchiko

Coming here, you will not only see lavender flowers but also many other flowers. Don’t forget to try the lavender ice cream here for only 350-400 yen.

Address: ２５２５番地の１１先 Oishi, Fujikawaguchiko, Minamitsuru District, Yamanashi 401-0305, Japan

Getting there: The way to go to Oishi Park is relatively simple, from Tokyo you can depart from Shinjuku and Shinagawa stations, there are trains to Kawaguchiko Station. From Kawaguchio Station, take another bus trip following the instructions of this link to get there. https://goo.gl/maps/NUetGQwETH4ZhrWSA

Oshino Hakkai Ancient Village

Oshino Hakkai is the perfect choice for my summer trip. Located in the area of ​​the five lakes around Mount Fuji, this ancient village has eight clear spring water ponds which completely formed by melting ice from Mount Fuji for over the past 80 years . That’s why the water is crystal clear.

Address: Shibokusa, Oshino, Minamitsuru District, Yamanashi 401-0511, Japan

Getting there: The way to get to Oshino Hakkai is very simple. From Tokyo, take the train from Shinjuku to Kawaguchiko Station, then there will be a bus that runs every an hour from Kawaguchiko Station to the old village.

Japan itinerary 4 days 3 nights: Trip cost for 4 days in Japan

Airfare: USD 615 because I bought it 2 weeks in advance

• Transportation: $8.77 (by public transport)
• Shabu-shabu hot pot: $13.16
• Stay: Toyoko Inn : $140.22/night/double room for 2 people
• Traveling from Narita to Tokyo: $21.94/person
• Getting around Tokyo: $26.32
• Tickets to teamlab Planets: $28.48/ticket
• Lunch buffet at Carne Station Ginza: $10.97/person
• Dinner: $13.16
• Grand Hotel Kanachu : $140.40/night/double room for 2 people

• Tickets to the peach garden: $13.16
• Gettingn from Kanagawa to Misaka noen: $39.49
• Lunch at Houraiya: $10.97
• Earthquake Museum: $20.18
• Traveling all day: $70.11 because sometimes I had to take a taxi
• Dinner at Route Inn: $13.16
• Stay: Route Inn Hotel: $140.40/night/double room for 2 people ( Agoda.com or Booking.com )

• Getting from Fuji to Narita: $61.43 by bus and train
• Lunch: $10.97
• Transfer from Aeon to the airport: $7.02

A TOTAL OF $1,405.08 for this self-sufficient trip.

Some best day tours, trips, activities and transfer services, tickets in, to and from Tokyo you can refer to

• Private Narita International Airport Transfers (NRT) for Tokyo 23 Wards, Hakone, or Karuizawa
• Private Haneda International Airport Transfers (HND) for Tokyo 23 Wards, Hakone, or Karuizawa
• Airport Limousine Bus Transfers from/to Narita and Haneda International Airport (Free Wifi Onboard)
• Tokyo Amazing Sightseeing Bus Day Tour
• Tokyo Highlights Private Day Tour
• Nikko Day Tour from Tokyo
• Mt Fuji & Hakone Day Tour: Lake Ashi & Ropeway Day Trip from Tokyo
• Nikko Cultural Day Tour from Tokyo
• Tokyo Subway Ticket (24, 48, or 72 Hours)
• Tokyo Skyliner and Tokyo Subway Ticket
• Shuttle Bus Transfers (One Way/Round Trip) from Shinjuku/Ikebukuro to Tokyo Disneyland or Tokyo DisneySea
• Tokyo Disney Resort Park Ticket
• Klook Pass Greater Tokyo
• SHIBUYA SKY Ticket
• Warner Bros. Studio Tour Tokyo – The Making of Harry Potter Ticket
• Skyliner Narita Airport Express Ticket
• TeamLab Planets Ticket
• TOKYO SKYTREE® Ticket
• Limousine Bus Narita or Haneda Airport to Tokyo
• Skyliner Narita Airport Express With Tokyo Subway Ticket
• JR Tokyo Wide Pass
• Sky Hop-on and Hop-off Bus Pass
• 4G Prepaid Sim Card (JP Airports Pick Up) for Japan
• 4G WiFi (BKK and DMK Airport Pick Up) for Japan (Unlimited Data)
• JR Pass for Whole Japan (7, 14, or 21 Days)

Are you finding more top things to do in Japan: Tours, activities, attractions and other things? Let’s check it out here.

Related articles

RELATED ARTICLES MORE FROM AUTHOR

Guide to shenzhen nightlife — top 5 things & what to do in shenzhen at night, ladakh trip cost per person from delhi — how much does ladakh trip by bike cost, india travel tips — 25+ what & things to know before traveling to india, coron itinerary 5 days — what to do & how to spend 5 days in coron.

Explore Fenqihu old street — What to do in Fenqihu in a day trip?

Where to go in Kunming? — 15+ top Kunming attractions & best places to visit in Kunming

Must eat in melaka — 10+ famous malacca street food & must try food in melaka.

What to do in Alishan? — 5 top attractions & best things to do in Alishan, Taiwan

Editor picks.

Guide to Shenzhen nightlife — Top 5 things & what to...

Ladakh trip cost per person from Delhi — How much does...

India travel tips — 25+ what & things to know before...

Popular posts.

What to buy in USA? — 17+ must buy in USA...

Must buy souvenir in Taiwan — Top 17+ most famous, cheap...

Must buy in Korea — Top 23 cheap, famous & best...

Popular category.

• Inspiration + Guide 1459
• Trip Inspiration 468
• Thailand 209
• Food + Drink 208
• Coasts + Islands 193
• South Korea 168
• Vietnam 166
• Travel Photos 144
• Work for Us
• Terms & Conditions
• Privacy Policy

Best 4 Day Yellowstone Itinerary For First Timers (2024)

Feeling overwhelmed about planning your 4 day Yellowstone itinerary? You’ve come to the right place!

Yellowstone National Park embodies the ideal road trip destination. It’s got wildlife, natural wonders, beautiful scenery, lots of outdoor adventures, family-friendly activities, and so much more!

Planning your trip? Use our favorite resources!

For accommodations –   Hotels.com  |  Expedia  |  VRBO ​ For car rentals –   Discover Cars ​ For tours & excursions –   Viator ​ For cheap flights – FareDrop ​ For travel insurance –   Safety Wing

My husband and I visited Yellowstone as part of a 2-week trip out west in August 2020. We had four days designated to Yellowstone, and for a first-time visitor, I think that’s about the perfect amount of time to see the highlights and get a good feel for the park and what it has to offer. While there is so much more that we didn’t get to see, I feel that we did the park justice in the amount of time we had.

related: One-Week Glacier, Yellowstone, and Grand Teton Itinerary

So if you are looking for the best Yellowstone 4 day itinerary, look no further! Let me be your Yellowstone trip planner! Here’s everything you need to plan and make the most of your trip!

Best 4 Day Yellowstone Itinerary

Ok, let’s get into the good stuff! Here’s the road trip itinerary for four days in Yellowstone National Park.

This itinerary was created with West Yellowstone being the base camp for your trip. All maps, mileage, and drive times are based on this. I suggest you stay in this vicinity in order to make the most of your time at Yellowstone. I found it to be a great area to stay. If you are staying somewhere else, then your mileage and drive times will differ, but you can easily adjust this itinerary to work with wherever you’re staying.

Day 1 – Northern Section

Total distance: 171 miles Length of drive: 5 hours

Start your Yellowstone trip itinerary by exploring the northern section of the park.

Blacktail Plateau Drive

Get an early start and drive north through the park towards Lamar Valley. You can head directly there if you’d like, but a nice detour is Blacktail Plateau Drive. It’s a one-way dirt road so if you’re going to take it, take it on your way to Lamar Valley. It offers some nice scenery and when we took it in August, we only saw a few other cars, so it’s a nice place to drive to get away from the crowds when visiting Yellowstone.

• Lamar Valley

After finishing the Black Plateau Drive, continue through Lamar Valley. The earlier you get here, the better your chances of seeing the wildlife.

Did you know that Yellowstone has the largest concentration of mammals in the lower 48 states? While some animals are more elusive than others (wolves, moose, bear, etc.) you have the potential to see bighorn sheep, bison, elk, moose, mountain goats, mule deer, pronghorn, white-tailed deer, black bears, Canada lynx, coyotes, grizzly bears, mountain lions, wolverines, and wolves.

We were fortunate to see bison, elk, pronghorn, a coyote, and a moose while in Yellowstone. We didn’t get to see a bear which was on my bucket list, but there’s always next time!

After you’ve spotted some wildlife, make your way to Trout Lake.

It’s a short hike to the lake but it’s steep, so make sure you have proper footwear. This is a nice scenic area where you can walk around the water and take a little break. There weren’t many people here either when we went, so you’ll also get a break from the crowds.

If you packed a lunch this would also make a great spot for a picnic or a snack.

Lamar River Valley and Specimen Ridge Trails

After a bite to eat, if you want to do a bit more hiking, consider exploring parts of the Lamar River Valley and Specimen Ridge trails. I’m sensitive to heat so it was a little too warm for me to do these hikes in August, but they are on my list for next time!

More details on these and other trails can be found on the AllTrails website or app.

After a bit of hiking (or after Trout Lake if you don’t want to hike) swing by Tower Fall. You can admire it from the viewing area or take the hike down to the bottom.

Mammoth Hot Springs

End your day with some time exploring Mammoth Hot Springs. Take some time to walk around the geothermal wonders and then take the Upper Terrace Loop drive to see some more of the features up close.

Day 2 – Geysers and Waterfalls

Total distance: 135 miles Length of drive: 3 hours 30 minutes

BONUS: Mount Washburn

If you’re a hiker and want to get a good trek in this morning, get an early start, head to Dunraven Pass, and take the hike up to Mount Washburn. It’s a 6.8-mile out-and-back trail and is rated as moderate. You can get all the hike details here.

Upper and lower falls

This can either be your first stop of the day, or you can head directly here after hiking Mount Washburn. The Upper and Lower Falls of Yellowstone River near Canyon Village was one of my favorite parts of our 4 day Yellowstone road trip .

There are so many different places you can view the falls based on how much walking you want to do and how much time you want to spend. At the very least, I recommend checking out the Lower Falls from both sides of the river and then going down ALL the steps to the brink of the Lower Falls. It’s a LOT of steps but it’s worth it.

When we were there we hiked the South Rim Trail to Artist Point which was a beautiful walk with lots of lookouts. We had wanted to do Uncle Tom’s Trail but it was closed when we were there.

• Hayden Valley

This is another great area of the park to see wildlife. This is also where we saw the moose! Drive along and see what you can spot!

Just be courteous to other drivers and if you do see any wildlife and want a closer look, find a safe, designated place to pull over to view. Don’t stop in the middle of the road and do your best to allow traffic to keep moving.

Hayden Valley is a very busy section of the park because of all the wildlife, especially the bison. They can sometimes wander into the road and cause a “bison jam” which will back up traffic. Park rangers will sometimes use emergency vehicles to move the bison off the road. Just keep alert and be patient if you have to wait for the wildlife. This is their home after all!

Mud volcano

This area has a lot of cool features, like Dragon’s Mouth Spring and the Mud Volcano .

Norris geyser basin

Wrap up your day with the Norris Geyser Basin. As the name implies, there are a lot of geysers here, like Steamboat Geyser and Echinus Geyser . See how many you can catch erupting!

Day 3 – The Famous Attractions

Total distance: 64 miles Length of drive: 1 hour 45 minutes

Today is all about seeing the sites that make Yellowstone famous!

fountain paint pots

If you’re not tired of geysers yet, start your morning by walking around the Lower Geyser Basin and the Fountain Paint Pot Trail.

grand prismatic Spring

Grand Prismatic is part of the Midway Geyser Basin and is world-famous for its rainbow of colors. Anyone planning a trip to Yellowstone needs to stop here! Visiting in the middle of the day will show off the colors the brightest and has a better chance of not being too foggy.

You should view it from ground level first and then head down the road a minute or two to Fairy Falls Trail parking lot to hike up to the Prismatic Spring Overlook.

fairy falls

If you’re up for an easier hike today, continue down the trail from the Grand Prismatic overlook to Fairy Falls. It’s a 4.8-mile out-and-back trail. It can get a little crowded but it’s a beautiful waterfall and worth the hike.

This would also be a nice place to eat a packed lunch. You can see the hike details here.

Upper Geyser Basin & Morning Glory Pool

This is another section of geysers and pools that would be a great way to spend some time while waiting for the next eruption of Old Faithful.

I would suggest heading directly to Old Faithful after Fairy Falls and finding out when the next eruption is predicted. If you have time, hit up some of these trails. If the next eruption is soon, then you can explore these if you want to afterward.

old Faithful

Finish out your day with the grand finale of Old Faithful. This famous geyser erupts every 44 minutes to 2 hours and is well worth fighting the crowds to see.

As mentioned above, if you have some time to kill before the next eruption, you can explore the Upper Geyser Basin or just relax and walk around the general store, visitor center, lodge, and the beautiful Old Faithful Inn.

Day 4 – Southern Section

Total distance: 150 miles Length of drive: 3 hours 30 minutes

On the final day of your 4 day Yellowstone itinerary, you can either hit up some of the areas you might have missed during your first 3 days or you can spend some time in the southern section of the park. When we were in Yellowstone, most of this part of the park was closed due to a wildfire, so this is the itinerary I would have done if the roads had been open.

Lone Star Geyser

Begin your day with a hike to Lone Star Geyser . This is an easy 5.3-mile out-and-back trail.

Lewis Falls

Next, take the drive down to view Lewis Falls.

• West Thumb Geyser Basin

This area of geysers right along Yellowstone Lake looks very scenic.

• Yellowstone Lake

Take the rest of the day to drive along Yellowstone Lake. You can either drive partially along it and then turn around and head back the way you came, or you can drive all the way along Route 20 until you reach Grand Loop Road and then drive back to West Yellowstone through Hayden Valley again for more wildlife viewing. The time and distance will be about the same for either choice.

If you have less than 4 days in Yellowstone…

If you can’t do Yellowstone in 4 days because you have less time, here are a couple of modified options to help you still see the best of the national park in the time you do have.

If you have 1 day in Yellowstone:

Make sure you hit up the main attractions:

• Upper and Lower Falls
• Norris Geyser Basin
• Grand Prismatic
• Upper Geyser Basin & Old Faithful Geyser

If you have additional time, you can drive up to see Mammoth Hot Springs or drive to Hayden Valley to look for wildlife.

If you have 2 days in Yellowstone:

On Day 1, visit Mammoth Hot Springs, drive through Lamar Valley to look for wildlife, stop at Tower Fall, continue to Upper and Lower Falls, and end at Norris Geyser Basin.

On Day 2, visit Grand Prismatic, head to Upper Geyser Basin & Old Faithful, drive along Yellowstone Lake and spend some time there, and then head up through Hayden Valley for wildlife watching in the evening.

If you have 3 days in Yellowstone:

Follow my four-day Yellowstone itinerary but skip Day 4.

If you have more than 4 days in Yellowstone…

If you have more than 4 days for your Yellowstone National Park itinerary, here are some things you can add:

• Beartooth Highway –   this is one thing I wish we would have had time to do. This is a 68-mile road from Red Lodge to Cooke City that many consider the most beautiful drive in America. This road is also closed from around October to April/May depending on the snow, so check conditions before you go.
• Boiling River – a popular section of the Gardner River to go swimming. It’s located right on the Montana/Wyoming border off of Route 189.
• Add in some hikes – we did not get to do much hiking/walking on this trip so I don’t have any personal recommendations, but you can use the AllTrails website or app to find the best ones in the area. Some that I’d like to do next time include the Lone Star Geyser Trail and Shoshone Lake .
• Explore the town of West Yellowstone – we walked around the town a bit in the evenings to get dinner or just window shop. There are plenty of places to eat and pick up souvenirs, and also family-friendly activities for the kids, like the Grizzly & Wolf Discovery Center and the Zipline Adventure Park.

Quick facts about Yellowstone National Park

• Yellowstone is not only the first established national park in the United States but also in the world! It became a national park on March 1, 1872.
• Yellowstone is 3,472 square miles, which equates to over 2.2 MILLION acres! It’s one of the largest national parks in the US. Within these acres, there are about 290 waterfalls and over half of the world’s active geysers and hydrothermal features.
• In 2023, Yellowstone was the 7th most-visited national park with 3.2 million visitors.

Top 10 Best Things to do in Yellowstone National Park

Oh man, it is so hard to choose the top 10 things to do in Yellowstone! The park is massive and there are dozens of amazing sights to see.

However, here is what I believe are the things every first-time visitor needs to see when exploring Yellowstone:

• Old Faithful
• The Grand Canyon of Yellowstone / Upper & Lower Falls
• Mammoth Springs

The best time to visit Yellowstone National Park

Yellowstone is open all year round and there are activities to do in every season, but parts of the park do close down in the shoulder seasons and in winter.

View current conditions for Yellowstone National Park here.

The roads in the interior of the park (Old Faithful, Upper and Lower Falls, etc.) are closed during the winter as are many visitor centers and facilities, so keep this in mind when you’re planning your trip.

However, in winter there are very few visitors, and if you enjoy winter activities like snowshoeing, skiing, and snowmobiling, you’ll get to see a side of the park not many others do! Check out what other things you can do in Yellowstone in the winter.

On the flip side, the summer is the busiest time to visit the park. Half of the yearly visitors to Yellowstone come in June, July, and August. You will for sure be fighting big crowds and the heat, and accommodations will be harder to book and will be more expensive. You also risk the chance of wildfires closing parts of the park.

However, all the facilities and roads are open at this time, so you’ll be able to experience just about everything in the park in the summer.

Spring and fall are great times to visit Yellowstone. The crowds are fewer, the weather is cooler, and you’ll have more options for places to stay. Generally, the interior roads start opening around April and start closing around October. Check the Yellowstone road status page for up-to-date information.

So no matter when you decide to visit, there are plenty of things to see and do!

How to get to Yellowstone National Park

If you are flying to Yellowstone National Park, the closest airport is West Yellowstone which has flights from early May to mid-October from Salt Lake City. Other nearby airports include Cody and Jackson in Wyoming, Bozeman and Billings in Montana, and Idaho Falls.

If you are driving, here are the approximate driving times to West Yellowstone from some of the closest larger cities:

Boseman, Montana:  1.5 hours Billings, Montana:  4 hours Cody, Wyoming: 3.5 – 5 hours, depending on seasonal road closures Jackson, Wyoming: 2.5 hours Idaho Falls, Idaho: 2 hours

NOTE: There are five entrances to the park, but the most popular (and therefore the busiest entrance) is West Yellowstone. Since this is a popular place to stay (and my personal recommendation), all the above drive times are to the town of West Yellowstone, but if you are arriving from another side of the park (Cody, WY for example) it will take you less time to reach the park itself.

How to get around Yellowstone National Park

Having your own vehicle is going to give you the best experience in Yellowstone as there are no shuttles in the park. You’ll be able to plan your own itinerary based on what you want to see and spend as much time as you want at any of the sights.

Consider downloading your maps, itinerary, and directions before leaving so you can access them offline. Cell phone service can be spotty in Yellowstone and you’ll want to make sure you know how to get around the park. Google Maps is a great option. You can download any map you create and navigate without cell phone service.

If you will need to rent a car for your road trip, I highly recommend using Discover Cars . They search all the rental companies for the best price, and if your plans change, you always get free cancellation.

However, if you do not have your own car, there are a couple of other options.

There are a few local Yellowstone tours and shuttle bus companies that operate in the area. You can find out more about them here.

However, I’d recommend using Get Your Guide to book a tour or any activities. You can check reviews and you will often have a smaller or private group and a more authentic, enjoyable experience.

What to pack for your 4 Day Yellowstone Itinerary

In order to make the most of your 4 day Yellowstone itinerary, here are some things you should not forget:

National Park Pass

If you have the  National Park Pass , make sure you don’t forget it! They come with a rearview mirror holder so you can hang it up and not have to dig around for it when you enter the park.

This is a given, but you are going to be so amazed by all the beauty and geothermal wonders, you’ll be kicking yourself if you don’t have a good camera to capture it all.

A good phone camera would work well for most landscapes, but if you want to get some awesome wildlife pictures, you might want something with a zoom lens.

Is that a moose or just a log? If you have binoculars, you won’t have to guess!

Hiking shoes & good socks

If you plan on doing any kind of hiking, I’d recommend hiking shoes or boots rather than sneakers. The socks you wear with your boots will also make a huge difference in how your feet feel. I like  Cloudline  wool socks, but there are lots of great brands out there.

While Yellowstone can get very hot in the summer, especially around the geothermal pools and geysers, you should make sure you pack along a variety of clothing, including clothes you can layer. If you head out early or stay out late, it might be a bit chilly and I’m sure you’d rather be prepared than be cold.

More than likely, you’ll be out and about in the park all day and may not have quick access to a store. Plus it can get VERY hot in the summer and you will want to stay hydrated.

While the visitor centers do sell water, it will be much easier to just bring lots of water with you so you don’t have to worry about running out or changing your plan in order to go find some.

Hiking pack + the 10 essentials

While most of the trails and boardwalks in Yellowstone National Park are well-traveled and you’ll see people frequently, you still want to be prepared. Bring along a hiking backpack or something with good back support and keep it stocked with the  10 essentials for hiking and you’ll be set.

Sunglasses, sunscreen, and a hat

Nothing can ruin a trip faster than sunburn, am I right? Yellowstone is hot and often very sunny in the summer, so you’ll want to make sure you protect your skin and your eyes from the sun. A hat would be a good idea as well.

Certain parts of the park can get buggy, so just be prepared and carry some with you.

Spotting bears is one of the big things on people’s Yellowstone to-do list, but usually from the safety of your car!

If you plan to do some hiking, just make sure you hike with at least one other person and carry bear spray (and have it easily accessible and know how to use it). Pay attention to your surroundings, make plenty of noise, and you’ll be fine!

NOTE:  You can’t fly with bear spray so I’d recommend purchasing it once you arrive if you are traveling by plane.

You should also give any other animals that you encounter plenty of space too. Any wildlife can be unpredictable, and you want to keep yourself and the critters safe!

Swimsuit & Towel

If you plan to spend some time at any of the lakes or hot springs, you’ll want to make sure you have a swimsuit and towel along.

Walkie Talkies

Cell service isn’t great in the park, and if you are traveling in a group and want to split up when visiting some of the landmarks, walkie-talkies can be a great way to keep in touch with the others in your group.

Find the best road trip walkie-talkie options here.

Optional: Hiking poles

While not a necessity, I thought I’d include this one since a lot of people find them useful. I tend to use hiking poles more when I’m backpacking than just day hiking, but some of the hikes in Yellowstone can be long and challenging and hiking poles might come in handy.

For a complete road trip packing list, check out this post.

Places to eat in Yellowstone National Park

We didn’t eat out much on our trip, but we did eat at the Firehole Bar-B-Que Company in West Yellowstone and it was quite good. Some other recommended places include Ernie’s Bakery & Deli and Wild West Pizzaria & Saloon , also both in West Yellowstone. If you make it up to Cooke City, Miners Saloon is also supposed to be good.

If you’d like to eat in the park, there aren’t a lot of options. I would suggest packing a lunch along on most of your days. However, lots of people want to get a chance to eat at the historic Old Faithful Inn . There are a couple of restaurants there. This might be a nice place to relax and eat before or after viewing Old Faithful.

Where to stay in Yellowstone National Park

We stayed in our friends’ RV on this trip and parked at Yellowstone Grizzly RV Park . We don’t have a lot of experience with RV parks but it was a nice one in my opinion.

If you want to stay in the park, there are nine lodges to choose from, including Mammoth Hot Springs Hotel and the famous Old Faithful Inn . However, these places tend to be on the more expensive side and can fill up VERY quickly.

No matter where you stay, make sure you plan ahead and book as soon as you can. Places can book up very quickly, especially in the summer .

But don’t stress! There are plenty of reasonably priced accommodations of all kinds outside of the park. In fact, I wrote a whole post on the best ones so you don’t have to spend hours doing the research!

Here are the best places to stay near Yellowstone!

How to avoid crowds in Yellowstone National Park

As the second most visited national park, it’s going to be pretty tough to avoid the crowds. Everyone comes to see Old Faithful and Grand Prismatic Spring, and for good reason!

But how do you get away from the masses when there are just so many people in the park? Here are a couple of tips:

Visit during the shoulder seasons

Yellowstone is at its busiest between June and August. If you have the flexibility, try to come during another time of the year.

If you come in late April to May, the interior roads start opening up and there will be a lot fewer visitors. Plus this is the time of year the bison and pronghorn give birth to their babies.

September to early October is also a great time of year to visit. The interior roads do start to close sometime in October, but you’ll have a greater chance of seeing bears as they come down from the mountains, and you’ll have gorgeous fall colors!

Arrive early and stay late

As with most national parks, the earlier you get in, the smaller the crowd will be. The park is open 24 hours a day, so if you can swing it, get in as early as you can to enjoy the first hour of daylight with fewer people around. You can catch the sunrise and have a better chance of seeing wildlife too.

You can also choose to stay in the park late. A lot of tourists leave the park around dinnertime, but if you pack your dinner and stay out until sunset, you’ll not only get a gorgeous view, but this is also a great time to see animals. This is also when I’d recommend going to see some of the biggest attractions, like Old Faithful or the Upper and Lower Falls.

Consider exploring less popular areas

Yellowstone National Park as a whole is incredibly busy, but there are definitely places that don’t see the crowds of Grand Prismatic and Mammoth Hot Springs.

The area south and east of Old Faithful, around Yellowstone Lake, and down to the Wyoming border is a less-visited part of the park that still has a lot to offer. There are tons of hiking trails and lakes along this section, and you can also see waterfalls and some geysers too.

Parts along the northern section of the park, between Tower/Roosevelt and the Northeast Entrance Station, can also be less crowded. We found hardly any other cars on Blacktail Plateau Drive and the area around Trout Lake.

If avoiding crowds is a top priority for you, consider spending more time in these areas, away from the popular attractions.

Places to visit around Yellowstone National Park

Yellowstone is a perfect jumping-off point to so many other great locations. If you want to extend your Yellowstone National Park itinerary to include a few other places, here are some suggestions:

• Glacier National Park
• Grand Teton National Park
• Sawtooth Mountains, Idaho
• Bighorn National Forest
• Black Hills & Badlands National Park

Yellowstone National Park FAQs

When is yellowstone national park open.

Yellowstone National Park is open all year round, 24 hours a day. Parts of the park are only open seasonally because of snow, but there are things to do in the park all seasons. Check out the Yellowstone National Park Service website for more details .

How much does it cost to enter Yellowstone National Park?

A 7-day park permit costs $35 per vehicle.

If you have an America the Beautiful pass, entry is free.   I highly recommend getting this pass if you plan to visit more than one national park in a year  – it will save you money. A one-year pass costs $80.

A Yellowstone National Park annual pass is $70, but this would only be worth it if you are going to be visiting the park for longer than a week and you aren’t planning to go to any other national parks within the year.

There are also several days throughout the year when entering any national park is free!  Check out the list of free National Park days here.

How many days do you need to see Yellowstone?

We spent a full 4 days in Yellowstone when we visited in August 2020, and I think that was the perfect amount of time for first-timers. You get to see all the main sites without being too rushed, but it also leaves some time for you to relax if you wish.

If you want to do more hiking and also explore more off-the-beaten-path places, you might want to add an extra day or two.

What is the best month to visit Yellowstone National Park?

Overall, I’d say the best month to visit Yellowstone would be May or September. Most of the interior roads to the park are open, but it isn’t as hot or crowded as in June, July, and August.

How long does it take to drive the loop in Yellowstone?

There are actually two loops in Yellowstone, the Upper Loop and the Lower Loop. Essentially, if you wanted to drive them both in their entirety in one day, you would make a figure 8. This would take about 5-6 hours to complete without stops.

The Upper Loop takes approximately 2 hours to drive without stops. This section includes Mammoth Hot Springs, Tower Fall, Mt Washburn, and Lamar Valley.

The Lower Loop is a little larger and takes just under 3 hours to drive without stops. Here you would see Old Faithful, Grand Prismatic, Hayden Valley, Yellowstone Lake, and the Yellowstone Grand Canyon.

Grand Loop Road in Yellowstone is basically the outside of the two loops. It is 142 miles around. If you wanted to drive this in one day, it would take approximately 4-7 hours. This would all depend on how many stops you wanted to make along the way.

Conclusion: 4 Day Yellowstone itinerary

And there you have it! I hope this was helpful for you in planning your trip to Yellowstone National Park.

If you want to see a more inside scoop of what our Yellowstone trip was like, check out the video below from Happily Ever Hanks . They are good friends of ours and traveled with us on our 2-week trip to Glacier, Yellowstone, Grand Tetons, and the Sawtooth Mountains of Idaho.

Want to save this for later? Pin it!

Stefanie Henne is an experienced road trip travel blogger who specializes in helping others plan their dream vacation, no matter their budget or time restraints. Go here to read more about Stef's story. If you want to send Stef a message, visit her contact page here.

We value your privacy

Privacy overview.

Plan, Ready, Go

4 Days in Seattle: Itinerary for a Perfect Trip

If you’re looking for a perfect Northwest getaway, Seattle is the city for you. In this article, I outline an itinerary that will help make the most of your four days in Seattle.

With its vibrant neighborhoods and ample outdoor activities, Seattle offers something for everyone. But planning a trip to the Emerald City can be daunting—there’s so much to see and do!

Whether you’re an experienced traveler or this is your first time visiting Seattle, I know you will find this guide helpful.

In addition to the itinerary, I provide you with plenty of other information you’ll need to plan a successful four-day Seattle trip like how to get there, the best time of year to visit, what to pack, and more.

But why should you listen to me?

Well, I was born in Seattle and lived in the area for the first 29 years of my life. I still have family there and have spent literally sooooo many years exploring this city over and over again.

Get ready for your perfect Seattle trip with this FREE printable travel planner.

This post includes affiliate links. If you make a purchase through one of these links, I may earn a small commission at no additional cost to you. As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases. See disclaimer.  

How many days should you spend in Seattle?

Seattle is a vibrant and exciting city with a lot to offer travelers. But while there is much to see and do in Seattle, there are also so many other things to see in the Puget Sound area.

This four-day Seattle itinerary will allow you to see all of the top highlights of this amazing city while still leaving time for exploration and relaxation outside the city itself.

If you’re looking to get the most out of your trip to Seattle, I recommend focusing your time on the main attractions in the city and then spending at least one of your four days taking a day trip from Seattle.

Best time to visit Seattle

The best time to visit Seattle weather-wise is July through September—temperatures are usually in the 70s and upper 60s, and it’s drier then. However, be aware that late summer can get quite warm here.

Okay, it can get downright hot.

You’ll also find a lot of tourists at the top sites like Pike Place Market (okay that one is always busy—even in the dead of winter in my experience) and the Space Needle during those months. 

Although Seattle is infamous for its rain, it doesn’t actually receive that much total precipitation compared to other cities. Where it does beat the competition is in the number of days per year with rain.

The months with the greatest number of rainy days are typically November through February (ugh, February is the pits there) and into March.

What to pack for Seattle

Although the Pacific Northwest is known for its rain, Seattle gets a lot of sun in the summertime. And temperatures can often rise to uncomfortably high levels.

Pay close attention to the local forecast so you can plan your days accordingly.

Seattle is a city where I definitely recommend packing to wear layers. 

For the remainder of the year, expect dreary skies and rain showers. An umbrella may not be necessary—a good quality waterproof shell with a hood will usually do the trick.

Seattle is also a very casual city. Comfort is generally the rule of the day.

For more packing help, see my weekend packing list post. It includes suggestions for how to handle long weekends, like this Seattle four-day itinerary.

If you’re flying to Seattle and are interested in learning how to pack lighter, check out my article on how to pack light for a one-week trip .

You might not need the full one-week packing list but the general principles for packing light will still apply.

Where to stay in Seattle

There’s no shortage of wonderful hotels in Seattle.

These suggested hotels are popular with visitors to Seattle and provide convenience for getting to the top tourist attractions in Seattle without a car.

Mayflower Park Hotel —Stay in the heart of downtown Seattle within walking distance of Pike Place Market and just steps from the Westlake Center monorail stop, making it super easy to get to the Space Needle, Seattle Center, MoPOP and Chihuly Garden and Glass. Check rates and availability here.  

Hotel Ändra —Also within convenient walking distance of the Seattle waterfront and the Westlake Monorail station, Hotel Ändra offers unique boutique accommodations. It’s also about a 15-minute walk to the Space Needle. Check availability here . 

Ace Hotel —located in the popular Belltown neighborhood, Ace Hotel offers affordable accommodations just more than a 10-minute walk from Pike Place Market and the Space Needle. It’s also about a 7-minute walk to Olympic Sculpture Park. Check out available rooms here.

How to get to Seattle

The best way to get to Seattle is to fly into Seattle-Tacoma International Airport (SEA).

There are many ways to get from SeaTac to your accommodations, including: 

• Link Light Rail runs from the airport to several stops including downtown Seattle
• King County Metro and Sound Transit buses
• Shared van ride services like Capital Aeroporter
• Rideshares like Uber and Lyft
• Check to see if your hotel offers an airport shuttle 

PRO TIP: If you have flexible travel dates you need to check out Going (formerly Scott’s Cheap Flights). You get amazing flight deals sent straight to your inbox with instructions on how to book directly with the airlines. Check out Going here. Going is my favorite way to find great travel deals. 

Seattle itinerary day 1

Start your adventure in Seattle by heading toward the water on day one.

Our journey begins at the world-famous Pike Place Market, and then we’ll make our way to the picturesque waterfront.

When planning the activities for your four-day trip to Seattle, you might want to consider buying the Seattle CityPASS.

Based on how much you want to see on your visit to Seattle, the CityPASS could save you some money. And you’ll get admission to many of Seattle’s premier sites and attractions including the Space Needle.

Pike Place Market

Pike Place Market is an essential stop for anyone visiting Seattle.

This amazing place has everything from stunning fresh flowers to picture-perfect produce, and from artisanal foods to fine handcrafted items. You’ll love exploring every inch of it!

Pike Place Fish is a must-see in the Main Arcade. Those are the guys who are famous for throwing their fish.

They not only throw fish, but they’re also constantly surrounded by tourists who are eager to watch them do it.

Sounds weird, but it’s pretty fun.

If you’re driving to the Market, there is paid parking available in their garage. If you stay at one of the hotels we recommend (see above) I’ll recommend that you think about walking to Pike Place Market. 

Aim to arrive at the Market before noon for smaller crowds.

The worst tourist crowds happen during summer weekends. To miss the largest amount of people, plan your outings for weekdays instead.

You might want to consider taking a behind-the-scenes guided tour of Pike Place Market with early access before all the crowds arrive. Take a look here . 

Check out the oldest Starbucks store 

The Starbucks at 1912 Pike Place is not the first store that opened, but it is where the first store moved in the mid-1970s and has been operating ever since.

Yes, you will find a lot of tourists there, and that’s okay.

If you’re a Starbucks fan (like me) you won’t mind waiting in the long line of tourists to get your chance to see the inside of the store.

You could then pick up one of the souvenirs that you can only find in that location.

My mug from this store is one of my very favorite Seattle souvenirs .

For coffee (rather than a souvenir and an Instagram moment), I recommend going to the Starbucks on 1st and Pike Street.

Enjoy lunch on the water at Ivar’s Fish Bar 

If you want a real Seattle experience for lunch, I recommend heading to Pier 54 and Ivar’s Fish Bar. The views are amazing, and the food is delicious.

Beware. The seagulls will want your fries.

I’m serious. 

If you’re looking to splash out a bit more than “walk up fish and chips window”, Ivar’s Acres of Clams might interest you. Offering both indoor and outdoor (deck) seating on the water, it’s perfect for a nicer meal.

Other waterfront dining options include Elliott’s Oyster House and The Crab Pot (near Waterfront Park and the Seattle Great Wheel).

Incidentally, my sister and brother-in-law had their wedding rehearsal dinner at The Crab Pot…so there’s that.

It’s not relevant. I understand that. I just wanted to share.

Although you’ll certainly find touristy things here, Seattle’s is a working waterfront.  

Looking for a place to enjoy the fresh sea air and stunning views? Check out Pier 62 or Waterfront Park (located between the Seattle Aquarium and the Seattle Great Wheel). 

There are plans to greatly expand Seattle’s Waterfront Park to extend far beyond the “old” park and Pier 62.

Miner’s Landing 

Miner’s Landing is located at Pier 57 and features several tourist attractions like the Seattle Great Wheel, Wings Over Washington, a Carousel, and more.

Pier 57 is also where you’ll find The Crab Pot restaurant.

Ye Olde Curiosity Shop 

Seattle’s Ye Olde Curiosity Shop on Pier 54 has been a favorite among locals and visitors for over one hundred years.

Feel free to wander around and take a look at the oddities, or you might decide to purchase a small, creepy souvenir to take home with you.

Olympic Sculpture Park

Olympic Sculpture Park is the largest downtown green space in Seattle, located on nine acres near the water. You can see stunning views of the Olympic mountains and Elliott Bay from here.

The park was created by the Seattle Art Museum (SAM) and was originally used as a fuel store and transfer site. Ew.

In addition to the existing artworks, the park features native plants, an event pavilion, and an amphitheater.

The park is free and open to the public every day all year round.

Other things you can do on your first day in Seattle

Ride the Bainbridge Island Ferry

If you’re looking for a breathtaking view of the Seattle skyline, there’s no better place to see it than from the ferry ride between Bainbridge Island and Seattle.

A round-trip ride will only cost you the price of a one-way ticket as fares are collected only as you leave Seattle if you’re walking on as just a passenger. Car plus passenger fares are collected on both sides, so keep that in mind if you’re taking a vehicle. 

And the fair is reasonably priced. It’s not bad for a round-trip ferry ride that gives you some stunning views.

Make sure to arrive at the terminal at least 15 minutes early if you’re planning on taking the ferry as a walk-on passenger. The crossing time is approximately 35 minutes long each way.

Seattle food tour

If you’re a food travel enthusiast, Seattle is a great place to explore with a food tour.

You could try a food tour of Pike Place Market.  

And there are even tours that specialize in certain kinds of foods such as this plant-based food tour or this underground donut tour .

Seattle Underground Tour

Ask your friends who have visited Seattle what their favorite thing was that they did. They just might tell you that it was the Underground Tour.

You can check it out for yourself here .

Seattle itinerary day 2: Space Needle and Seattle Center

For your second full day in Seattle, plan to focus your time around Seattle Center and its most famous landmark, the Space Needle.

Of course, there’s more to do down there than just the Space Needle. Let’s take a look!

Catch the view from the Space Needle

Built for the 1962 World’s Fair, the Space Needle has become an internationally recognized symbol for Seattle. It’s also one of the most photographed structures in the world.

The Space Needle underwent a multi-year renovation and preservation process and now includes the world’s first and only rotating glass floor.

Be advised, the Space Needle is not an inexpensive attraction to visit; however, it is a pretty unforgettable one. 

Marvel at Chihuly Garden and Glass

The Chihuly Garden and Glass is a long-term collection of work from world-renowned glass artist Dale Chihuly, exhibited both indoors and outdoors.

Chihuly’s artwork needs to be seen in person to be believed. It’s absolutely breathtaking.

Chihuly Garden and Glass recommends that visitors plan to spend one to two hours touring the exhibitions.

You’ll find it adjacent to the Space Needle, making it super easy to visit both in the same day. 

If you wish, you can get a Space Needle and Chihuly Garden and Glass combination ticket , which is a pretty popular option. 

You can also check out MoP

As long as you’re already in the immediate area, you could also pay a visit to the Museum of Pop Culture (MoPOP).

It could be the perfect way to round out the second day of your Seattle four-day itinerary.

MoPOP is just steps from both Chihuly Garden and Glass and the Space Needle. Just the quickest of little walks.

Designed by famed architect Frank Gehry—and once called the Experience Music Project— the Museum of Pop Culture offers exhibitions and educational programs dedicated to creativity and contemporary pop culture. 

MoPOP recommends that guests purchase their tickets in advance.

Explore more of the Seattle Center 

Seattle Center is a building complex that was created for the 1962 World’s Fair. Hey, just like the Space Needle!

The 74-acre center still serves as a hub for many cultural, educational, sports and entertainment organizations. More than 30 such groups are based there.

Seattle Center is the top tourist destination in the region.

Pacific Science Center

If you are traveling with children, they might be interested in the Pacific Science Center.

It’s been a perennial field trip favorite for Seattle area schools because of its fun and engaging exhibits like the Butterfly House.

Take a spin around the Food & Event Hall in the “Center of the Center.” It can be a great place to pick up lunch and then head out to the Mural Amphitheater Lawn or the International Fountain. 

The Seattle Army Field Artillery originally built this structure in 1939 before it was reconfigured into the “Food Circus” for the 1962 World’s Fair.

International Fountain 

Often in the heart (and heat) of summer, you’ll likely find many people gathered around International Fountain and see children splashing about in the water.

It was renovated in 2021 and features five water programs synchronized to music. All of the International Fountain’s water is recycled.

Seattle itinerary day 3: Day trip

By now you’ve seen the top sites that Seattle has to offer. The best of the best if you will.

Now, I’m going to recommend that you spend your third day exploring another part of the Puget Sound area with a day trip away from the Emerald City .

Below are five of the top suggested day trips from Seattle. You can get the full list in my article that’s all about the best day trips from Seattle .

Snoqualmie Falls

Distance from Seattle: 30 miles

A short drive from Seattle will take you to the gorgeous 268-foot Snoqualmie Falls on the Snoqualmie River.

It’s quite a popular natural attraction in the area and one of the best places to visit in Washington State . Approximately 1.5 million people visit the Falls annually to take in the stunning scenery.

Distance from Seattle: 45 miles

The “Maritime City” of Gig Harbor, Washington, is located just over an hour’s drive south of Seattle, at the southern end of Puget Sound.

The town’s past is rooted deeply in its connection to the water (so beautiful!). Oh, and you can’t miss the views of Mount Rainier.

Why not explore the water by renting a boat or kayak, or go on a harbor cruise tour? Or better yet, you could take a Venice-style Gondola ride.

There are 21 parks within Gig Harbor’s city limits just waiting to be explored. And if you’re feeling active, go for a 6.2-mile stroll on the Cushman Trail that links downtown Gig Harbor to the Tacoma Narrows Bridge.

Of course, there’s also a wide variety of dining and shopping options that you can choose from in the heart of Gig Harbor, Washington.

Distance from Seattle: 70 miles

I just love La Conner. This spot is perfect for a day trip or even a weekend getaway. La Conner is located in Washington’s Skagit Valley, which is known for its stunning annual Skagit Valley Tulip Festival.

The Pacific Northwest Quilt & Fiber Arts Museum is not to be missed! The museum highlights beautiful and innovative work from some of the most talented artists working in fiber.

You’ll find plenty to fill your day in La Conner. Ideas for a fun day trip to La Conner include visiting Conner Waterfront Park, kayaking to Goat Island, browsing the shops downtown, and enjoying a meal at one of the town’s great restaurants.

The town hosts many festivals and events throughout the year, so be sure to check the calendar before planning your visit.

Mount Rainier National Park

Distance from Seattle: 80 miles

Mount Rainier National Park is one of the best day trips from Seattle. This park protects and preserves Mount Rainier, which is more than 14,000 feet tall and an active volcano.

According to the National Park Service , Mount Rainier “is the most glaciated peak in the contiguous U.S.A., spawning five major rivers.”

If you’re planning a day trip to Mount Rainier, keep in mind that the “winter season” there lasts well into spring. Make sure to check Park road status before you leave as well as posted alerts and conditions.

To protect its natural beauty, most of Mount Rainier National Park has been named wilderness by Congress. That said, there are still five developed areas that include amenities such as visitor centers and a museum.

Take the stress out of planning your day trip from Seattle to Mount Rainier and book a guided day tour of the Park. This guided tour offers hotel pick up and drop off as well as free cancellation.

Deception Pass State Park (Whidbey Island)

Distance from Seattle: 81 miles

Deception Pass State Park is the most visited Washington State Park for a reason. With tons of activities like fishing, boating, hiking, camping, picnicking, and beach strolling, there’s something for everyone at this beautiful park.

With 3800+ acres and 77,000 feet of shoreline taking up part of both Whidbey and Fidalgo islands, the park has plenty to offer. You’re guaranteed to find a great spot with just the right view to enjoy on your day trip.

Of course, the iconic Deception Pass Bridge makes an ideal photo spot. For jaw-dropping views take a stroll across the bridge. (There are places to park or pull out.) PLEASE be aware of the potential for heavy traffic as this is the only bridge to Whidbey Island.

Seattle itinerary day 4

For your fourth day in Seattle is when I’m going to recommend that you try out some of the lesser talked about things in Seattle.

They’re not necessarily what I’d call “hidden gems,” but you might not find them at the top of the lists of things you need to do in Seattle .

A lot of these things to do in Seattle are easy on the wallet as well.

Find more great ideas in my article on the best free and cheap things to do in Seattle .

Visit Kerry Park for stunning views of downtown Seattle 

Kerry Park is a popular spot for visitors to Seattle, offering iconic views of the cityscape complete with downtown, Elliott Bay, and Mount Rainier in the distance.

Though it’s only a little more than an acre in size, many people visit for the view of the city and because it makes for a great photo spot.

Fans of the TV show Frasier might recognize the view as being the one from Frasier’s Seattle apartment.

There is also a small playground at the nearby Bayview-Kinnear Park (often referred to as Lower Kerry). 

Ballard Locks

The Army Corps of Engineers manages the Hiram M. Chittenden Locks and Lake Washington Ship Canal, which is also locally referred to as the Ballard Locks. In addition, this area is registered on the National Register of Historic Places.

These locks are said to be the busiest in America and they serve three main purposes:

• maintain the water level of the freshwater lakes: Lake Washington and Lake Union
• prevent the mixing of sea water from Puget Sound with the fresh lake water
• move boats from the water level of the lakes to the water level of Puget Sound, and vice versa. 

Anyone can come any day of the year to watch how the locks work.

The best time to see salmon on the fish ladder is from early summer to September. You can also visit the botanical gardens and the visitor center.

Seattle Art Museum

I’ve visited several of the top art museums in the world, and I think that the Seattle Art Museum (SAM) easily stands up next to many of them.

The museum boasts a permanent collection of contemporary art, in addition to special exhibitions of well-known artists and their works.

Visit Smith Tower

Smith Tower, completed in 1914, was the first skyscraper in Seattle. Today you can purchase affordable tickets to enjoy the amazing views from their famous observatory .

You’ll enjoy special exhibits and 360-degree views of Seattle and its stunning scenery.

Frye Art Museum 

Located in Seattle’s First Hill neighborhood, the Frye Art Museum is always open for free. The museum is named for Charles and Emma Frye who were well-known community leaders and art collectors.

The primary focus of the permanent collection is late 19th and early 20th-century German art.

The museum has previously hosted exhibitions of Andy Warhol’s work and other pieces by

Final thoughts on your Seattle four-day itinerary

Seattle is a city that begs to be explored in more than just a day or two.

If you can, try to spend at least three or four days here so you can really see all the sights and sounds (and flavors) this unique Northwest city has to offer.

I hope my Seattle itinerary gave you some ideas of things to do and see—but don’t forget to explore on your own too!

There are plenty of hidden gems in Seattle just waiting to be discovered.

Did we miss anything?

Leave a comment telling us all about how much you love Seattle and what you would add to this itinerary.

Need more help planning your trip? Check out our list of essential travel planning resources.  

More articles to help you plan your trip to Seattle  

• The best free and cheap things to do in Seattle
• Weekend getaways from Seattle
• The best places to visit in Washington State
• How to plan a travel itinerary 

Pin this post!  

Darcy Vierow is a busy professional and travel planning expert with years of experience maximizing travel with limited time and on a less-than-average salary. Her tips have been published by Forbes, MSN.com, Yahoo! News, Yahoo! Finance, Aol, Newsbreak and GOBankingRates. Read more about Darcy Vierow .

Leave a Reply Cancel reply

Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

By using this form you agree with the storage and handling of your data by this website. *

Privacy Overview

• Traveler Services
• Why Travel to Japan
• Special Experiences
• Accommodations & Culinary Experiences
• Japan Itineraries
• Signature Journey Collection
• Luxury Ryokan and Hotel Collection
• Hakone and Shizuoka
• Kanazawa and Onsen Areas
• Kyoto and Nara
• Mie and Wakayama
• Our Company & Approach
• Our Difference
• How We Work
• Testimonials
• Awards and Designations
• Japan Corporate Travel Services
• Partners & Affiliations
• Photo Credits
• Privacy Policy
• Terms and Conditions
• Request Information
• Client Questionnaire
• Bespoke Itineraries

Signature Journey Collection Japan Tour Itineraries

From $3,000 per person per day, double occupancy

Welcome to our Signature Journey Collection , representing some of the most amazing and timeless places that remain off well-trodden paths and encompass fabulously beautiful, interesting and culturally enriching areas throughout Japan. Our shorter duration trips are perfect for travelers in the Asia region, cruise shore excursions and for those passing through Japan seeking a very special experience. These Japan tour itineraries can also be added as extensions to any of our bespoke ‘tailor-made’ tours and can be joined with each other. Combined with some of the absolute best and eclectic accommodations in the country, our journeys are masterfully crafted to meet the interests and passions of our clients.

From the northern island of Hokkaido and its great outdoors to the spiritual centers of Koyasan and Ise to the art and hot spring rich areas on the Island of Kyushu to remote and untouched islands in Japan, let JapanQuest Journeys offer you the chance to explore Japan’s mysteries and delights undisturbed and in-depth, unlocking thousand year-old secrets one by one.

Featured In

Join Our Mailing List

Sign up for the JapanQuest Journeys mailing list to stay in contact and receive our latest news.

• Luxury Accommodations
• (202) 455-0095 (US)
• Contact Us →
• Back To Top

Remote and Untouched Japan Tour Itinerary (4 Days | 3 Nights)

Revisit the mainland 2-days later when you will take a 2.0-hour hydrofoil journey on the open sea from Yakushima to Kagoshima. In Kagoshima, stroll through Senganen Garden also known as Isoteien, a Japanese style landscape garden along the coast. One of its most striking features is its borrowed scenery of Sakurajima (a live volcano) and Kagoshima Bay. From Kagoshima, venture by car to Kumamoto on a 2-hour and 20-minute drive then a 30-minute ferry ride to Unzen where you will stay at a beautiful ryokan.

The following morning of day four you will be driven to Nagasaki where you will be introduced to Koshi-byo Confucian Temple, one of the few beautiful shrines dedicated to the Chinese philosopher Confucius in Japan and Nagasaki Peace Park commemorating the atomic bombing of Nagasaki on August 9, 1945. A monument around a black pillar marks the atomic explosion's epicenter in the nearby Hypocenter Park.

Enchanting Kyushu Japan Tour Itinerary (4 Days | 3 Nights)

Journey to Onta the following morning which will bring you back to the stone ages where rustic pottery is made before one's eyes. A giant mallet fed by a river running through the center of Onta adorns this small village where one can see rocks crushed to make clay in this age-old setting of stone kilns. Moving onward you will travel through central Kyushu to the pottery town of Karatsu located on the Sea of Japan coast. One of Japan's world-renowned pottery towns, Karatsu is a must-see for yakimono (pottery or ceramic ware) fans. Already a well-known pottery town, Karatsu's Korean influences elevated it from useful ceramic ware to art. Karatsu-made vessels are some of the finest in Japan. In Karatsu, visit with several well-known potters at their studios. Spend the night at a splendid Japanese inn in Karatsu that will make you feel right at home.

We will begin day three's journey in Arita, the town from which the styles of Japanese ceramics most well known in the West derives their name. Arita, the cradle of porcelain manufacturing in Japan, is a quiet town among mountains, located in the western part of Saga. Ri Sampei, a potter from Korea, discovered a fine-quality white porcelain mineral in Mt. Arita-Izumi-yama. This was the beginning of Arita's development into an internationally known town of porcelain. Imari is the European collectors' name for Japanese porcelain wares made in the town of Arita. Following your visit to Arita, take a short drive to Okawachiyama, a village bustling with many kilns in operation and an opportunity to observe potters at work creating their artistic pieces and shops to meander around. Visit the magnificent Imaemon Museum of Ceramic Antiques. After a day spent seeing beautiful ceramics, you will journey southward along glistening Omura Bay to the mountain resort of Unzen on the Shimabara Peninsula where you will spend the evening at a lovely inn in the midst of wooded surroundings.

The Great Outdoors Japan Tour Eastern Hokkaido (4 Days/3 Nights)

Day one of this journey begins with a ninety-minute flight from Tokyo’s Haneda Airport to Hokkaido’s Kushiro Airport. You will be met at the airport and driven approximately thirty- minutes to Kushiro Shitsugen National Park, Japan’s largest wetland and home to the country’s only population of Japanese cranes. You will explore the park on a series of walking trails offering a splendid opportunity for nature viewing and bird watching. From Kushiro Shitsugen National Park you will travel onwards approximately ninety-minutes to Hazel Grouse Manor where you will stay during the duration of your trip in Eastern Hokkaido. Hazel Grouse Manor is a quintessential English style manor house with eight suites offering exquisite food and excellent service.

The following day, you will visit Akan National Park, considered by many to be the crown jewel of Hokkaido, with its stunning lakes. Visit Lake Mashuko, ringed by white birch forest and often enshrouded in mist. Lake Mashuko was revered by Hokkaido’s native Ainu as being the “Lake of Gods.” You will also visit Kussharoko, Hokkaido’s second largest lake in a beautiful mountain setting. Alternatively, you may choose to spend the day at leisure fly-fishing, canoeing or horseback riding.

On day three of your trip to Eastern Hokkaido you will venture forth on a two-hour drive to Shiretoko National Park, a UNESCO World Heritage site that is home to some of Japan’s most rugged and beautiful landscape. You will drive around the Shiretoko Peninsula where mountain streams cascade over cliffs into the sea and where in the autumn, bears can sometime be seen snatching salmon from mountain streams.

You will have a leisurely morning on day 4 of your stay in Eastern Hokkaido before being driven thirty-minutes to Nakashibetsu Airport for your ninety-minutes return flight to Tokyo.

Pure Japan Tour Itinerary (4 Days | 3 Nights)

Visit Seisuiji Temple, one of the most famous temples in Sado Island, erected in 806 Daido-era. The temple is quite famous for its crystal stream well up from the earth, in the mountain behind the temple. From Seisuiji, venture to Chokokuji Temple. Legend has the founding of Chokokuji by Kukai (Kobo Daishi) in 807, but there is no written record of him ever visiting Sado. The exiled Emperor Juntoku is said to have renamed the temple with the same kanji characters as Hasedera Temple in Nara or the Hasedera in Kamakura. One particular treasure of Chokokuji is a wooden statue of an eleven-headed Kannon. Afterwards, take a private tour of Hokusetsu Sake Brewery where you can experience the inner workings of this famed brewery that was selected to supply Nobu Restaurants with its delicious sake.

On day two, visit the beautiful Myosenji Temple with its five-story pagoda and interesting architecture. Following this, experience one of Sado's important Noh Theaters for a behind the scenes experience of this important art form. About one third of the Noh Theater stages in Japan are found on Sado Island. Here, the local color of Noh is so prosperous that Sado also boasts more types of Noh stage than you will find in any other one place. With our special access, you can partake in personal Taiko "drumming" lessons conducted under the auspices of the celebrated Kodo Drummers who are based on Sado Island and have toured the world for over 30 years. Taiko drumming is very rhythmic and awe-inspiring in its power, beat and spirituality. Pure fun to listen and partake. You will also get an inside tour of Kodo Village where the Kodo drummers train and rehearse. While in Sado you will stay at a Japanese style hotel with hot spring baths.

On day three, visit the studio of one of the most famous and talented basket makers in Japan. Afterwards, return from Sado via hydrofoil and experience a fabulous ryokan outside of Niigata, moving to your next destination on day four.

The Land and Sacred Places Japan Tour Itinerary (4 Days | 3 Nights)

The following day, continue south through forests and mountains on a two and half hour drive to Shuzenji on Shizuoka's Izu Peninsula. It is lovely strolling through the quaint hot-spring village of Shuzenji with its historic buildings and bamboo groves. The mystery of Shuzenji is what you cannot see from the streets---its world-class ryokans and onsens tucked away in perfectly groomed gardens hidden away from view. Frequented by foreign dignitaries, they offer only the finest of Japanese hospitality in a relaxing, refined and quintessential setting. While in Shizuoka, enjoy the beauty of its agricultural landscape of tea plantations, mikans and wasabi fields. Try matcha tea making and harvesting a bit of green tea for yourself. Shizuoka is a leading agricultural producer in Japan and you will experience hands-on learning in this region. The evening will be spent at one of Shuzenji's beautiful ryokan or Japanese inns.

On day three, travel further south by car and train via Nagoya to Ise where you will visit the most ancient and holiest of Japanese shrines, Ise Jingu. Of Japan’s thousands of Shinto shrines, Ise Jingu is paramount. The area comprises hundreds of subsidiary shrines but the main structures you will see will be the Outer Shrine (Geku dedicated to the goddess of harvests, homes and food) and the Inner Shrine (Naiku dedicated to the sun goddess and mythical ancestor to the emperor and the Japanese race). The inner sanctum of Naiku contains one of the great imperial treasures; the sacred bronze mirror said to have been presented to the first emperor by the sun goddess Amaterasu herself. The shrines are made of fresh hinoki (cypress) wood from the Kiso Mountains. The evening will be spent in Toba an area of stunning beauty near Ise.

The following day four visit Futamigaura, known for its Husband-and Wife Rocks (Meoto-iwa), two curious outcrops standing in the sea connected by a sacred straw rope when they are symbolically wed each year.

The Mountains Japan Tour Itinerary (4 Days | 3 Nights)

The following day two you will retrace the footsteps of travelers of the Edo-period on a beautiful stretch of the Nakasendo, a road that linked Tokyo to Kyoto during Japan’s feudal period. Visit Kisohirasawa, Narai and Tsumago, evocative Edo-period post towns. Fall back in time in Tsumago, a living museum of old Japan, including some wonderful lacquer ware indigenous to the area. Stay in a beautiful contemporary ryokan in the remote area of Kaida, with a fabulous view of the mountainous terrain and green fields which are filled with colorful flowers in the warmer months.

On day three of this journey, you will venture on a beautiful sojourn through the stunning Japanese Alps to Takayama, a living museum rich with charm located in the heart of central Japan. Its well-preserved homes and shops allow one to glimpse into the Japan of a bygone era. Takayama is a very quaint town and quintessentially Japan. Takayama is ideal for exploring by foot. Visit nearby Takayama Jinya, Japan's only existing provincial government office of the Edo Shogunate or heads of Japan’s feudal regime. Sojourn through Takayama's picturesque Sanmachi Quarter, home to rows of exquisitely preserved merchant houses in which there are a number of sake breweries and stores selling miso or bean paste, products for which Takayama is famous. Takayama also has a plethora of small antique shops to wander around. Enjoy tasting sake at Takayama's many sake breweries. You may choose to spend this evening in a lovely Japanese inn located in the forest near Takayama or at hotel with a panoramic view of the surrounding mountains.

In the morning of day four, journey first to the colorful morning vegetable and flower market. Afterwards, continue your exploration of Takayama.

The Spiritual Japan Tour Itinerary (3 Days | 2 Nights)

Your pilgrimage this first day will start at Hayatama Taisha. You will then travel approximately thirty-minutes to the stunning Nachi Taisha. Following your visit to Nachi Taisha, you will have a ninety-minute journey through mountainous landscape where upon arriving in the Kumano Hongu area. Afterwards, you will embark on a 45-minute walk along the unpaved and beautiful Kumano Kodo Trail with a local trail guide to Hongu Taisha. At the conclusion of your walk you will be at Kumano Hongu Taisha. At Hongu Taisha, you will receive a talk and special blessing from the Shrine's Shinto Priest. Following your visit to Kumano Hongu Taisha you will drive approximately ninety minutes to Nanki Shirahama where you will spend the evening at a Japanese style property with wonderful hot springs.

The following day two will start northward through the heart of mountainous Wakayama to Mt. Koya, Japan's best-known Buddhist mountain retreat. In 2004, UNESCO designated Mt. Koya as a World Heritage Site. Mt. Koya is the heart of Shingon Buddhism and the resting place of the sect's founder, perhaps Japan's best-known Buddhist, known as both Kukai and Kobo Daishi.The eight-forested peaks of Mt. Koya reach eight hundred meters into the clouds, surrounding the high plateau with a sense of serenity and boasting over one hundred temple complexes. Kongobuji Temple, erected by the Shogun Toyotomi Hideyoshi in 1592 and containing fine Kano School (famous Japanese school of artists from the 14th to 16th centuries) screen doors, is the focal temple. A number of the many temples provide temple-stays or shukubo for travelers. Staying on Mt. Koya is one of the best ways to experience Buddhist life in Japan: bathing before a dinner of traditional shojin-ryori or Buddhist vegetarian meal, and rising with the birds for the morning prayers with the monks. It is an absolutely gorgeous and spiritual setting.

Contemporary Arts, Gardens and The Venice of Japan Tour Itinerary (4 Days | 3 Nights)

From Takamatsu you will journey by ferry to Naoshima Island, which has emerged as a center of contemporary art in Japan. On Naoshima you will spend two evenings at Benesse House, designed by famed Japanese architect Tadao Ando as a museum of contemporary art that splendidly blends in with its natural surroundings. Visit the newest museum on Naoshima designed by Tadao Ando which opened in 2010, the Lee Ufan Museum. The museum features works by the Korean contemporary artist Lee Ufan, who was born in Korea but has been working and teaching in Japan. On display are large installations made of stone, concrete and huge slabs of iron, as well as a number of paintings from earlier in his career.

The following day two, take a water taxi on a short ride to the Island of Teshima. On Teshima, rent bikes, choose your route and visit Teshima Art Museum and Les Archives du Coeur. Uniting the creative visions of artist Rei Naito and architect Ryue Nishizawa, Teshima Art Museum stands on a hill on the island of Teshima overlooking the Inland Sea. Shaped like a drop of water, the museum lies in a corner of the spacious grounds surrounded by once-fallow rice terraces that have been restored with help from local residents. "Les Archives du Cœur" compiles recordings of heartbeats from around the world for exhibition, listening, and the creation of an archive. This project is made up of three elements: an installation using recordings of heartbeats, a listening room where visitors are able to listen to archived recordings, and a recording room where their own heartbeats can be recorded. Continue your exploration of Naoshima begun the day before including the Art House Project where artists transform spaces into contemporary artworks while restoring old buildings and shrines. Included in Art House Project are works by artists such as James Turrell and Tatsuo Miyajima. Follow this unique encounter with a must see walk-through of the Chichu Art Museum which is one of the prettiest museums to be encountered anywhere – built specifically to house the works of Claude Monet, Walter De Maria and James Turrell.

From Naoshima on day three, travel on a ferry ride to the Port of Uno where you will travel to Kurashiki where your day will be spent strolling along Kurashiki's willow lined canals, hump-backed stone bridges and dozens of white washed, black-tiled kura or rice storehouses experiencing its immaculately preserved merchant quarter that dates to the Edo period. Also, visit the Ohara Museum of Art with its wonderful collection of Western art including works by Monet, Renoir, Gauguin and Picasso. With a splendid panoramic view from atop Mt. Tsurugatayama, visit historic Achi Shrine that was built to hold back invading sea tides; in time it became the very heart of prosperous Kurashiki. Relax in a fabulous ryokan in the town center.

On day four, travel to Okayama and Koraku-en Garden where you will sip tea in a garden tea house while viewing Okayama Castle. Outside of the City is Kibitsu-jinja Shrine, an old shrine with its main sanctuary built in the peculiar Kibitsu-style, which joins the two roofs of the Irimoya-style with a pitch on the two sides on the upper part and on the four sides at the bottom. Meet with a Shinto priest who will bestow private blessings on you in a very sacred room in a ceremony unique to this shrine.

Scenic Hokkaido, Japan Tour Noboribetsu Onsen and Shikotsu Toya National Park (4 Days/3 Nights)

The following day you will journey onwards by car on a seventy-minute drive to Lake Toya, part of the splendid Shikotsu-Toya National Park. The active volcano that stands proudly near Lake Toya with white smoke rising above it is Mt. Usu. Lake Toya is an ice free lake whose beauty and clarity can be admired year-round. This evening and the following night you will stay at the majestic The Windsor Hotel Toya offering stunning, panoramic views of Lake Toya, Uchiura Bay and the surrounding mountains. This afternoon and the next day you may select from a variety of activities while enjoying the natural beauty of the Lake Toya area: go trekking, canoeing, horseback riding and/or golfing.

Day four of your journey will begin with a scenic ninety-minute drive through the Shikotsu Toya National Park to Lake Shikotsu, a serene caldera lake that is the deepest in Hokkaido. After taking in the beauty of Lake Shikotsu travel onwards approximately thirty-minutes to Chitose Airport for your flight to your next destination in Japan or you may choose to spend an evening in Sapporo, a delightful city that is the capital of Hokkaido.

Advertisement

Scottie scheffler continues dominant run with 2024 rbc heritage win, share this article.

Scottie Scheffler spent an extra night in Hilton Head Island, South Carolina, which typically wouldn’t be such a drag if not for his wife Meredith being pregnant back home in Dallas and awaiting the couple’s first child later this month.

But Mother Nature had other plans, forcing Scheffler to return to Harbour Town Golf Links on Monday morning to play his final three holes of the 2024 RBC Heritage and wrap up his fourth PGA Tour title in his past five starts.

One week and one day after Scheffler slipped into the famed Green Jacket awarded to the Masters champ for the second time in three years, the 27-year-old Texan added another colorful jacket – this time in trademark Tartan – to his closet and became the first reigning Masters champion to win the RBC Heritage since Bernhard Langer in 1985.

Scheffler, who was 4-under through 15 holes in the final round and 20-under overall when play was suspended due to darkness on Sunday, made two pars and a finishing bogey and signed for a 3-under 68 on Monday, three shots better than Sahith Theegala (68) and four better than reigning U.S. Open champion Wyndham Clark (65) and past FedEx Cup champion Patrick Cantlay (68). Scheffler banked another $3.6 million to surpass $18 million in earnings this season – and it’s still April.

“I didn’t show up here just to have some sort of ceremony and have people tell me congratulations,” said Scheffler of avoiding a post-Masters victory hangover. “I came here with a purpose.”

CBS Sports roving reporter Colt Knost, who grew up with Scheffler following him around Dallas’s Royal Oaks Golf Club, already has one of the best nicknames in golf: The Big Gravy. But he may have earned another one – Knost-radamus – for a prediction seemingly as accurate as those of the 16 th century French astrologer Nostradamus. In February 2022, when Scheffler won his first Tour title at the WM Phoenix Open, Knost proclaimed him to be “a worldbeater,” and added, “Now that he’s got that first one, I think the floodgates are going to open for him.”

Scheffler’s latest triumph is his 10 th career title, the first player to win that many times (or more) in three seasons since Dustin Johnson did so between 2015-16 and 2017-18. There’s no indication that this flood of success for the world No. 1 will stop any time soon. Did Knost imagine Scheffler would dominate on the PGA Tour? “I really did,” he said. “He never plays badly and he’s one of the most competitive people I’ve ever met. He will never just go through the motions.”

Theegala, who recalled playing against Scheffler for the first time in the Starburst Junior Golf Classic at Waco, Texas, didn’t remember ever beating Scheffler, who is a year older than him, in a single junior tournament. Competing with Scheffler, who leads the Tour in 30 statistical categories this season, hasn’t gotten any easier lately. “It’s pretty epic,” Theegala said of Scheffler, who has shot even par or better in all 40 rounds this season and became the first player to win four times in five starts since Tiger Woods in 2007-08. “I was talking to Carl, my caddie, walking to 15 tee box. I was like, I grew up watching the end of Tiger, got to see Rory, DJ, Jordan, like all these guys kind of dominate for a period of time, and I was like, we could be in the midst of something really, really special.”

Some observers suggested that Scheffler would skip the RBC Heritage but Scheffler said he never wavered in his commitment to the tournament. After winning the Masters, Scheffler flew home to Dallas to be with Meredith and didn’t show up to Hilton Head until Tuesday. He played only a nine-hole practice round on Wednesday and spotted much of the field a head start, shanking a bunker shot at his third hole in the first round, making double bogey and needing two late birdies to post 69. He trailed by six and complained of fatigue. But after recharging his batteries, he didn’t make a single bogey or worse until the 72nd hole of the tournament, and even in that case Scheffler said he was counting that one as a par as he played the smart shots with a comfortable lead. He stormed back with a 65 on Friday and was lurking three back before reminding everyone who is boss with a bogey-free 63 to claim a one-stroke lead.

In the final round, Scheffler laid down the hammer early, chipping in at the par-5 second hole from 53 feet for eagle. His bump-and-run, executed to perfection, marked his 11 th hole-out of the season. He tacked on a birdie at the par-5 fifth and strung together six consecutive pars before the horn blew. When play resumed he wedged to 6 feet for another birdie at 13. When he made his lone blunder, pull-hooking a 4-iron into the water due to mud on his ball at the par-5 15th, he took a penalty drop and carved a beautiful shot to 11 feet. Darkness had fallen and he could’ve wait until Monday to strike the par putt but he opted to play on and sank it for good measure. While that snapped a streak of 53 consecutive holes without recording a score of more than a four on his card, dating to the 15 th hole in his first round, he pumped his fist with glee for keeping a clean card (to that point).

“I felt like I was due for one to drop,” said Scheffler, whose closing bogey gave him a winning total 19-under 265. “So I figured might as well hit it now.”

Clark mounted an early charge, making an eagle and six birdies in his first 11 holes to inch within a stroke of the lead. But his effort to run down Scheffler was spoiled at the 12 th hole when Clark tried to punch between trees. His ball struck one of them squarely and ricocheted out of bounds. He made double bogey.

“It was kind of fun for a little bit,” said Clark, who improved to a career-best ranking of No. 3 in the world. “Seemed like maybe we had a chance to do something crazy.”

Only Mother Nature could prolong Scheffler’s victory another day. Play was suspended due to inclement weather at 4:28 p.m. ET, for two hours and 32 minutes. The delay meant they ran out of daylight.

But on Monday, Scheffler capped off winning for the fourth time this year, all of them Signature events. He finished tied for second in the only tournament he did not win during his scorching run. For the week, he topped the field of 69 in Strokes Gained: Off the Tee, SG: Tee to Green, SG: Approach the Green and scrambling.

“We’re watching greatness right now,” CBS’s Jim Nantz said. “It doesn’t happen all the time, but it sure is fun when you find yourself witnessing something like this.

Nantz’s NFL broadcast partner, former Dallas Cowboys QB Tony Romo, who played in the Invited Celebrity Classic on PGA Tour Champions last week, estimated he’s played around 500 rounds with Scheffler and said he’s never failed to break 70.

“Which is insane,” said Romo who played with him the week before the Masters at Brook Hollow, a Dallas club. “I have not seen a guy hit a golf ball like this since Tiger back in the 2000s when I played with him, the way he was striking the ball, the compression, the trajectory, the spin rate. It was impressive, and I was like, ‘He ain’t losing that tournament.’ ”

No one stopped him at the RBC Heritage either. Could Scheffler be on his way to a season for the record books? That may depend whether history repeats itself — all 10 of his wins have come in the months of February, March and April. So, time will tell if Scheffler can continue to dominate when the calendar flips to May – just don’t bet against the floodgates closing any time soon.

More PGA Tour

Scottie scheffler 10th all-time in pga tour money by winning often but also winning the big ones, the list of top 18 money winners in pga tour history has plenty of surprises, 2024 rbc heritage prize money payouts for each pga tour player.

Check out the best equipment you can buy: Best drivers for 2024 | Best irons for 2024 | Best putters for 2024 | Best golf balls for 2024

Why didn't the PGA Tour move up Sunday tee times at the 2024 RBC Heritage due to weather concerns? It's complicated

Scottie Scheffler leads 2024 RBC Heritage by 5 but will have to wait until Monday for another jacket

2024 Corales Puntacana Championship prize money payouts for each PGA Tour player

Most popular, stephanie sparks, host of golf channel's reality series 'big break,' dies at age 50, justin thomas thinks it's 'weird' that scottie scheffler plays with high-numbered golf balls, photos: nelly korda celebrates after winning 2024 chevron championship, sunday's final round of 2024 rbc heritage suspended due to darkness after lengthy weather delay, lpga prize money payouts at 2024 chevron championship, where nelly korda earned $1.2 million.

RBC Heritage

Harbour Town Golf Links

Hilton Head Island, South Carolina • USA

Apr 18 - 21, 2024

.css-1hnz6hu{position:static;}.css-1hnz6hu::before{content:'';cursor:inherit;display:block;position:absolute;top:0px;left:0px;z-index:0;width:100%;height:100%;} WiretoWire: Scheffler goes back-to-back again

Presented by

Scheffler builds gap in FedExCup standings

Scheffler makes remarkable look routine, wins RBC Heritage comfortably

By the numbers: Statistics confirm Scheffler's historical dominance

.css-tplryy{font-family:Suisse Intl,"Helvetica Neue",Helvetica,Arial,sans-serif;font-size:1.9rem;line-height:2.2rem;font-weight:600;letter-spacing:-0.01em;}@media screen and (min-width: 768px){.css-tplryy{font-family:Suisse Intl,"Helvetica Neue",Helvetica,Arial,sans-serif;font-size:2.4rem;line-height:2.8rem;font-weight:600;letter-spacing:-0.02em;}} Recent Videos .css-yjoevz{font-family:Suisse Intl,"Helvetica Neue",Helvetica,Arial,sans-serif;font-size:1.5rem;line-height:1.6rem;font-weight:600;letter-spacing:-0.01em;-webkit-align-self:end;-ms-flex-item-align:end;align-self:end;cursor:pointer;} View All

Scottie Scheffler closes out 72nd hole to cement 10th win at RBC Heritage

Collin Morikawa cuts tee shot at the flag and birdies at RBC Heritage

Sepp Straka draws second tight to set up birdie at RBC Heritage

Sahith Theegala drains 28-foot birdie putt at RBC Heritage

Sepp Straka spins wedge below the hole and birdies at RBC Heritage

Scottie Scheffler's masterful par save at RBC Heritage

Recent news view all, wiretowire: scheffler goes back-to-back again.

Scheffler finishes off another win at RBC Heritage to extend dominant run

Golfbet Recap: Scheffler ‘dialed in like nobody’s business’ after cruising to RBC Heritage win

• Sports Betting
• Sports Entertainment

Recommended

Dave portnoy blasts pga tour ‘morons’ as rbc heritage delay threatens $1.6 million bet.

• View Author Archive
• Follow on Twitter
• Get author RSS feed

Thanks for contacting us. We've received your submission.

Dave Portnoy put the “morons” at the PGA Tour on blast as they messed with his bottom line.

The RBC Heritage had to be suspended until Monday morning due to darkness following a lengthy delay stemming from lightning in South Carolina.

Masters champion Scottie Scheffler ultimately won the event upon its resumption Monday.

That delay seemingly irked Portnoy, the founder of Barstool Sports, since he placed a $100,000 two-leg parlay featuring Scheffler winning the tournament that would net him roughly $1.59 million.

With Scheffler leading the pack entering Sunday, Portnoy teed off on the PGA Tour for a move that potentially could have cost him six figures.

“The @PGATOUR f–ks everything up,” Portnoy tweeted Sunday night at 6:10 p.m. ET during the delay. “Are they the only morons on the planet without a weather forecast? How do you not move up tee times today? Pure unadulterated incompetence.”

Why not us? Scottie +Celts. 🤝. #DKPartner pic.twitter.com/bodomjgIG4 — Dave Portnoy (@stoolpresidente) April 20, 2024

Portnoy seems to have a point with this one.

The PGA Tour posted on its website that Sunday could include “a little bit of weather late in the day,” highlighting increased odds of showers and thunderstorms in the afternoon and evening, along with “gusty winds (potentially reaching 20-25 MPH) and heavy rainfall.”

The website even had a graphic showcasing the poor weather that could be on its way.

Scheffler, who entered the day leading the field, and Sepp Straka were scheduled for the final tee time at 1:55 p.m. ET, which pushed up against the window for when the bad weather would start.

Well, apparently the Good Lord wanted to disrupt the best game of their lives, as play had to be suspended at 4:28 p.m. ET on Sunday with groups yet to finish their final rounds.

Scheffler had just started the 12th hole and led the field by four strokes at the time.

“We were hoping to play through this; we felt like we had another 25 minutes left of this heavy rain and were then going to get a break on the back end,” Mark Dusbabek, the PGA Tour’s senior director lead TV Rules & Video Analyst, said on the CBS broadcast, as transcribed by pgatour.com. “We had lightning unfortunately pop up four miles away; just suddenly caught us in, so we had to stop play for this. We’re going to see how things go here and make a decision.

“The course was not unplayable. It wasn’t because of the rain. It was just because the lightning popped up.”

The PGA Tour announced at roughly 5:30 p.m. ET that play would resume at 6 p.m., only to provide an update approximately 15 minutes later that play would not begin at the time.

Portnoy first sounded off on X shortly after 6 p.m.

“This rain delay in the RBC is a DISASTER. You know Scottie doesn’t want to be there,” Portnoy tweeted .

He later posted : “Can the @PGATOUR call a tournament like a baseball game?”

The biggest threat to a Scheffler victory was his vow to leave any tournament if his wife Meredith goes into the labor as the couple is expecting their first child in the coming weeks.

That storyline dominated at Augusta last week as Scheffler rolled to a victory in the first major of the season.

Rounds resumed at 7 p.m. ET but the good vibes didn’t last long as play at Harbour Town Golf Links had to stop due to darkness at 7:45 p.m. ET.

Portnoy bashed that decision while using a hashtag featuring PGA Commissioner Jay Monahan.

“So we get to play for 15 minutes? Hey dummies can you address why you didn’t tee off 2 hours earlier? #PGATour #idiots #monahan ,” he posted.

Scheffler had one of his few hiccups of the tournament when play resumed, hitting his second shot on 15 into the water.

However, he was still able to make par on the par 5 by knocking a wedge to 11 feet and rolling in the putt.

“So #scottie hit a ‘mud ball’ into the water? I hope the idiots at the @PGATOUR are happy with the mockery they’ve made out of this. Coulda just started earlier but nope. #morons,” he posted.

Scheffler had completed 15 holes and led the field by five, with the PGA Tour all but saying he had wrapped up a victory.

“Scheffler’s final three holes could be a formality,” the website read.

Play resumed Monday at 8 a.m. and Scheffler won by finishing 19-under par.

Portnoy finally could relax.

He posted : “Scottie Scheffler may be my favorite athlete of all time. #thankyouscottie.”

The other half of the parlay — the Celtics to win the NBA title — got off to a good start with Boston dominating the Heat, 114-94, in Game 1 on Sunday afternoon.

Boston is the No. 1 seed in the East and the favorite to win the title after a dominant 64-18 regular season.

Share this article:

Advertisement

• LPGA Newsletters
• LPGA Travel
• Women's Network
• LPGA Professionals
• Members Only
• Lesson Zone
• Membership Information
• Find A Teacher
• Professionals Job Board
• Events Calendar
• LPGA Amateurs
• Become A Member
• Member Login
• LPGA Foundation
• LEADERBOARD
• Changing The Face of Golf
• C-Me Action Plan
• Diversity Policy
• Diverse Supplier Opportunity
• Celebrating the Green
• All Access Series
• LIVE Featured Groups on ESPN+
• LIVE Featured Groups (Geo Restricted)
• Instruction
• Live Stream
• Award Winners
• Hall of Fame
• ROLEX FIRST TIME WINNERS
• ROLEX ANNIKA MAJOR AWARD
• 2024 Player Priority List (PDF)
• TOURNAMENTS
• Download Schedule
• Completed Tournaments
• Drive On Championship
• International Crown
• Solheim Cup
• CME Group Tour Championship
• LPGA Local Qualifying Rounds
• Hilton Grand Vacations TOC
• LPGA Senior Championship
• RACE TO CME GLOBE
• Season Standings
• Past Winners
• Explanation and Points Breakdown
• Projected Points Standing
• CME Group Cares Challenge - Score 1 for St. Jude
• Aon Risk Reward Challenge
• KPMG Performance Insights

Streaming Exclusively on ESPN+: Live Coverage of The Chevron Championship, First LPGA Tour Major of 2024

Five things to know about the jm eagle la championship presented by plastpro.

• chevron-championship
• press-release

• More than 40 hours of coverage over four days begins Thursday, April 18, at 9 a.m. ET
• World No. 1 Nelly Korda seeking record-tying fifth LPGA Tour win in a row
• Featured Groups also include 9 of world’s top 10 players, 14 major winners
• No Laying Up contributing “fanalyst” perspectives throughout
• Subscribe to ESPN+ on the ESPN App, ESPN.com and connected TV devices

ESPN+ will stream live, exclusive coverage of The Chevron Championship, the LPGA Tour’s first major tournament of the 2024 season, with a live Featured Groups feed starting Thursday, April 18, at 9 a.m. ET, from The Club at Carlton Woods in The Woodlands, Texas.

• Featured Groups at The Chevron Championship on ESPN+ will showcase nine of the top 10 players in the world and 14 major champions, including current world No. 1 Nelly Korda going for a record-tying fifth consecutive LPGA Tour win, No. 2 Lilia Vu defending her 2023 The Chevron Championship win, and No. 8 Lydia Ko who is only one point away from qualifying for the LPGA Hall of Fame.
• Streaming more than 40 hours of coverage across all four days of the tournament, ESPN+ will present two Featured Groups from both the morning and afternoon waves each day.

Will Haskett will host the Featured Groups coverage alongside analyst Gerina Mendoza, with on-course reports and live player interviews from Hally Leadbetter, Chantel McCabe and Hope Barnett.

• Also, Tron Carter and Cody McBride from  No Laying Up  will provide fresh “fanalyst” perspectives throughout the coverage.

FEATURED GROUPS | Thursday, April 18

Coverage begins at 9 a.m. ET

Morning Wave

Megan Khang / Angel Yin / Bailey Tardy | 8:59 a.m. ET | 1st Tee

• Megan Khang  – No. 13 in Rolex Women’s World Golf Rankings, No. 16 in Race to the CME Globe, LPGA Tour winner (2023 CPKC Women’s Open)
• Angel Yin  – No. 20 in Rolex Women’s World Golf Rankings, LPGA Tour winner (2023 Buick LPGA Shanghai)
• Bailey Tardy  – No. 10 in Race to the CME Globe, LPGA Tour winner (2024 Blue Bay LPGA)

Leona Maguire / Grace Kim / Anna Nordqvist | 9:10 a.m. ET | 1st Tee

• Leona Maguire  – No. 9 in Race to the CME Globe, two-time LPGA Tour winner, two-time European Solheim Cup Team member
• Grace Kim  – LPGA Tour winner (2023 Lotte Championship)
• Anna Nordqvist  – Three-time major winner (2021 AIG Women’s Open, 2017 Amundi Evian Championship, 2009 KPMG Women’s PGA Championship), nine-time LPGA Tour winner

Afternoon Wave

Rose Zhang / Hyo Joo Kim / Nasa Hataoka | 1:48 p.m. ET | 10th Tee

• Rose Zhang  – Won first LPGA Tour event in professional debut (2023 Mizuho Americas Open), 2023 Augusta National Women’s Amateur champion, two-time individual NCAA champion (2023, 2022), former world No. 1 amateur
• Hyo Joo Kim  – No. 9 in Rolex Women’s World Golf Rankings, 2014 Amundi Evian Championship winner, six-time LPGA Tour winner
• Nasa Hataoka  – No. 18 in Rolex Women’s World Golf Rankings, No. 20 in Race to the CME Globe, six-time LPGA Tour winner

Nelly Korda / Minjee Lee / Lilia Vu | 2:10 p.m. ET | 10th Tee

• Nelly Korda  – Seeking fifth consecutive LPGA Tour title, No. 1 in Rolex Women’s World Golf Rankings, No. 1 in Race to the CME Globe, 12-time LPGA Tour winner, 2021 KPMG Women’s PGA Championship winner, 2020 Olympic gold medalist
• Minjee Lee  – No. 5 in Rolex Women’s World Golf Rankings, two-time major winner (2022 U.S. Women’s Open, 2021 Amundi Evian Championship), 10-time LPGA Tour winner
• Lilia Vu  – Defending Chevron Championship winner, No. 2 in Rolex Women’s World Golf Rankings, two-time major winner (2023 The Chevron Championship, 2023 AIG Women’s Open), four-time LPGA Tour winner 

FEATURED GROUPS | Friday, April 19

 Coverage begins at 9 a.m. ET

Céline Boutier / Allisen Corpuz / Ruoning Yin | 8:59 a.m. ET | 1st Tee

• Céline Boutier  – No. 3 in Rolex Women’s World Golf Rankings, No. 12 in Race to the CME Globe, 2023 Amundi Evian Championship winner, six-time LPGA Tour winner, five wins on Ladies European Tour
• Allisen Corpuz  – 2023 U.S. Women’s Open champion, 2023 U.S. Solheim Cup Team member
• Ruoning “Ronni” Yin  – No. 4 in Rolex Women’s World Golf Rankings, 2023 KPMG Women’s PGA Championship winner, two-time LPGA Tour winner

Charley Hull /Alison Lee / Angela Stanford | 9:21 a.m. ET | 1st Tee

• Charley Hull  – No. 7 in Rolex Women’s World Golf Rankings, two-time LPGA Tour winner (2022 Volunteers of America Classic, 2016 CME Group Tour Championship), three wins on Ladies European Tour
• Alison Lee  – Two wins on Ladies European Tour, past U.S. Solheim Cup Team member
• Angela Stanford  – Seven-time LPGA Tour winner, 2018 Amundi Evian Championship winner

Jin Young Ko / Patty Tavatanakit / So Yeon Ryu | 2:10 p.m. ET | 1st Tee

• Jin Young Ko  – No. 6 in Rolex Women’s World Golf Rankings, two-time major winner (2019 Amundi Evian Championship, 2019 The Chevron Championship), 15-time LPGA Tour winner
• Patty Tavatanakit  – No. 24 in Rolex Women’s World Golf Rankings, No. 5 in Race to the CME Globe, 2021 The Chevron Championship winner, two-time LPGA Tour winner
• So Yeon Ryu  – Two-time major winner (2017 The Chevron Championship, 2011 U.S. Women’s Open), six-time LPGA Tour winner

Lexi Thompson / Brooke Henderson / Lydia Ko | 2:21 p.m. ET | 1st Tee

• Lexi Thompson  – 11-time LPGA Tour winner, 2014 The Chevron Championship winner, second youngest to win an LPGA Tour event at 16 years old (2011 Yokohama Tire LPGA Classic), two-time Olympian
• Brooke Henderson  – No. 12 in Rolex Women’s World Golf Rankings, No. 4 in Race to the CME Globe, two-time major winner (2022 Amundi Evian Championship, 2016 KPMG Women’s PGA Championship), 13-time LPGA Tour winner
• Lydia Ko  – No. 8 in Rolex Women’s World Golf Rankings, No. 2 in Race to the CME Globe, two-time major winner (2016 The Chevron Championship, 2015 Amundi Evian Championship), 20-time LPGA Tour winner, one point away from qualifying for LPGA Hall of Fame

ESPN+ coverage of Saturday and Sunday rounds will be determined when pairings and tee times are announced. 

LPGA Tour on ESPN+

The Chevron Championship on ESPN+ is part of a two-year deal  announced  in November 2023 in which ESPN+ will present live featured group coverage of eight LPGA Tour tournaments through the 2025 season. The first event under the new agreement was the 2023 CME Group Tour Championship last fall, and The Chevron Championship is the first of four LPGA Tour events on ESPN+ in 2024.

This latest deal continues a longstanding relationship between the LPGA Tour and ESPN.

• In 2022, ESPN+ streamed the Kroger Queen City Championship presented by P&G and the Walmart NW Arkansas Championship presented by P&G.
• ESPN televised a schedule of regular LPGA Tour events from 1979-2009, and ABC covered the CME Group Tour Championship from 2015-2018.
• ESPN aired the first two rounds of the AIG British Open from 1982-2002 and all four rounds from 2010-2015, as well as the first two rounds of the U.S. Women’s Open from 1982-2014.
• The first golf ever televised on ESPN was the LPGA Sahara Open on Sept. 8, 1979, ESPN’s second day on air.

The remaining slate of LPGA Tour events on ESPN+ this season will be announced later this year.

Related Articles

Nelly Korda Statement on JM Eagle LA Championship presented by Plastpro Withdrawal

Tickets On Sale for the 2024 FM Global Championship

Nelly Korda Cannonballs Into LPGA History With Win at The Chevron Championship

• Charitable Solicitation Disclosures
• Corporate Sponsors
• LPGA History
• LPGA International
• Sponsorship Opportunities
• Legends of the LPGA

Fan Feature

• LPGA Women's Network
• ADA Act Request
• Anti-Doping Information
• Feedback Form
• Gender Policy
• Integrity Program Information
• Media - Press Site
• Player Login
• Privacy Policy
• Professionals Member Login
• Terms and Conditions
• Ticket Terms and Conditions

Global Tour

• International TV Distribution

Mobile Apps

• Android App
• Top Stories

Princess Anne to jet off on Royal tour just days before Prince Harry is set to return to UK

Princess Anne will jet off on a royal tour just days before Prince Harry is set to return to the UK.

The Princess Royal will travel to Canada from May 3 to 5 on an official visit to the Commonwealth country.

Prince Harry is also expected to return to the UK only a few days after his aunt returns from her tour for an Invictus Games event.

The Invictus Games 10th Anniversary Service was listed on St. Paul’s website for May 8, and on the official running order, the prince is set to speak at the service.

Harry’s wife, Meghan, is “rethinking” the trip as she doesn’t feel safe returning to the UK after Harry lost a court case over his police protection in Britain, according to a source.

Anne last visited Canada in 2023 when she visited the country twice within one month.

Apart from the date and country, the Palace has not released any further details of the princess’s visit.

In May 2023 the princess travelled to Canada to mark the 175th anniversary of the 8th Canadian Hussars.

Only a few weeks later in June 2023, Anne returned to attend a conference in Banff, Alberta in her role as President of The Duke of Edinburgh Commonwealth Study Conferences.

Princess Anne, who is widely regarded as the hardest-working royal, will be undertaking royal engagements two days before her royal tour and will get back to work on May 8.

On her trip to Canada last year, the Princess Royal was greeted by hundreds of people lining the streets hoping for a glimpse of the royal.

The princess has already undertaken an overseas tour to Sri Lanka and Dubai this year.

LATEST ROYAL NEWS:

・ Anne 'phenomenally popular' as King's sister 'highly trusted'

・ Harry releases video just days after US deportation update submitted to court

・ Meghan adds secret personal touch to her new lifestyle brand

During her visit to the Middle East in February, the royal attended the Seafarers Awareness and Orientation Day in Jebel Ali, a port town in Dubai.

In January, the royal went on a three-day visit to Sri Lanka with her husband , Vice Admiral Sir Timothy Laurence, at the request of the Foreign Office.

On their trip, the couple visited the Commonwealth War Graves Commission Cemetery in Colombo and concluded the trip by making a speech about the relationship between Sri Lanka and the UK.

Last year, the princess undertook between 12 and 14 engagements in an average week.